You are on page 1of 0

PASOLINK NEO TE

CX2200
Multi-service Transport Gateway
Command Reference
Cautions
Read this manual carefully before use for proper operation.
Be sure to keep this manual at hand after reading it.
MADE IN JAPAN











































Version Ver. 02.05

Revision History

Revision History
Rev. Published date Description
B January 2010 First edition published




Revision History

(Blank page)


Preface
i













Preface

Preface
ii
Before reading the command reference

This device has two types of modes to use commands.
General mode: Mode to use terminal local set commands that do not involve display system
and configuration update (default)
Privileged mode: Mode to use all commands related to usual maintenance operation such as
display commands and configuration commands







Marks located at the top of descriptions for each command indicate following meanings:
Privilege Indicates that this command can be used in privileged mode.*
General Indicates that this command can be used in general mode.*
* When both are displayed, the command can be used in both modes.
Save Indicates that the settings can be saved.
(Without an indication, the settings for the command cannot be saved.)

Notation in "Input format" includes following meanings.
Parameters enclosed in brackets can be omitted.
When multiple parameters are enclosed in a pair of brackets, all the parameters enclosed
can be omitted.
Example)
[P1] : P1 can be omitted.
[P1 P2] : P1 and P2 can be omitted. Either one of P1 or P2 cannot be omitted.
[P1[P2]] : P1 and P2 can be omitted. P2 can be omitted without omitting P1,
but P1 cannot be omitted without omitting P2.
Commands described with multiple input formats vary parameters to be specified according
to the settings.
In such a case, the key parameter is indicated as "Px (bold italic)" with an explanation.
Example)
P1 (aaa/bbb) P2 P3 : When aaa or bbb is specified in P1, specify P2 and P3.
P1 (ccc) P4 P5 : When ccc is specified in P1, specify P4 and P5.

General
Mode
Privileged
Mode
enable
disable
Mode Transition and Command for Transition
Preface
iii
Notation in "Parameters" includes following meanings.
Braces indicate that one of the keywords delimited by | vertical bars must be selected.
indicates that subsequent parameter to be specified varies according to parameters
previously specified.
In such a case, the affected parameter is indicated as "indent | (vertical bar)". All the
parameters are affected as long as "indent |" continues.
* indicates a supplement for the parameter.
In command input, use ASCII characters (excluding control characters).
Usable characters:
[space] !"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMN
OPQRSTUVWXYZ [\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~
Also, the following characters can be used as VLAN and PVC names.
Usable characters: (The first character must be an alphabetic character.)
Alphanumeric characters, "-", and "_"
Finer restrictions are applied to some commands.
(For details, see the Note field of each command.)

Cautions
(1) No part of this manual may be reproduced without prior written permission of the publisher.
(2) The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice.
(3) All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of all information in this manual.
If you notice any part unclear, incorrect, or omitted in this manual, contact NEC.
(4) NEC assumes no liability for the result of operations despite (3).
(5) If you find any missing pages or pages out of order in this manual, please contact NEC for a
replacement.

Preface
iv















(Blank page)


Preface
v
Contents

Preface..............................................................................................i

Before reading the command reference...............................................................ii
1 Operation Modes ..................................................................... 1-1

Logout .................................................................................................................... 1-2
Switch from general mode to privileged mode ....................................................... 1-3
Switch from privileged mode to general mode ....................................................... 1-4
Setting of privileged mode password ..................................................................... 1-5
Clearing of privileged mode password................................................................... 1-6
Setting of login password....................................................................................... 1-7
Clearing of login password..................................................................................... 1-8
Setting of terminal prompt ...................................................................................... 1-9
Setting of scroll control defaults ............................................................................1-10
Setting of local terminal scroll control....................................................................1-11
Setting of autonomous message output................................................................1-12
Setting of automatic logout time............................................................................1-13
Display of terminal information..............................................................................1-14
Registration of user account .................................................................................1-15
Display of user account.........................................................................................1-16
Clearing of user account .......................................................................................1-17
2 Global Configuration............................................................... 2-1

Setting of administrator contact.............................................................................. 2-2
Setting of system name ......................................................................................... 2-3
Setting of system location ...................................................................................... 2-4
Display of system information ................................................................................ 2-5
Setting of date and time......................................................................................... 2-6
Setting of timezone ................................................................................................ 2-7
Setting of daylight saving time ............................................................................... 2-8
Display of date and time .......................................................................................2-11
Clearing of daylight saving time ............................................................................2-12
Preface
vi
3 Administration Ports............................................................... 3-1

Setting of outband IP address................................................................................ 3-2
Clearing of outband IP address.............................................................................. 3-3
Setting of in-band IP address................................................................................. 3-4
Display of in-band port setup information............................................................... 3-5
Clearing of in-band IP address............................................................................... 3-6
Setting of default gateway...................................................................................... 3-7
Clearing of default gateway.................................................................................... 3-8
Setting of static route ............................................................................................. 3-9
Display of network information..............................................................................3-10
Clearing of static route..........................................................................................3-12
Setting of outband port speed/communication direction .......................................3-13
Setting of outband port flow control.......................................................................3-14
Display of outband port setup information.............................................................3-15
Block/unblock of in-band port................................................................................3-17
Setting of in-band port VLAN ................................................................................3-18
Clearing of in-band port VLAN..............................................................................3-19
Checking of connection.........................................................................................3-20
4 Ports.......................................................................................... 4-1

Setting of port blocking/unblocking ........................................................................ 4-2
Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-X .................................................................... 4-3
Setting of GbE port media...................................................................................... 4-5
Setting of flow control............................................................................................. 4-6
Setting of port link protection time.......................................................................... 4-7
Setting of SNMP link trap transmission.................................................................. 4-8
Setting of port frame .............................................................................................. 4-9
Setting of port mode..............................................................................................4-11
Setting of ATM transmission path clock ................................................................4-13
Display of port setting and status information .......................................................4-14
Setting of port cable length ...................................................................................4-20
Display of port cable length settings .....................................................................4-21
Setting of impedance ............................................................................................4-23
Display of impedance setting ................................................................................4-24
Preface
vii
5 VLAN......................................................................................... 5-1

Setting of tagbase VLAN........................................................................................ 5-2
Clearing of tagbase VLAN...................................................................................... 5-3
Setting of portbase VLAN....................................................................................... 5-4
Display of VLAN table per port............................................................................... 5-5
Display of VLAN table per VLAN............................................................................ 5-6
Setting of portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc........................................... 5-7
Setting of VLAN tag swapping ............................................................................... 5-8
Display of VLAN tag swapping information............................................................ 5-9
Clearing of VLAN tag swapping ............................................................................5-10
Display of number of VLAN entries.......................................................................5-11
Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition.................................................5-13
Display of Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition .............................5-14
Setting of VLAN name ..........................................................................................5-15
Clearing of VLAN name ........................................................................................5-16
6 QoS ........................................................................................... 6-1

Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN................................ 6-2
Setting of priority mapping function per input VLAN............................................... 6-4
Setting of priority discard function per input VLAN................................................. 6-7
Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN ..............................6-11
Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN.............................6-14
Setting of input CoS priority mapping....................................................................6-16
Display of input CoS priority mapping...................................................................6-17
Setting of input CoS priority mapping enable/disable............................................6-18
Display of input CoS priority mapping enable/disable...........................................6-19
Setting of L2 switch buffer.....................................................................................6-20
Display of L2 switch buffer ....................................................................................6-22
Setting of class mapping for switch fabric .............................................................6-24
Display of class mapping setting of switch fabric ..................................................6-26
Setting of output bandwidth...................................................................................6-27
Display of output bandwidth..................................................................................6-31
Setting the output WRED function ........................................................................6-34
Display of the output WRED function....................................................................6-36
Preface
viii
7 Switch Control ......................................................................... 7-1

Setting of frame size .............................................................................................. 7-2
Display of frame size.............................................................................................. 7-3
Setting of aging time .............................................................................................. 7-4
Display of aging time.............................................................................................. 7-5
Display of MAC learning count per port ................................................................. 7-6
Display of MAC learning count per VLAN .............................................................. 7-8
Display of MAC learning count per device ............................................................. 7-9
Display of MAC learning information per port........................................................7-10
Clearing of MAC learning information per port ......................................................7-12
Display of MAC learning information per VLAN ....................................................7-13
Clearing of MAC learning information per VLAN...................................................7-15
8 Route Control........................................................................... 8-1

Setting of spanning tree protocol enable/disable support ...................................... 8-2
Setting of spanning tree mode ............................................................................... 8-3
Display of spanning tree mode............................................................................... 8-4
Setting of switch priority ......................................................................................... 8-5
Setting of spanning tree timer ................................................................................ 8-6
Setting of hold count .............................................................................................. 8-7
Display of spanning tree switch information........................................................... 8-8
Setting of spanning tree enable/disable per port...................................................8-10
Setting of priority per port......................................................................................8-11
Setting of path cost per port ..................................................................................8-12
Display of spanning tree port information..............................................................8-13
Setting of edge port...............................................................................................8-15
Display of edge port ..............................................................................................8-16
Setting of point-to-point .........................................................................................8-17
Display of point-to-point ........................................................................................8-18
Setting of link aggregation group ..........................................................................8-19
Display of link aggregation setting status..............................................................8-21
Clearing of link aggregation group ........................................................................8-23
Setting of system priority.......................................................................................8-24
Display of system priority ......................................................................................8-25
Setting of port priority............................................................................................8-26
Display of port priority ...........................................................................................8-27
Preface
ix
Setting of link aggregation protection time ............................................................8-28
Display of link aggregation protection time............................................................8-29
9 Filters........................................................................................ 9-1

Setting/clearing of port isolate................................................................................ 9-2
Display of port isolate setting state ........................................................................ 9-4
Setting of input filtering .......................................................................................... 9-6
Display of input filtering.......................................................................................... 9-8
Clearing of input filtering ........................................................................................ 9-9
10 EtherOAM............................................................................. 10-1

Setting of MEG......................................................................................................10-2
Display of MEG setting information.......................................................................10-3
Clearing of MEG ...................................................................................................10-5
Setting of MEP......................................................................................................10-6
Display of MEP setting information .......................................................................10-8
Clearing of MEP..................................................................................................10-12
Setting of test target MEP...................................................................................10-13
Display of test target MEP...................................................................................10-14
Clearing of test target MEP.................................................................................10-15
Setting of associated MEP ID .............................................................................10-16
Clearing of associated MEP ID...........................................................................10-17
Setting of EtherOAM frame common information................................................10-18
Display of EtherOAM frame common information...............................................10-19
Setting of Reply frame returning period ..............................................................10-20
Display of Reply frame returning period..............................................................10-21
Display of EtherOAM MAC address....................................................................10-22
Setting of EtherOAM Continuity Check transmission..........................................10-23
Setting of RDI operation......................................................................................10-24
Display of final fault information ..........................................................................10-25
Display of CCM error cause................................................................................10-26
Clearing of CCM error cause ..............................................................................10-28
Executing of ETH-LB ..........................................................................................10-29
Executing of ETH-LT...........................................................................................10-31
Executing of ETH-DM.........................................................................................10-33
Executing of ETH-LM..........................................................................................10-35
Preface
x
Setting of EtherRing enable/disable....................................................................10-38
Setting of EtherRing control VLAN......................................................................10-39
Setting of EtherRing RPL port.............................................................................10-40
Setting of EtherRing timer ...................................................................................10-41
Clearing of EtherRing loop detection status........................................................10-42
Display of EtherRing configuration information ...................................................10-43
Display of EtherRing status information..............................................................10-45
11 ATM Control ......................................................................... 11-1

Registration of PVC ..............................................................................................11-2
Clearing of PVC....................................................................................................11-3
Registration of PVC name.....................................................................................11-4
Clearing of PVC name ..........................................................................................11-5
Setting of PVC blocking/unblocking ......................................................................11-6
Setting of enbloc PVC blocking/unblocking...........................................................11-7
Display of PVC setting information........................................................................11-8
Setting of ATMoP mode......................................................................................11-10
Setting of ATMoP format.....................................................................................11-12
Display of ATMoP format information .................................................................11-14
Clearing of ATMoP format setting.......................................................................11-16
Setting of path between ATMs............................................................................11-17
Display of path information between ATMs.........................................................11-20
Clearing path setting between ATMs ..................................................................11-21
Setting of ATM cell concatenation group ............................................................11-22
Display of ATM cell concatenation information ...................................................11-24
Clearing of ATM cell concatenation group ..........................................................11-26
Setting of ATM cell concatenation member.........................................................11-27
Clearing of ATM cell concatenation member ......................................................11-29
12 ATM-QoS .............................................................................. 12-1

Setting of ATM shaper ..........................................................................................12-2
Display of ATM shaper..........................................................................................12-3
Clearing of ATM shaper ........................................................................................12-5
Setting of Strict Priority mapping...........................................................................12-6
Display of Strict Priority mapping ..........................................................................12-8
Setting of Egress CLP conversion mode ..............................................................12-9
Preface
xi
Setting of Egress CLP conversion priority...........................................................12-10
Display of Egress CLP conversion setting status................................................12-11
Setting of CLP-PW Priority mapping...................................................................12-13
Display of CLP-PW Priority mapping setting status ............................................12-15
13 ATM-OAM............................................................................. 13-1

Setting of ATM-OAM operation.............................................................................13-2
Setting of ATM-OAM flow point.............................................................................13-4
Display of ATM-OAM setting information..............................................................13-6
Display of ATM-OAM status information...............................................................13-9
14 ATM-IMA............................................................................... 14-1

Setting of IMA group .............................................................................................14-2
Display of IMA group setting information ..............................................................14-4
Display of IMA group status information ...............................................................14-5
Clearing of IMA group...........................................................................................14-8
Setting of IMA clock mode ....................................................................................14-9
Display of IMA clock mode setting information....................................................14-10
15 TDM-Path.............................................................................. 15-1

Setting of TDM group............................................................................................15-2
Display of TDM group setting information.............................................................15-3
Clearing of TDM group..........................................................................................15-4
Setting of TDM path..............................................................................................15-5
Display of TDM path setting information ...............................................................15-6
Clearing of TDM path............................................................................................15-7
16 TDM over Packet.................................................................. 16-1

Setting of TDMoP mode........................................................................................16-2
Setting of TDMoP group........................................................................................16-4
Display of TDMoP group setting information.........................................................16-6
Clearing of TDMoP group .....................................................................................16-8
Setting of TDMoP connection ...............................................................................16-9
Display of TDMoP connection setting .................................................................16-11
Clearing of TDMoP connection ...........................................................................16-14
Setting of variation tolerance...............................................................................16-15
Preface
xii
Display of variation tolerance..............................................................................16-17
Display of TDMoP path setting status information ..............................................16-18
Setting of TDMoP format.....................................................................................16-19
Display of TDMoP format setting ........................................................................16-21
Clearing of TDMoP format ..................................................................................16-24
Setting of TDMoP blocking..................................................................................16-25
Resetting of CESoP device.................................................................................16-26
Display of CESoP device status..........................................................................16-27
17 Clock Control ....................................................................... 17-1

Setting of port (line)-independent clock mode.......................................................17-2
Setting of reference clock priority..........................................................................17-3
Setting of reference clock switchover mode..........................................................17-5
Resetting of reference clock..................................................................................17-6
Setting of reference clock group ...........................................................................17-7
Display of reference clock information ..................................................................17-9
Setting of adaptive clock .....................................................................................17-12
Display of adaptive clock setting.........................................................................17-14
Clearing of adaptive clock...................................................................................17-19
Setting of adaptive clock mode ...........................................................................17-21
Setting of adaptive clock format ..........................................................................17-23
Clearing of adaptive clock format setting ............................................................17-25
18 Network Management ......................................................... 18-1

Setting of SNMP enable/disable ...........................................................................18-2
Setting of SNMP manager ....................................................................................18-3
Setting of SNMP trap manager .............................................................................18-4
Clearing of SNMP manager settings.....................................................................18-5
Clearing of SNMP trap manager settings..............................................................18-6
Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission .....................................18-7
Display of SNMP setting information.....................................................................18-8
Setting of access list ...........................................................................................18-11
Display of access list...........................................................................................18-12
Clearing of access list .........................................................................................18-13
Display of session...............................................................................................18-14
Clearing of session .............................................................................................18-15
Preface
xiii
Setting of remote log enable/disable...................................................................18-16
Setting of syslog server and message facility .....................................................18-17
Display of syslog server configuration information..............................................18-18
Clearing of syslog server.....................................................................................18-19
Setting of syslog message level remapping........................................................18-20
Display of syslog message level mapping status................................................18-21
Clearing of syslog message level remapping......................................................18-22
Display of local log..............................................................................................18-23
Clearing of local log ............................................................................................18-25
Setting of NTP access time.................................................................................18-26
Setting of IP address of NTP server....................................................................18-27
Display of NTP server setting information...........................................................18-28
Clearing of IP address of NTP server .................................................................18-29
19 Network Test ........................................................................ 19-1

Starting of ATM loopback test ...............................................................................19-2
Setting of ATM loopback source ID.......................................................................19-6
Display of ATM loopback source ID......................................................................19-7
Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode ...........................................................19-8
Display of ATM loopback monitoring configuration ...............................................19-9
Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function......................................................19-12
Display of ATM loopback monitoring information................................................19-14
Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring function....................................................19-16
20 Monitors................................................................................ 20-1

Display of port counter ..........................................................................................20-2
Clearing of port counter ........................................................................................20-5
Display of discard counter.....................................................................................20-6
Registration of VLAN counter................................................................................20-9
Display of VLAN counter registration information................................................20-10
Clearing of VLAN counter registration.................................................................20-11
Display of VLAN counter .....................................................................................20-12
Clearing of VLAN counter ...................................................................................20-16
Registration of PVC for OAM counter .................................................................20-17
Display of PVC for OAM counter.........................................................................20-18
Clearing of PVC for OAM counter .......................................................................20-19
Preface
xiv
Display of cell counter information ......................................................................20-20
Display of cell counter information per F4...........................................................20-23
Display of cell counter information per F5...........................................................20-26
Display of cell counter information per IMA group port .......................................20-29
Clearing of cell counter information.....................................................................20-31
Display of port (line) quality counter....................................................................20-32
Registration of EtherOAM counter ......................................................................20-34
Display of EtherOAM counter registration information ........................................20-35
Clearing of EtherOAM counter registration .........................................................20-37
Display of EtherOAM counter..............................................................................20-38
Setting of mirroring start or stop..........................................................................20-39
Display of mirroring settings................................................................................20-40
21 Maintenance and Operation ............................................... 21-1

Uploading of running configuration to FTP server.................................................21-2
Uploading of startup configuration to FTP server..................................................21-3
Uploading of system log to FTP server .................................................................21-4
Uploading of setting information to FTP server .....................................................21-5
Uploading of fault information to FTP server.........................................................21-6
Downloading of FPGA ..........................................................................................21-7
Downloading of software.......................................................................................21-9
Downloading of running configuration from FTP server ......................................21-10
Downloading of startup configuration from FTP server .......................................21-11
Display of running configuration..........................................................................21-12
Display of startup configuration...........................................................................21-14
Setting of trap transmission selection .................................................................21-16
Display of trap transmission selection setting status...........................................21-19
Display of all setting information .........................................................................21-22
Saving of setting information...............................................................................21-24
Clearing of startup configuration .........................................................................21-25
Display of current fault and alarm information.....................................................21-26
Clearing of WR fault ............................................................................................21-28
Display of past fault information..........................................................................21-29
Clearing of past fault information ........................................................................21-32
Display of device installation status and other various statuses..........................21-33
Display of bridge information for device..............................................................21-35
Preface
xv
Display of module ID information ........................................................................21-36
Display of various version information ................................................................21-38
Display of device temperature.............................................................................21-40
Setting of autonomous rebooting enable/disable ................................................21-41
Display of autonomous rebooting settings ..........................................................21-42
Display of CPU usage.........................................................................................21-43
Display of memory usage....................................................................................21-44
22 Device Control ..................................................................... 22-1

Resetting of entire device......................................................................................22-2
Display of reset factor ...........................................................................................22-4
23 Appendix .............................................................................. 23-1

Appendix 1 Commands shown by configuration display and show all.......23-2
Appendix 2 Port (line) interface type conditions ...........................................23-9

















(blank page)

Operation Modes
1-1













1
Operation Modes


Operation Modes
1-2

General Privilege Save
exit
Logout
This command is used for logout from CLI.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# exit

Output item



Related
commands
enable Switch from general mode to privileged mode
disable Switch from privileged mode to general mode


Operation Modes
1-3

General Privilege Save
enable
Switch from general mode to privileged mode
Enables you to switch from general mode to privileged mode.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition Interactively enter your privileged mode password. When not setting this password,
press [Enter].

Note None
Input example
*Switch> enable
Input enable password:
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
exit Logout
disable Switch from privileged mode to general mode


Operation Modes
1-4

General Privilege Save
disable
Switch from privileged mode to general mode
Enables you to switch from privileged mode to general mode.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# disable
*Switch>

Output item



Related
commands
exit Logout
enable Switch from general mode to privileged mode


Operation Modes
1-5

General Privilege Save
set enable password
Setting of privileged mode password
Sets your privileged mode password.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition Set your privileged mode password interactively.
Note Set this password with 4 to 16 ASCII characters other than [space], [!], [?], and [control
character].

Input example
*Switch# set enable password
Input old enable password:
Input new enable password:
Retype new enable password:
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
enable Switch from general mode to privileged mode
clear enable password Clearing of privileged mode password


Operation Modes
1-6

General Privilege Save
clear enable password
Clearing of privileged mode password
Clears your privileged mode password.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition Clear your privileged mode password interactively.
Note Set this password with 4 to 16 ASCII characters other than [space], [!], [?], and [control
character].

Input example
*Switch# clear enable password
Input old enable password:
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
enable Switch from general mode to privileged mode
set enable password Setting of privileged mode password


Operation Modes
1-7

General Privilege Save
set login password
Setting of login password
Sets your login password.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition Set your login password interactively.
Note Set this password with 4 to 16 ASCII characters other than [space], [!], [?], and [control
character].

Input example
*Switch# set login password
Input old password:
Input new password:
Retype new password:
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
exit Logout
clear login password Clearing of login password


Operation Modes
1-8

General Privilege Save
clear login password
Clearing of login password
Clears your login password.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition Clear your login password interactively.
Note Set this password with 4 to 16 ASCII characters other than [space], [!], [?], and [control
character].

Input example
*Switch# clear login password
Input old password:
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
exit Logout
set login password Setting of login password


Operation Modes
1-9

General Privilege Save
set terminal prompt
Setting of terminal prompt
Sets a terminal prompt.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Terminal prompt name (1 to 20 characters)

Default value P1: Switch
Usage condition None
Notes Terminal prompts for other than the set terminal are set at reconnection.
Set this prompt name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character].
When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.

Input example
*Switch# set terminal prompt CX2200
*CX2200#

Output item



Related
command
None


Operation Modes
1-10

General Privilege Save
set terminal scroll system
Setting of scroll control defaults
Sets scroll control defaults.

Input formats - Specifying that screen scroll stop is off
P1 (off)
- Specifying that screen scroll stop is on
[P1 (on) ] [P2]
Parameters P1: Scroll control { off | on }
off: Screen scroll stop is off
on: Screen scroll stop is on
* When P1 is omitted, on is assumed.
When on is specified in P1.
P2: Number of scroll lines (1 to 99)
* When P2 is omitted, 22 is assumed.

Default values P1: on
P2: 22

Usage condition None
Note Scroll control defaults are set in all terminals at reconnection.
Input example
*Switch# set terminal scroll system on
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show terminal config Display of terminal information


Operation Modes
1-11

General Privilege Save
set terminal scroll local
Setting of local terminal scroll control
Sets local terminal scroll control.

Input formats - Specifying that screen scroll stop is off
P1 (off)
- Specifying that screen scroll stop is on
[P1 (on) ] [P2]
Parameters P1: Scroll control { off | on }
off: Screen scroll stop is off
on: Screen scroll stop is on
* When P1 is omitted, on is assumed.
When on is specified in P1.
P2: Number of scroll lines (1 to 99)
* When P2 is omitted, 22 is assumed.

Default value P1: on
P2: 22

Usage condition None
Notes Local terminal scroll control only for the set terminal is set.
A local terminal operates in scroll control default setting at reconnection.

Input example
*Switch# set terminal scroll local on
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show terminal config Display of terminal information


Operation Modes
1-12

General Privilege Save
set terminal monitor
Setting of autonomous message output
Sets autonomous message output.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Autonomous message control { enable | disable }
enable: Enables autonomous message output
disable: Disables autonomous message output

Default values P1: [RS-232C] enable
[telnet] disable

Usage condition None
Notes Autonomous message output is suppressed during command execution.
Terminals operate by default at reconnection.

Input example
*Switch# set terminal monitor enable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show terminal config Display of Show terminal information


Operation Modes
1-13

General Privilege Save
set terminal logout
Setting of automatic logout time
Sets automatic logout time.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Automatic logout time (0 to 60 minutes)
0: Disables automatic logout time setting

Default value P1: 5 minutes
Usage condition None
Note Automatic logout time for other than the set terminal is set at reconnection.
Input example
*Switch# set terminal logout 60
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show terminal config Display of terminal information


Operation Modes
1-14

General Privilege Save
show terminal config
Display of terminal information
Shows terminal information.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show terminal config
Current Terminal Configuration
==============================
Console TimeOut (minutes) : 60
Output Length : off
Alarm Monitor : disabled

Default Terminal Configuration
==============================
Console TimeOut (minutes) : 60
Output Length : 99

*Switch#

Output items Console TimeOut (minutes): Automatic logout time (minutes)
Output Length: Scroll control
off: Screen scroll stop is off
XX: Scroll line
Alarm Monitor: Autonomous message output control
enable: Enables autonomous message output
disable: Disables autonomous message output

Related
commands
set terminal scroll system Setting of scroll control defaults
set terminal scroll local Setting of local terminal scroll control
set terminal monitor Setting of autonomous message output
set terminal logout Setting of automatic logout time


Operation Modes
1-15

General Privilege Save
set user account
Registration of user account
Registers a user account or changes the password of the registered user account.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: User account name (1 to 10 characters)
P2: Permission specification { read-only | read-write }
read-only: General mode
read-write: Privileged mode

Default value None
Usage condition Set your password interactively.
Notes Set a user account with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character].
When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.
You can register up to six user accounts except the default user account.
You can change the password of the registered user account by specifying the same
user account name and user privilege as the registered user account and entering the
old password.
Set the password with 4 to 16 ASCII characters other than [space], [!], [?], and [control
character].

Input example
*Switch# set user account cx2200 read-write
Input password:
Retype password:
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show user account Display of user account
clear user account Clearing of user account


Operation Modes
1-16

General Privilege Save
show user account
Display of user account
Shows registered user account information.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show user account
User Information
================
User Name Rights
--------------------------------
admin read-write
ippan read-only
tokken read-write
cx2200 read-write

*Switch#

Output items User Name: User account name
Rights: Mode rights
read-only: General mode
read-write: Privileged mode


Related
commands
set user account Registration of user account
clear user account Clearing of user account


Operation Modes
1-17

General Privilege Save
clear user account
Clearing of user account
Clears a user account.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: User account name (1 to 10 characters)

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes You cannot clear the default user account "admin".
Set a user account with 4 to 16 ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control
character].
When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.

Input example
*Switch# clear user account cx2200
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set user account Registration of user account
show user account Display of user account



















(blank page)

Global Configuration
2-1













2
Global Configuration


Global Configuration
2-2

General Privilege Save
set system contact
Setting of administrator contact
Sets an administrator to contact.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Administrator to contact (0 to 255 characters)

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes To return the set administrator contact to the default value, set " " in P1.
Set an administrator contact with ASCII characters (excluding control characters) like
normal command entry.

Input example
*Switch# set system contact abc
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show system information Display of system information


Global Configuration
2-3

General Privilege Save
set system name
Setting of system name
Sets system name.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: System name (0 to 255 characters)

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes To return the set system name to the default value, set " " in P1.
Set a system name with ASCII characters (excluding control characters) like normal
command entry.

Input example
*Switch# set system name CX2200
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show system information Display of system information


Global Configuration
2-4

General Privilege Save
set system location
Setting of system location
Sets system location.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: System location (0 to 255 characters)

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes To return the set system location to the default value, set " " in P1.
Set a system location with ASCII characters (excluding control characters) like normal
command entry.

Input example
*Switch# set system location NEC
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show system information Display of system information


Global Configuration
2-5

General Privilege Save
show system information
Display of system information
Shows system information.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show system information
System Information
==================
SysDescr : NEC CX2200 Ver.02.05.01
System Location: NEC
System Name : CX2200 MBH
System Contact : abc
System Up Time : 0 days, 00:53:41.57

*Switch#

Output items SysDescr: Device information
NEC: Company name (fixed)
CX2200: Device name (fixed)
Ver.vv.rr.mm: Software version
vv: Version
rr: Revision
mm: Minor version
System Location: System location
System Name: System name
System Contact: Administrator contact
System Up Time: Elapsed time after system start (unit: 10 ms)

Related
commands
set system contact Setting of administrator contact
set system name Setting of system name
set system location Setting of system location

Global Configuration
2-6

General Privilege Save
date
Setting of date and time
Sets system date and time.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Date (mm/dd/yy)
mm: Month (01-12)
dd: Day (01-31)
yy: Year (00-99)
P2: Time (hh:mm:ss)
hh: Hour (00-23)
mm: Minute (00-59)
ss: Second (00-59)

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note Second input (ss) can be omitted. If omitted, 0 second is assumed.
Input example
*Switch# date 04/18/06 12:00
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show system date Display of date and time


Global Configuration
2-7

General Privilege Save
set system timezone
Setting of timezone
Sets timezone.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Timezone (hh:mm)
: Sign - or +
hh: Hour (00-23)
mm: Minute (00-59)

Default value P1: +9:00
Usage condition Always specify a sign of time difference.
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set system timezone +09:00
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
date Setting of date and time
show system date Display of date and time


Global Configuration
2-8

General Privilege Save
set system daylight-time
Setting of daylight saving time
Sets daylight saving time.

Input formats - Specifying daylight saving time by date
P1 (date) P2 P3 P4 [P12]
- Specifying daylight saving time by week
P1 (week) P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 [P12]
Parameters P1: Start date (daylight saving time specification by date) specification or daylight
saving time specification by week { first | second | third | fourth | last }
- Start date (daylight saving time specification by date) (mm/dd)
mm: Month (01-12)
dd: Date (01-31)
- Daylight saving time specification by week
first: The first week
second: The second week
third: The third week
fourth: The fourth week
last: The last week
When start date is specified in P1.
P2: Start time (hh/mm)
hh: Hour (00-23)
mm: Minute (00-59)
P3: End date (mm/dd)
mm: Month (01-12)
dd: Date (01-31)
P4: End time (hh/mm)
hh: Hour (00-23)
mm: Minute (00-59)
Global Configuration
2-9
When daylight saving time specification by week is specified in P1.
P5: a start day of the week { sunday | monday | tuesday | wednesday |
thursday | friday | Saturday }
sunday: Sunday
monday: Monday
tuesday: Tuesday
wednesday: Wednesday
thursday: Thursday
friday: Friday
saturday: Saturday
P6: Start month (1-12)
P7: Start time (hh:mm)
hh: Hour (00-23)
mm: Minute (00-59)
P8: End week { first | second | third | fourth | last }
first: The first week
second: The second week
third: The third week
fourth: The fourth week
last: The last week
P9: an end day of the week { sunday | monday | tuesday | wednesday |
thursday | friday | saturday }
sunday: Sunday
monday: Monday
tuesday: Tuesday
wednesday: Wednesday
thursday: Thursday
friday: Friday
saturday: Saturday
P10: End month (1-12)
P11: End time (hh:mm)
hh: Hour (00-23)
mm: Minute (00-59)
P12: Time difference by daylight saving time (hh:mm)
hh: Hour (00-23)
mm: Minute (00 to 59)
* When P12 is omitted, 01:00 is assumed.

Default value None
Usage condition In date specification, you cannot specify the same date for start/end date of daylight
saving time. Also, in specification of a day of week, you cannot specify the same
month/date/day of week for start/end date of daylight saving time.

Global Configuration
2-10
Notes When daylight saving time starts, the clock is not set to the set start time, moving
forward corresponding to the time difference by daylight saving time.

Example) When the start time is 1:00 and time difference by daylight saving time is 0:30
0:58 -> 0:59 -> 1:30

When daylight saving time ends, the clock is not set to the set end time, moving
backward corresponding to the time difference by daylight saving time.

Example) When the end time is 2:00 and time difference by daylight saving time is 0:30
1:58 -> 1:59 -> 1:30

If daylight saving time is shorter than time difference by daylight saving time, the
specified end date is changed to that of the next year.

If the start date or the end date is Feb. 29, daylight saving time is applied only to leap
years. If Feb. 29 is set as the start date and the daylight saving time is shorter than
time difference by daylight saving time, the end date is changed to that of the next year
of the leap year. If Feb. 29 is set as the end date and the daylight saving time is shorter
than time difference by daylight saving time, the start date is changed to that of the
previous year of a leap year.

During daylight saving time, (DST) is shown in the current time.

Input example
*Switch# set system daylight-time first sunday 4 1:00 last saturday 10
2:00 0:30
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
date Setting of date and time
show system date Display of date and time
clear system daylight-time Clearing of daylight saving time


Global Configuration
2-11

General Privilege Save
show system date
Display of date and time
Shows system date and time.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Showing type { detail }
detail: Detailed showing
* When P1 is omitted, setting of daylight saving time is not shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show system date detail
System Date
===========
Current Date : 09/21/2006
Current Time : 14:14:47 (DST)
Time Zone : GMT +09:00
Daylight Time Start : 04/02/2006 01:00
Daylight Time End : 10/28/2006 02:00
Daylight Time Offset: 00:30

*Switch#

Output items Current Date: Date
Current Time: Time
Time Zone: Time difference from Greenwich mean time
Daylight Time Start: Start date and time of daylight saving time
Daylight Time End: End date and time of daylight saving time
Daylight Time Offset: Time difference by daylight saving time

Related
commands
date Setting of date and time
set system timezone Setting of timezone
set system daylight-time Setting of daylight saving time


Global Configuration
2-12

General Privilege Save
clear system daylight-time
Clearing of daylight saving time
Clears daylight saving time settings.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear system daylight-time
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
date Setting of date and time
show system date Display of date and time
set system daylight-time Setting of daylight saving time


Administration Ports
3-1













3
Administration Ports


Administration Ports
3-2

General Privilege Save
set ip address out-band
Setting of outband IP address
Sets the IP address and subnet mask of an outband port.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: IP address
P2: Subnet mask

Default value None
Usage conditions You cannot use the network addresses set in the "set ip address in-band" command
(Setting of inband IP address) and the "set ip route" command (Setting of static
route).
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the IP address. ("xxx" is any number.)
You cannot set 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the network address.
You cannot set 0 or 1 to all bits of the host part as the IP address.

Note If you log in via telnet communication, the login session close confirmation message
is output.

Input example
*Switch# set ip address out-band 10.40.50.4 255.0.0.0
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
clear ip address out-band Clearing of output-bound IP address
set ip route default Setting of default gateway
set ip route Setting of static route
show ip config Display of network information


Administration Ports
3-3

General Privilege Save
clear ip address out-band
Clearing of outband IP address
Initializes the IP address of an outband port.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note If you log in via telnet communication, the login session close confirmation message is
output.

Input example
*Switch# clear ip address out-band
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
set ip route default Setting of default gateway
set ip route Setting of static route
show ip config Displays of network information


Administration Ports
3-4

General Privilege Save
set ip address in-band
Setting of in-band IP address
Sets an IP address and subnet mask for the logical interface.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: IP address
P2: Subnet mask

Default value None
Usage
conditions
You cannot use the network addresses set in the "set ip address out-band" command
(Setting of out-band IP address) and "set ip route" command (Setting of static route).
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the IP address. ("xxx" is any number.)
You cannot set 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the network address.
You cannot set 0 or 1 to all bits of the host part as the IP address.

Note If you log in via telnet communication, the login session disconnection confirmation
message is output.

Input example
*Switch# set ip address in-band 1.1.1.1 255.0.0.0
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show in-band information Display of in-band port setup information
clear ip address in-band Clearing of in-band IP address
set ip route default Setting of default gateway
set ip route Setting of static route
show ip config Display of network information
set in-band vid Setting of in-band port VLAN
clear in-band vid Clearing of in-band port VLAN


Administration Ports
3-5

General Privilege Save
show in-band information
Display of in-band port setup information
Shows in-band port setup information.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show in-band information
In-Band Configuration
=====================
Admin: enabled
VID : 100
Name : inband_vlan

*Switch#

Output item Admin: Port block/unblock setting
enabled: Port unblocked
disabled: Port blocked

Related
commands
set in-band admin Block/unblock of in-band port
set in-band vid Setting of in-band port VLAN
clear in-band vid Clearing of in-band port VLAN


Administration Ports
3-6

General Privilege Save
clear ip address in-band
Clearing of in-band IP address
Clears logical interface settings.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear ip address in-band
*Switch#
Output item



Related
commands
set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address
show in-band information Display of in-band port setup information
set ip route default Setting of default gateway
set ip route Setting of static route
show ip config Display of network information
set in-band vid Setting of in-band port VLAN
clear in-band vid Clearing of in-band port VLAN


Administration Ports
3-7

General Privilege Save
set ip route default
Setting of default gateway
Sets a default gateway.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: IP address

Default value None
Usage
conditions
If a default gateway is set in inband communication, a default gateway cannot be used
in outband communication. If a default gateway is set in inband communication, the
default gateway that is already set in outband communication is disabled.
If a default gateway is set in outband communication, the default gateway that is
already set in inband communication is disabled.
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the IP address. ("xxx" is any number.)
If you set 0 or 1 to all bits of the host part as the IP address, this setting may not
provide correct communication.
You can set the network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the
gateway address but this setting does not provide correct communication.

Note If you log in via telnet communication, the login session close confirmation message is
output.

Input example
*Switch# set ip route default 10.20.30.40
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
clear ip address out-band Clearing of outband IP address
clear ip route default Clearing of default gateway
show ip config Display of network information


Administration Ports
3-8

General Privilege Save
clear ip route default
Clearing of default gateway
Clears a default gateway.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note If you log in via telnet communication, the login session close confirmation message is
output.

Input example
*Switch# clear ip route default
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ip route default Setting of default gateway
show ip config Display of network information


Administration Ports
3-9

General Privilege Save
set ip route
Setting of static route
Sets a static route.

Input format P1 P2 P3 P4
Parameters P1: Routing domain (1 to 32)
P2: Destination address
P3: Subnet mask
P4: IP address (next hop)

Default value None
Usage
conditions
You cannot use the network addresses set in the "set ip address inband" command
(Setting of inband IP address) and "set ip address outband" command (Setting of
outband IP address).
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the IP address. ("xxx" is any number.)
If you set 0 or 1 to all bits of the host part as the gateway address or set 1 to all bits as
the destination address, this setting may not provide correct communication.
You cannot set the network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the
destination address. Also, you can set the gateway address for the network address
192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correct
communication.

Note If you log in via telnet communication, the login session close confirmation message is
output.

Input example
*Switch# set ip route 1 1.2.3.4 255.255.255.0 10.20.30.40
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
clear ip address out-band Clearing of outband IP address
clear ip route Clearing of static route
show ip config Display of network information


Administration Ports
3-10

General Privilege Save
show ip config
Display of network information
Shows network information for outband/inband.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition 0.0.0.0 is shown in unset IP address and subnet mask.

Note None
Input example
*Switch# show ip config
IP Table
========
Management Port MAC Address IP Address Netmask
----------------------------------------------------------------------
out-band 00:0b:6d:02:31:4b 10.10.10.10 255.255.255.0
in-band 00:0b:6d:02:31:4c 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

IP Routing Table
================
Destination Gateway
Index Address Netmask Address Port
------------------------------------------------------------------
- 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.10.10.100 out-band

*Switch#

Output items Management Port: OSS port type
MAC Address: MAC address
IP Address: IP address
Netmask: Subnet mask
Index: Routing domain
Destination Address: Destination address
Gateway Address: Gateway address
Port: Band
out-band: Outband communication
in-band: Inband communication
-: No band

Administration Ports
3-11
Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
clear ip address out-band Clearing of outband IP address
set ip route default Setting of default gateway
clear ip route default Clearing of default gateway
set ip route Setting of static route
clear ip route Clearing of static route


Administration Ports
3-12

General Privilege Save
clear ip route
Clearing of static route
Clears a static route.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Routing domain (1 to 32)

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note After this command is entered, execution is confirmed.
Input example
*Switch# clear ip route 1
Would you like to terminate remote session : (Y/N) : y
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ip route Setting of static route
show ip config Display of network information


Administration Ports
3-13

General Privilege Save
set out-band speed
Setting of outband port speed/communication direction
Sets outband port speed/communication direction.

Input format - Specifying port speed (Auto-negotiation)
P1 (auto)
- Specifying the following port speed
-10m-half
-10m-full
-100m-half
-100m-full
P1 (10m-half | 10m-full | 100m-half | 100m-full) [P2]
Parameters P1: Port speed { 10m-half | 10m-full | 100m-half | 100m-full | auto }
10m-half: 10Mbps and Half Duplex
10m-full: 10Mbps and Full Duplex
100m-half: 100Mbps and Half Duplex
100m-full: 100Mbps and Full Duplex
auto: Auto-negotiation
When 10m-half, 10m-full, 100m-half, or 100m-full is specified in P1.
P2: Interface { mdi | mdi-x }
mdi: MDI mode
mdi-x: MDI-X mode
* When P2 is omitted, mdi is assumed.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note If you log in via telnet communication, the login session close confirmation message is
output.

Input example
*Switch# set out-band speed auto
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show out-band information Display of outband port setup information


Administration Ports
3-14

General Privilege Save
set out-band flowcontrol
Setting of outband port flow control
Sets outband port flow control.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Flow control setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables flow control
disable: Disables flow control

Default value P1: disable
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set out-band flowcontrol enable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show out-band information Display of outband port setup information


Administration Ports
3-15

General Privilege Save
show out-band information
Display of outband port setup information
Shows outband port setup information.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show out-band information
Out-Band Table
==============
Port Link Flowcontrol Flowcontrol
Speed Status MDI Configuration Status
-------------------------------------------------------
auto 100m-full auto disabled disabled

*Switch#

Administration Ports
3-16

Output items Port Speed: Port speed setting
10m-half: 10Mbps Half Duplex
10m-full: 10Mbps Full Duplex
100m-half: 100Mbps Half Duplex
100m-full: 100Mbps Full Duplex
auto: Auto-negotiation
Link Status: Port physical link status
10m-half: 10Mbps Half Duplex
10m-full: 10Mbps Full Duplex
100m-half: 100Mbps Half Duplex
100m-full: 100Mbps Full Duplex
link-down: Link down
MDI: MDI setting
mdi: MDI mode
mdi-x: MDI-X mode
auto: Auto-negotiation
Flowcontrol Configuration: Flow control configuration
enabled: Flow control configuration enabled
disabled: Flow control configuration disabled
Flowcontrol Status: Flow control status
enabled: Flow control enabled
disabled: Flow control disabled

Related
commands
set out-band speed Setting of outband port speed/communication direction
set out-band flowcontrol Setting of outband port flow control


Administration Ports
3-17

General Privilege Save
set in-band admin
Block/unblock of in-band port
Blocks and unblocks an in-band port.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: In-band port block/unblock setting { enable | disable }
enable: In-band port unblocked
disable: In-band port blocked

Default value P1: enable
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set in-band admin enable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show in-band information Display of in-band port setup information
set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address
clear ip address in-band Clearing of in-band IP address
set ip route default Setting of default gateway
set ip route Setting of static route
set in-band vid Setting of in-band port VLAN
clear in-band vid Clearing of in-band port VLAN


Administration Ports
3-18

General Privilege Save
set in-band vid
Setting of in-band port VLAN
Sets an in-band port VLAN.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note The VLAN to which the in-band port belongs is set with the "set in-band vid" command.
This VLAN transfers all broadcast, multicast, and unknown unicast frames to the in-
band port.

Input example
*Switch# set in-band vid 1
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show in-band information Display of in-band port setup information
set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address
clear ip address in-band Clearing of in-band IP address
set ip route default Setting of default gateway
set ip route Setting of static route
set in-band admin Block/unblock of in-band port
clear in-band vid Clearing of in-band port VLAN


Administration Ports
3-19

General Privilege Save
clear in-band vid
Clearing of in-band port VLAN
Clears an in-band port VLAN.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear in-band vid
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show in-band information Display of in-band port setup information
set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address
clear ip address in-band Clearing of in-band IP address
set ip route default Setting of default gateway
set ip route Setting of static route
set in-band admin Block/unblock of in-band port
set in-band vid Setting of in-band port VLAN


Administration Ports
3-20

General Privilege Save
ping
Checking of connection
Checks if connection with the host is correct. To cancel the connection test halfway, press Ctrl + c key
combination.

Input format P1 [P2]
Parameters P1: IP address
P2: Execution count (1 to 2147483647)
* When P2 is omitted, 4 times are assumed.

Default value None
Usage
conditions
To cancel the connection test, press Ctrl + c .
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the IP address. ("xxx" is any number.) Also, you can set the network addresses
192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correct
communication.

Note None
Input example
*Switch# ping 192.168.1.212
PING 192.168.1.212: 56 data bytes
64 bytes from 192.168.1.212: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time<5 ms
64 bytes from 192.168.1.212: icmp_seq=1 ttl=255 time<5 ms
64 bytes from 192.168.1.212: icmp_seq=2 ttl=255 time<5 ms
64 bytes from 192.168.1.212: icmp_seq=3 ttl=255 time<5 ms

--- 192.168.1.212 ping statistics ---
4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 0.000/0.000/0.000/0.000 ms
*Switch#

Output item ping response information is output.

Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
set ip route default Setting of default gateway
set ip route Setting of static route


Ports
4-1













4
Ports


Ports
4-2

General Privilege Save
set port admin
Setting of port blocking/unblocking
Blocking a port stops its operation, resulting in link down and communication unavailable. Unblocking it
enables its operation.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 26, 33 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Port blocking/unblocking setting { enable | disable }
enable: Port unblocking
disable: Port blocking

Default value P2: enable
Usage condition When port blocking is set, the "LINK DOWN" message may be displayed. When port
unblocking is set, the "LINK UP" message may be displayed. Whether "LINK DOWN"
or "LINK UP" is displayed depends on the physical connection status of the set port.

Note None
Input example
*Switch# set port admin 1 enable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show port information Display of port setting and status information


Ports
4-3

General Privilege Save
set port speed
Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-X
Sets a port speed and electrical interface (MDI/MDI-X) switching. If auto-negotiation is set as the port
speed, you cannot set MDI/MDI-X because the interface is automatically switched.

Input formats - Setting auto
P1 P2 (auto)
- Specifying the following port speed
- 10m-full
- 100m-full
- 1000m-full
P1 P2 (10m-full|100m-full|1000m-full) [P3]
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Port speed { 10m-full | 100m-full | 1000m-full | auto }
10m-full: 10Mbps and Full Duplex
100m-full: 100Mbps and Full Duplex
1000m-full: 1000Mbps and Full Duplex
auto: Auto-negotiation
When 10m-full, 100m-full, or 1000m-full is specified in P2.
P3: Interface { mdi | mdi-x }
mdi: MDI mode
mdi-x: MDI-X mode
* When omitted: mdi-x

Default value P2: auto
Usage condition - We recommend you to set auto-negotiation in the GbE ports
- The port (line) speed cannot be changed when an aggregation group is specified.

Notes If 100m-full is set for the FE port, SPEED-LED always goes on without reference to the
port status.
If the port speed is fixed at 1000 Mbps for the GbE port (electrical interface), 1000
Mbps fixed connection is performed using auto-negotiation. For connection with an
associated device that performs 1000 Mbps fixed connection without auto-negotiation,
1000m-full link may become unstable. In 1000 Mbps connection, auto is always set for
mdi/mdi-x because auto-negotiation is always used.
For the GbE port (optical interface), auto-negotiation is not used in 1000m-full setting.
However, if the associated device performs 1000 Mbps fixed connection using auto-
negotiation, link may become unstable.
For the GbE port (optical interface), mdi/mdi-x setting is ignored.

Input example
*Switch# set port speed 17 10m-full mdi
*Switch#

Ports
4-4
Output item



Related
command
show port information Display of port setting and status information


Ports
4-5

General Privilege Save
set port type
Setting of GbE port media
Specifies a port (100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T or 1000BASE-X) used in the GbE port.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Port number (25 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Interface type { electric | optical }
electric: 100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T
optical: 1000BASE-X

Default value P2: electric
Usage condition None

Note None
Input example
*Switch# set port type 25 electric
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show port information Display of port setting and status information


Ports
4-6

General Privilege Save
set port flowcontrol
Setting of flow control
Sets whether to enable or disable the flow control function. When enabled, the flow control port controls
frame transmission between itself and an associated device by transmitting/receiving a pause frame.
When the receiving buffer of the local device becomes full, the port transmits a pause frame to the
associated device. When the port receives a pause frame, it suppresses transmission from the local
device.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Flow control setting { enable | disable | auto }
enable: Enables flow control
disable: Disables flow control
auto: Auto-negotiation

Default value P2: disable
Usage
conditions
When setting auto-negotiation in this command, you must specify auto-negotiation as
the port (line) speed in advance. Otherwise, the flow control does not operate. (When
the port speed is set to a fixed speed, auto-negotiation can be set, but the flow control
does not operate.)

Note This device only supports the pause frame reception operation and does not support
the pause frame transmission operation.

Input example
*Switch# set port flowcontrol 17 enable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set port speed Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-X
show port information Display of port setting and status information


Ports
4-7

General Privilege Save
set port protection-time
Setting of port link protection time
Sets the protection time that lasts from when a port link down occurs to when it is recovered.

Input format P1 P2 P3
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Link status { link-up | link-down }
link-up: Link up
link-down: Link down
P3: Link protection time (0 to 7000 msec)

Default value P3: 3000 (when P2=link-up)
500 (when P2=link-down)
Usage condition You can set this protection time (0 to 7000 msec) in units of 500 msec.
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set port protection-time 17 link-up 0
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show port information Display of port setting and status information


Ports
4-8

General Privilege Save
set port link-trap
Setting of SNMP link trap transmission
Sets whether to enable or disable SNMP link trap transmission.
This setting corresponds to ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable setting in the standard MIB ifMIB group.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 26, 33 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: SNMP link trap transmission setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables SNMP link trap transmission
disable: Disables SNMP link trap transmission

Default value P2: enable
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set port link-trap 1 enable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show port information Display of port setting and status information


Ports
4-9

General Privilege Save
set port frame
Setting of port frame
Sets a port frame.

Input formats - Specifying the frame type E1/T1
P1 (e1|t1) [P2] [P3]
- Specifying the frame type SDH/SONET
P1 (sdh|sonet) P2 P3
Parameters P1: Frame type { e1 | t1 | sdh | sonet }
e1: E1 mode specification
t1: T1 mode specification
sdh: SDH physical frame layer
sonet: SONET physical frame layer
When e1 is specified in P1
P2: Line code { hdb3 | ami }
hdb3: HDB3
ami: AMI
* When P2 is omitted, hdb3 is assumed.
P3: Frame format { crc4 | crc4nocas | non-crc4 | unframed }
crc4: CRC4 multiframe
crc4nocas: CRC4 multiframe-no-CAS
non-crc4: non-CRC4 (G.704 basic frame)
unframed: unframed
* When P3 is omitted, crc4 is assumed.
When t1 is specified in P1
P2: Line code { b8zs | ami }
b8zs: B8ZS
ami: AMI
* When P2 is omitted, b8zs is assumed.
P3: Frame format { esf | sf | sf-jpn | unframed }
esf: extended superframe
sf: superframe
sf-jpn: superframe-japanese
unframed: unframed
* When P3 is omitted, esf is assumed.
When sdh or sonet is specified in P1
P2: Port number (1)
P3: Idle cell method setting { idle | unassigned }
idle: idle cell idle cell method
unassigned: unassigned idle cell method

Ports
4-10
Default values In case of 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card
P1: e1, P2: hdb3, P3: crc4
In case of 1ATM155A line card
P1:sdh, P3: idle

Usage
conditions
If the TDMoP operation mode is the cesopsn mode, an error occurs when unframed is
specified for frame format.
When the following settings are entered, an error occurs.
set tdm group
set tdmop group
set port cable-length
set port impedance
set ima group
If the following is set, an error occurs when the setting is changed from e1 to t1 or from
unframed to other than unframed.
set atm-shaper rate
The value that can be specified in P1 varies depending on the card installed.
When an unallowable parameter is specified, an error occurs.
In case of 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card
P1: e1, t1
In case of 1ATM155A line card
P1: sdh, sonet
If the ATMoP mode is set for the port mode setting, an error occurs when T1 mode is
specified for frame type and unframed is specified for frame format.

Note None
Input examples
*Switch# set port frame e1 hdb3 unframed
*Switch# set port frame t1
*Switch# set port frame sdh 1 unassigned
*Switch# set port frame sonet 1 unassigned
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set port mode Setting of port mode
set tdm group Setting of TDM group
set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group
set ima group Setting of MA group
set port cable-length Setting of port cable length
set port impedance Setting of impedance
show port information Display of port setting and status information
set atm-shaper rate Setting of ATM shaper


Ports
4-11

General Privilege Save
set port mode
Setting of port mode
Sets port mode.

Input format [P1 P2] [P3 P4] [P5 P6]
Parameters P1: TDM mode { tdm }
tdm: TDM mode specification
P2: TDM port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P3: TDMoP mode { tdmop }
tdmop: TDMoP mode specification
P4: TDMoP port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P5: ATMoP mode { atmop }
atmop: ATMoP mode specification
P6: ATMoP port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.)

Default values P1: tdm, P2: 1 to 16, 33 to 48
Usage
conditions
If you enter a command specifying the same port number, an error occurs.
The previous values are retained for the omitted port numbers.
When the following settings are entered, an error occurs.
set tdm group
set tdmop group
set ima group
set pvc static
set atm-shaper rate
If T1 mode is set for frame type and unframed is set for frame format in the port frame
setting, an error occurs when the ATMoP mode is specified.
TDMoP mode and ATMoP mode have the different setting ranges for
32T1E1H/32T1E1T line cards.
Line Card TDMoP Mode ATMoP Mode
32T1E1H 1 16 1 16
32T1E1T 1 16, 33 48 -
Note None
Input examples
*Switch# set port mode tdm 1-5 tdmop 6-10 atmop 11-16
*Switch# set port mode tdmop 2-12
*Switch#

Output item



Ports
4-12

Related
commands
set port frame Setting of port frame
set tdm group Setting of TDM group
set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group
set ima group Setting of IMA group
set pvc static Registration of PVC
show port information Display of port setting and status information
set atm-shaper rate Setting of ATM shaper


Ports
4-13

General Privilege Save
set port clock
Setting of ATM transmission path clock
Sets clock supply mode for the ATM transmission path.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Port number (1)
P2: Clock mode { master | slave }
master: Clock independent supply mode
slave: Clock external supply mode

Default value P2: slave
Usage condition You can set clock supply mode only for the 1ATM155A port.
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set port clock 1 master
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show port information Display of port setting and status information


Ports
4-14

General Privilege Save
show port information
Display of port setting and status information
Shows port setup information and the line status.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number (1 to 26, 33 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P1 is omitted, all port numbers are assumed.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input examples
*Switch# show port information 1
Line Port Information Table
===========================
Port Link Cell
Port Admin Speed Status Clock Framing Padding
--------------------------------------------------------------------
1 enabled auto link-down master sonet unassigned

Port SFP Type Tx Error Rx Error SFP Fault
---------------------------------------------------
1 OC3-SI15 normal fail fault(12345678)

Link Trap
Port Status
---------------
1 enabled

SFP Vendor Information
======================
Port 1
-----------------------------------------
Vendor Name : SumitomoElectric
Vendor OUI : 00-00-5F
Vendor Part Number : SCP6F86-GL-CWH
Vendor Revision : A
Vendor Serial Number : 63K056B09308

F1 Status Table
===============
Port LOS LOF
--------------------
1 detect ---

Ports
4-15
F2 Status Table
===============
Port MS-AIS MS-SD MS-RDI MS-ERR MS-REI
--------------------------------------------
1 --- --- --- --- ---

F3 Status Table
===============
Port LOP P-AIS LCD
----------------------------
1 --- --- ---

*Switch# show port information 1,17,25
Line Port Information Table
===========================
Frame
Type Code Framing
------------------------
e1 hdb3 crc4

Port Link Alarm
Port Mode Admin Status Status
----------------------------------------
1 tdm enabled link-down los

Link Trap
Port Status
---------------
1 enabled

Cpusw Port Information Table
============================
Port Link
Port Admin Speed Status MDI
------------------------------------------------------
17 enabled auto link-down auto mdi/mdi-x

Flowcontrol Flowcontrol
Port Configuration Status
----------------------------------
17 disabled disabled

Link Trap Protection Time Protection Time
Port Status Link Up(msec) Link Down(msec)
-------------------------------------------------
17 enabled 3000 500

Line2 Port Information Table
============================
Port Link
Port Admin Speed Status MDI
------------------------------------------------------
25 enabled auto link-down auto mdi/mdi-x

Ports
4-16


Flowcontrol Flowcontrol Type Type
Port Configuration Status Configuration Status
---------------------------------------------------------
25 disabled disabled electric ---

Link Trap Protection Time Protection Time
Port Status Link Up(msec) Link Down(msec)
-------------------------------------------------
25 enabled 3000 500

Tx Rx SFP
Port SFP Type Error Error Fault
------------------------------------------------------
25 1000BASE-SX normal fail normal

SFP Vendor Information
======================
Port 25
-----------------------------------------
Vendor Name : SumitomoElectric
Vendor OUI : 00-00-5F
Vendor Part Number : SCP6F86-GL-CWH
Vendor Revision : N
Vendor Serial Number : 6XK056N13263

*Switch#

Ports
4-17

Output items Frame Type: Frame type setting
t1: T1 port (line)
e1: E1 port (line)
Code: Line Code setting
hdb3: HDB3
ami: AMI
b8zs: B8ZS
Framing: Physical layer frame method
(When Frame Type is E1)
crc4: CRC-4 Multiframe
crc4-no-cas: CRC-4 Multiframe-no-CAS
non-crc4: non-CRC-4 (G.704 basic frame)
unframed: unframed
(When Frame Type is T1)
esf: extended superframe
sf: superframe
sf-jpn: superframe-japanese
unframed: unframed
Port: Port number
PortMode: Port mode
tdm: TDM mode
tdmop: TDMoP mode
atmop: ATMoP mode
Clock: ATM transmission path clock setting
master: Clock independent supply mode
slave: Clock external supply mode
Framing: Physical frame layer setting
sdh: SDH
sonet: SONET
Cell Padding: Idle cell method
idle: idle cell
unassigned: unassigned cell
Admin: Port block/unblock setting
enabled: Port unblocked
disabled: Port blocked
LOS: LOS detection status
---: No alarm
detect: Alarm detection
LOF: LOF detection status
---: No alarm
detect: Alarm detection
MS-AIS: MS-AIS detection status
---: No alarm
detect: Alarm detection
MS-SD: MS-SD detection status
---: No alarm
detect: Alarm detection

Ports
4-18
MS-RDI: MS-ERR detection status
---: No alarm
detect: Alarm detection
MS-ERR: MS-ERR detection status
---: No alarm
detect: Alarm detection
MS-REI: MS-REI detection status
---: No alarm
detect: Alarm detection
LOP: LOP detection status
---: No alarm
detect: Alarm detection
P-AIS: P-AIS detection status
---: No alarm
detect: Alarm detection
LCD: LCD detection status
---: No alarm
detect: Alarm detection
LinkStatus: Port physical link status
10m-full: 10 Mbps Full Duplex
100m-full: 100 Mbps Full Duplex
1000m-full: 1000 Mbps Full Duplex
1.5m-t1: T1 1.5 Mbps
2.048m-e1: E1 2.048 Mbps
155m: 155 Mbps
link-down: Link down
AlarmStatus: Alarm status
normal: No alarm
los: LOS detection
ais: AIS detection
lof: LOF detection
rai: RAI detection
lcd: LCD detection
LinkTrapStatus: SNMP trap transmission enable/disable setting
enabled: Enabled
disabled: Disabled
Port Speed: Port speed setting
10m-full: 10 Mbps Full Duplex
100m-full: 100 Mbps Full Duplex
1000m-full: 1000 Mbps Full Duplex
auto: Auto-negotiation
MDI: Port MDI/MDI-X setting
mdi: MDI setting
mdi-x: MDI-X setting
auto mdi/mdi-x: Automatic recognition
FlowcontrolConfiguration: Flow control configuration
enabled: Flow control configuration enabled
disabled: Flow control configuration disabled
auto: Determined from alignment with the associated device
FlowcontrolStatus: Flow control status
enabled: Flow control enabled
disabled: Flow control disabled
Ports
4-19

TypeStatus: Current line type
electric: Electric module
optical: Optical module
---: Unsupported line (port) type
TypeConfiguration: Line (port) type setting
electric: Electrical line (port) selected
optical: Optical line (port) selected
SFPType: Type of optical module currently being used
1000BASE-SX: 1000BASE-SX module
1000BASE-LX: 1000BASE-LX module
1000BASE-ZX: 1000BASE-ZX module
1000BASE-BX10-D: 1000BASE-BX10-D module
1000BASE-BX10-U: 1000BASE-BX10-U module
OC3-SI15: OC3 Singlemode Interreach 15 Km
OC3-SL40: OC3 Singlemode Longreach 40 Km
OC3-SL80: OC3 Singlemode Longreach 80 Km
Other: Unsupported optical module
unmount: Optical module not inserted
TxError: Optical module output error detection status
normal: No output error occurred
fail: An output error occurred
RxError: Optical module input error detection status
normal: No input error occurred
fail: An input error occurred
SFP Fault: SFP fault status
normal: No fault
fault(XXXXXXXX): Fault (fault information)
SFPVendorInformation: Optical module vendor information
Vendor Name: Manufacturer name
Vendor OUI: OUI
Vendor Part Number: Manufacturing number
Vendor Revision: Version
Vendor Serial Number: Serial number

Related
commands
set port admin Setting of port blocking/unblocking
set port speed Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-X
set port type Setting of GbE port media
set port flowcontrol Setting of flow control
set port protection-time Setting of port link down/recovery detection time
set port link-trap Setting of SNMP link trap transmission
set port frame Setting of port frame
set port clock Setting of ATM transmission path clock


Ports
4-20

General Privilege Save
set port cable-length
Setting of port cable length
Sets port cable length.

Input format - Specifying cable length (short)
P1 P2 (short) [P3]
- Specifying cable length (default)
P1 P2 (initial)
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Length type { short | initial }
short: short
initial: default
When short is specified in P2.
P3: Cable length { 133ft | 266ft | 399ft | 533ft | 655ft }
133ft: 133 ft
266ft: 266 ft
399ft: 399 ft
533ft: 533 ft
655ft: 655 ft
* When P3 is omitted, 133ft is assumed.

Default value P2: short, P3: 133ft
Usage condition The frame type needs to be set to the T1 mode.
Note None
Input examples
*Switch# set port cable-length 3 short
*Switch# set port cable-length 10-12,14-16 short 399ft
*Switch# set port cable-length 5 initial
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set port frame Setting of port frame
set port mode Setting of port mode
show port cable-length Display of port cable length settings


Ports
4-21

General Privilege Save
show port cable-length
Display of port cable length settings
Shows port cable length settings.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P1 is omitted, all ports (lines) are assumed only when the frame type is set
to the T1 mode.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show port cable-length 1
Cable Length Information Table
==============================
Cable
Port Kind Length
-------------------
1 short 266ft

*Switch# show port cable-length 1-8
Cable Length Information Table
==============================
Cable
Port Kind Length
-------------------
1 short 266ft
2 short 266ft
3 short 133ft
4 short 133ft
5 short 133ft
6 short 133ft
7 short 133ft
8 short 133ft

*Switch# show port cable-length 9-10
Cable Length Information Table
==============================
No entry in the table.

*Switch#

Ports
4-22

Output items Port: Port number
Kind: Length type
Cable Length: Cable length

Related
command
set port cable-length Setting of port cable length


Ports
4-23

General Privilege Save
set port impedance
Setting of impedance
Sets impedance.

Input format P1 [P2]
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Impedance setting {e1-75 | e1-120}
e1-75 : 75
e1-120: 120
* When P2 is omitted, e1-120 is assumed.

Default value P2: e1-120
Usage condition The frame type must be set to the E1 mode.
Note None
Input examples
*Switch# set port impedance 1 e1-75
*Switch# set port impedance 1-16 e1-120
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set port frame Setting of port frame
set port mode Setting of port mode
show port impedance Display of impedance setting


Ports
4-24

General Privilege Save
show port impedance
Display of impedance setting
Shows the impedance setting.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P1 is omitted, the impedance setting of all ports (lines) in which the frame
type is set to the E1 mode is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show port impedance 1-16
Port E1 Impedance Information Table
===================================
Port Impedance(ohm)
--------------------
1 e1-75
2 e1-75
3 e1-75
4 e1-75
5 e1-75
6 e1-120
7 e1-75
8 e1-75
9 e1-75
10 e1-75
11 e1-75
12 e1-75
13 e1-120
14 e1-120
15 e1-75
16 e1-75

*Switch# show port impedance 17-26
Port E1 Impedance Information Table
===================================
No entry in the table.

*Switch#

Output items Port: Port number
Impedance(ohm): Impedance setting
Ports
4-25

Related
command
set port impedance Setting of impedance



















(blank page)

VLAN
5-1













5
VLAN


VLAN
5-2

General Privilege Save
set vlan tagbase
Setting of tagbase VLAN
Sets a tagbase VLAN.

Input format P1 [P2]
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (single specification)
P2: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
* When P2 is omitted, no VLAN member is assumed.

Default value None
Usage
conditions
You can register up to 256 VLANs per device.
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set vlan tagbase 17 4094
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
clear vlan tagbase Clearing of tag base VLAN
show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port
show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN


VLAN
5-3

General Privilege Save
clear vlan tagbase
Clearing of tagbase VLAN
Clears a tagbase VLAN.

Input format P1 [P2]
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (single specification)
P2: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
* When P2 is omitted, all VLANs are cleared.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note When P2 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.
Input example
*Switch# clear vlan tagbase 17
Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN
show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port
show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN
set vlan member Setting of portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc


VLAN
5-4

General Privilege Save
set vlan portbase
Setting of portbase VLAN
Sets a portbase VLAN.

Input format P1 P2 [P3]
Parameters P1: Port number(17 to 26) (single specification)
P2: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
P3: Frame type { admit-all | untag }
admit-all: All frames are transmissive
untag: Frames without tags and tags whose Ethernet types are not 0x8100 are
transmissive
* When P3 is omitted, admit-all is assumed.

Default value P3: admit-all
Usage
conditions
You can register up to 256 VLANs per device.
You cannot set untag as the frame type for the ports where an Ethernet type other than
0x8100 is set.

Note To clear a portbase VLAN, set a tagbase VLAN (no VLAN).
Input example
*Switch# set vlan portbase 17 1 admit-all
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port
show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN


VLAN
5-5

General Privilege Save
show vlan table port
Display of VLAN table per port
Shows a VLAN table per port.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number(17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P1 is omitted, VLAN table on all ports is displayed.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show vlan table port
VLAN Table
==========
Port Base VID Name Frame-Type
--------------------------------------------------------------
17 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all
18 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all
19 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all
20 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all
21 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all
22 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all
23 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all
24 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all
25 tag 2 ---
26 tag 4094 VLAN4094 ---

*Switch#

Output items Port: Port number
Base: VLAN type
port: Portbase VLAN
tag: Tagbase VLAN
VID: VLAN ID
Name: VLAN name
Frame type: Frame type
admit-all: All frames are transmissive
untag: Untagged frames or frames
whose Ethernet types are not 0x8100
are transmissive

Related
commands
set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN
clear vlan tagbase Clearing of tagbase VLAN
set vlan portbase Setting of portbase VLAN
set vlan member Setting of portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc

VLAN
5-6

General Privilege Save
show vlan table vid
Display of VLAN table per VLAN
Shows a VLAN table per VLAN.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
* When P1 is omitted, VLAN table on all VLANs is displayed.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show vlan table vid 4094
VLAN Table
==========
VID : 4094 Name : VLAN4094
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Portbase Ports : 17,19,24
Tagbase Ports :

*Switch#

Output items VID: VLAN ID
Name: VLAN name
Portbase Ports: Portbase VLAN ports
Tagbase Ports: Tagbase VLAN ports

Related
commands
set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN
clear vlan tagbase Clearing of tagbase VLAN
set vlan portbase Setting of portbase VLAN
set vlan name Setting of VLAN name
clear vlan name Clearing of VLAN name
set vlan member Setting of portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc


VLAN
5-7

General Privilege Save
set vlan member
Setting of portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc
Sets the portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc.

Input formats -Setting portbase VLAN en bloc
P1 P2
-Setting tagbase VLAN en bloc
P1 P3
-Setting portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc
P1 P2 P3
Parameters P1: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
P2: Portbase VLAN port number
portbase port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P3: Tagbase VLAN port number
tagbase port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)

Default value None
Usage conditions You can register up to 256 VLANs per device.
You cannot set the same port number in the portbase VLAN port number and tagbase
VLAN port number.
You cannot set a port where the total number of tagbase VLAN settings exceeds 100
as a portbase VLAN port.
The usage conditions of the "set VLAN portbase" command are applied to the
portbase VLAN in this command. The usage conditions of the "set VLAN tagbase"
command are applied to the tagbase VLAN in this command.
If the portbase VLAN is set, admit-all (default value) is set as the frame type.

Note None
Input example
*Switch# set vlan member 100 portbase 17,19,22 tagbase 24,26
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port
show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN
clear vlan tagbase Clearing of tagbase VLAN

VLAN
5-8

General Privilege Save
set vlan swap
Setting of VLAN tag swapping
Sets VLAN tag swapping.

Input format P1 P2 P3
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
P3: Swapping destination VLAN ID
VLAN ID: 0 to 4094 (single specification)

Default value None
Usage
conditions
You can register up to 256 VLANs per device.
You cannot reassign the VLAN ID that is already being used as the swapping
destination VLAN ID in the port to another VLAN as the swapping destination VLAN ID.
You cannot set VLAN tag swapping for the portbase VLAN setting port.

Note None
Input example
*Switch# set vlan swap 17 1 4094
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port
show vlan swap Display of VLAN tag swapping information
clear vlan swap Clearing of VLAN tag swapping


VLAN
5-9

General Privilege Save
show vlan swap
Display of VLAN tag swapping information
Shows VLAN tag swapping information.

Input format [P1 [P2] ]
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P1 is omitted, all ports are assumed.
P2: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
* When P2 is omitted, all VLAN names are assumed.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show vlan swap 17 VLAN100
VLAN Swap Table
===============
Port : 17 Ether-Type : 0x0600
VID Name (Interior) VID (Exterior)
-------------------------------------------------------
100 VLAN100 200

*Switch#

Output items Port: Port number
Ether-Type: Ethernet type value
VID: VLAN ID
Name (Interior): VLAN name
VID (Exterior): Swapping destination VLAN ID

Related
commands
set vlan swap Setting of VLAN tag swapping
clear vlan swap Clearing of VLAN tag swapping


VLAN
5-10

General Privilege Save
clear vlan swap
Clearing of VLAN tag swapping
Clears VLAN tag swapping.

Input format P1 [P2]
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (single specification)
P2: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
* When P2 is omitted, all VLAN names are assumed.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note When P2 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.
Input example
*Switch# clear vlan swap 17
Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port
set vlan swap Setting of VLAN tag swapping
show vlan swap Display of VLAN tag swapping information


VLAN
5-11

General Privilege Save
show vlan summary
Display of number of VLAN entries
Shows the number of VLAN entries.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note This command shows the number of VLAN entries for the VLANs set/cleared by the
following settings.
- Setting/clearing of tagbase VLAN
- Setting of portbase VLAN
- Setting/clearing of VLAN name
(When the entries are for VLAN name setting, the upper limit of 256 can be exceeded.)
- Setting of portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc
- Setting/clearing of VLAN tag swapping
- Setting/clearing of ATMoP format
- Setting/clearing of path between ATMs
- Setting/clearing of TDMoP format
- Setting/clearing of TDMoP connection
- Setting/clearing of adaptive clock format

Input example
*Switch# show vlan summary
VLAN Summary Information
========================
Total VLAN Entry : 2

*Switch#

Output item Total VLAN Entry: Number of VLAN entries


VLAN
5-12

Related
commands
set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN
clear vlan tagbase Clearing of tagbase VLAN
set vlan portbase Setting of portbase VLAN
set vlan name Setting of VLAN name
clear vlan name Clearing of VLAN name
set vlan member Setting of portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc
set vlan swap Setting of VLAN tag swapping
clear vlan swap Clearing of VLAN tag swapping
set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format
clear atmop format Clearing of ATMoP format
set pvc connection Setting of path between ATMs
set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format
clear tdmop format Clearing of TDMoP format
set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection
clear tdmop connection Clearing of TDMoP connection
set adaptive-clock-format Setting of adaptive clock format
clear adaptive-clock-format Clearing of adaptive clock format setting


VLAN
5-13

General Privilege Save
set vlan ethertype
Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition
Sets the Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Ethernet type value (0x0600 to 0xffff)

Default value P2: 0x8100
Usage condition If untag is specified as the frame type in the port where a portbase is set, you cannot
set an Ethernet type value other than 0x8100 in the port.

Note None
Input example
*Switch# set vlan ethertype 17 0x0600
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN
show vlan ethertype Display of Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition


VLAN
5-14

General Privilege Save
show vlan ethertype
Display of Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition
Shows Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P1 is omitted, information on all port numbers is displayed.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show vlan ethertype
VLAN Ether-Type Table
=====================
Port Ether-Type
----------------
17 0x600
18 0x8100
19 0x8100
20 0x8100
21 0x8100
22 0x8100
23 0x8100
24 0x8100
25 0xffff
26 0xffff

*Switch#

Output items Port: Port number
Ether-Type: Ethernet type value

Related
command
set vlan ethertype Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition


VLAN
5-15

General Privilege Save
set vlan name
Setting of VLAN name
Sets a VLAN name in a VLAN ID.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification)
P2: VLAN name (1 to 32 characters)

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set vlan name 4094 VLAN4094
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port
show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN
show vlan summary Display of number of VLAN entries
clear vlan name Clearing of VLAN name


VLAN
5-16

General Privilege Save
clear vlan name
Clearing of VLAN name
Clear a VLAN name.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear vlan name 4094
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port
show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN
show vlan summary Display of number of VLAN entries
set vlan name Setting of VLAN name


QoS
6-1













6
QoS


QoS
6-2

General Privilege Save
set qos in-rate maximum
Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN
Sets the maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN.

Input formats - Specifying VLAN
P1 P2 (vid) P3 P4 (maximum bandwidth limit value)
- Specifying Remaining-VLAN
P1 P2 (remain) P4 (maximum bandwidth limit value)
- Specifying separate mode (specifying VLAN)
P1 P2 (vid) P3 P4 (separate mode) [P5] [P6] [P7] [P8]
- Specifying separate mode (specifying Remaining-VLAN)
P1 P2 (remain) P4 (separate mode) [P5] [P6] [P7] [P8]
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (single specification)
P2: VLAN specification { vid | remain }
vid: VLAN identifier specification
remain: Remaining-VLAN specification
When vid is specified in P2
P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
P4: Maximum bandwidth limit value or separate mode { separate | separate-red }
Maximum bandwidth limit value (Kbps)
FE port: 0 to 100000 (Kbps)
GbE port: 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)
* The setting granularity: 25 (Kbps)
Separate mode
separate: Separate mode
separate-red: Separate mode (RED use)
When separate mode { separate | separate-red } is specified in P4
P5: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class A
class-a 0 to 1000000 (Kbps) * The setting granularity: 25 (Kbps)
P6: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class B
class-b 0 to 1000000 (Kbps) * The setting granularity: 25 (Kbps)
P7: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class C
class-c 0 to 1000000 (Kbps) * The setting granularity: 25 (Kbps)
P8: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class D
class-d 0 to 1000000 (Kbps) * The setting granularity: 25 (Kbps)
* If any of P5 to P8 is set, an error occurs when a multiple of the setting granularity
is not specified.
* When any of P5 to P8 is omitted, 1000000 (Kbps) is assumed.



Default value None
QoS
6-3
Usage
conditions
A VLAN identifier cannot be specified in P2 for a FE port.
Separate mode cannot be specified in P4 for a FE port.
You can register up to 256 VLANS per GbE port. (One of them is used for Remaining-
VLAN.)

Note When any of P5 to P8 is omitted, the previous values, if already set, are retained.
(except for cases where P5 to P8 are omitted when the mode is changed.)

Input examples
*Switch# set qos in-rate maximum 25 vid 100 separate-red class-a 1000
class-b 2000
*Switch# set qos in-rate maximum 26 vid VLAN200 separate class-c 3000
class-d 4000
*Switch# set qos in-rate maximum 17 remain 10000
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set vlan portbase Setting of portbase VLAN
set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase
set vlan swap Setting of VLAN tag swapping
set qos in-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function per input VLAN
set qos in-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function per input VLAN
show qos in-rate maximum Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per
input VLAN
clear qos in-rate maximum Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per
input VLAN


QoS
6-4

General Privilege Save
set qos in-class-map maximum
Setting of priority mapping function per input VLAN
Sets the priority mapping function per input VLAN.

Input formats - Specifying VLAN
P1 P2 (vid) P3 P5 (class-a) P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12
- Specifying Remaining-VLAN
P1 P2 (remain) P5 (class-a) P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12
- Specifying separate mode (specifying VLAN)
P1 P2 (vid) P3 P4 P5 (class-a) P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12
- Specifying separate mode (specifying Remaining-VLAN)
P1 P2 (remain) P4 P5 (class-a) P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12
- Specifying default (specifying VLAN)
P1 P2 (vid) P3 P5 (initial)
- Specifying default (specifying Remaining-VLAN)
P1 P2 (remain) P5 (initial)
- Specifying default (specifying separate mode) (specifying VLAN)
P1 P2 (vid) P3 P4 P5 (initial)
- Specifying default (specifying separate mode) (specifying Remaining-VLAN)
P1 P2 (remain) P4 P5 (initial)
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (single specification)
P2: VLAN specification { vid | remain }
vid: VLAN identifier specification
remain: Remaining-VLAN specification
When vid is specified in P2
P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
P4: Separate mode { separate | separate-red }
separate: Separate mode
separate-red: Separate mode (RED use)
* P4 (separate mode) can be specified only when separate mode is specified in the
setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN.
When P4 is omitted
P5: Class A priority { class-a } or default setting { initial }
class-a: Class A priority specification
initial: Default specification
QoS
6-5
When class-a is specified in P5
P6: Priority specification { priority | none }
priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.)
none: Unset
P7: Class B priority { class-b }
class-b: Class B priority specification
P8: Priority specification { priority | none }
priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.)
none: Unset
P9: Class C priority { class-c }
class-c: Class C priority specification
P10: Priority specification { priority | none }
priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.)
none: Unset
P11: Class D priority { class-d }
class-d: Class D priority specification
P12: Priority specification { priority | none }
priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.)
none: Unset
When P4 is specified
P5: Class A priority { class-a } or default setting { initial }
class-a: Class A priority specification
initial: Default specification
When class-a is specified in P5
P6: Priority specification { priority | broadcast | multicast | bc+mc | none }
priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.)
broadcast: broadcast
multicast: multicast
bc+mc: broadcast&multicast
none: Unset
P7: Class B priority { class-b }
class-b: Class B priority specification
P8: Priority specification { priority | broadcast | multicast | bc+mc | none }
priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.)
broadcast: broadcast
multicast: multicast
bc+mc: broadcast&multicast
none: Unset
P9: Class C priority { class-c }
class-c: Class C priority specification
P10: Priority specification { priority | broadcast | multicast | bc+mc | none }
priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.)
broadcast: broadcast
multicast: multicast
bc+mc: broadcast&multicast
none: Unset
P11: Class D priority { class-d }
class-d: Class D priority specification
P12: Priority specification { priority | broadcast | multicast | bc+mc | none }
priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.)
broadcast: broadcast
QoS
6-6
multicast: multicast
bc+mc: broadcast&multicast
none: Unset
* All of 0 to 7 priorities must be specified for any of Class A to D.


Default values P6: 6, 7 P8: 4, 5 P10: 0, 3 P12: 1, 2
Usage
conditions
You can set the priority mapping function per input VLAN after setting the maximum
bandwidth limit function per input VLAN.
You cannot specify mode different from the mode specified for the setting of the
maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN.
The priority to be specified in any of classes A to D cannot be duplicated with the
priority specified in any other class. For example, you can set broadcast and multicast
in different classes but cannot set broadcast&multicast in a different class because it is
duplicated.

Note To inhibit a priority from belonging to a class, specify "none" explicitly. (You cannot
omit "none".)

Input examples
*Switch# set qos in-class-map maximum 25 vid 100 separate-red class-a
1,2,3,4 class-b 0,5-7 class-c broadcast class-d multicast
*Switch# set qos in-class-map maximum 26 vid VLAN200 separate class-a
0-4 class-b 5-7 class-c bc+mc class-d none
*Switch# set qos in-class-map maximum 17 remain initial
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set qos in-rate maximum Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per
input
VLAN
set qos in-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function per input VLAN
show qos in-rate maximum Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per
input VLAN
clear qos in-rate maximum Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per
input VLAN


QoS
6-7

General Privilege Save
set qos in-priority maximum
Setting of priority discard function per input VLAN
Sets the priority discard function per input VLAN.

Input formats - Specifying VLAN
P1 P2 (vid) P3 [P5 (burst tolerance for class-a)] [P6] [P7] [P8]
- Specifying Remaining-VLAN
P1 P2 (remain) [P5 (burst tolerance for class-a)] [P6] [P7] [P8]
- Specifying separate mode (specifying VLAN)
P1 P2 (vid) P3 P4 (separate) [P5 (burst tolerance for class-a)] [P6] [P7] [P8]
- Specifying separate mode (specifying Remaining-VLAN)
P1 P2 (remain) P4 (separate) [P5 (burst tolerance for class-a)] [P6] [P7] [P8]
- Specifying separate mode (RED use) (specifying VLAN)
P1 P2 (vid) P3 P4 (separate-red) [P5 (burst tolerance for class-a) P6 [P7]] [P8 P9
[P10]] [P11 P12 [P13]] [P14 P15 [P16]]
- Specifying separate mode (RED use) (specifying Remaining-VLAN)
P1 P2 (remain) P4 (separate-red) [P5 (burst tolerance for class-a) P6 [P7]] [P8 P9
[P10]] [P11 P12 [P13]] [P14 P15 [P16]]
- Specifying default (specifying VLAN)
P1 P2 (vid) P3 P5 (initial)
- Specifying default (specifying Remaining-VLAN)
P1 P2 (remain) P5 (initial)
- Specifying default (specifying separate mode) (specifying VLAN)
P1 P2 (vid) P3 P4 P5 (initial)
- Specifying default (specifying separate mode) (specifying Remaining-VLAN)
P1 P2 (remain) P4 P5 (initial)
QoS
6-8
Parameters
(1/2)
P1: Port number (17 to 26) (single specification)
P2: VLAN specification { vid | remain }
vid: VLAN identifier specification
remain: Remaining-VLAN specification
When vid is specified in P2
P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
P4: Separate mode { separate | separate-red }
separate: Separate mode
separate-red: Separate mode (RED use)
When separate is specified in P4 or P4 is omitted
P5: Burst tolerance specification for class A or default setting { initial }
Burst tolerance specification for class A: class-a 1 to 127 (Kbyte)
initial: Default specification
When burst tolerance for class A is specified in P5
P6: Burst tolerance specification for class B
class-b 1 to 127 (Kbyte)
P7: Burst tolerance specification for class C
class-c 1 to 127 (Kbyte)
P8: Burst tolerance specification for class D
class-d 1 to 127 (Kbyte)
* When burst tolerance specification for classes A to D (P5 to P8) is omitted,
the previous value is retained.
When separate-red is specified in P4
P5: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class A or default setting {
initial }
Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class A: class-a 1 to 30000
(Kbyte)
initial: Default specification
When burst tolerance (upper threshold) for class A is specified in P5
P6: Burst tolerance A (lower threshold) for class A or burst lower
threshold/probability disable { disable }
Burst tolerance A (lower threshold) for class A : 1 to 29999 (Kbyte)
disable: Burst lower threshold/probability disable
When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class A is specified in P6
P7: Probability A (1 to 32)
P8: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class B
class-b 1 to 30000 (Kbyte)
P9: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B or burst lower
threshold/probability disable { disable }
Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B: 1 to 29999 (Kbyte)
disable: Burst lower threshold/probability disable
QoS
6-9

Parameters
(2/2)
* When burst tolerance (upper/lower threshold) of classes A to D and
probability values (P5 to P16) is omitted, the previous value is retained.
When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B is specified in P9
P10: Probability B (1 to 32)
P11: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class C
class-c 1 to 30000 (Kbyte)
P12: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C or burst lower
threshold/probability disable { disable }
Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C: 1 to 29999 (Kbyte)
disable: Burst lower threshold/probability disable
When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C is specified in P12
P13: Probability C (1 to 32)
P14: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class D
class-d 1 to 30000 (Kbyte)
P15: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D or burst lower
threshold/probability disable { disable }
Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D: 1 to 29999 (Kbyte)
disable: Burst lower threshold/probability disable
When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D is specified in P15
P16: Probability D (1 to 32)

Default values Depending on the maximum bandwidth limit value or separate mode setting in the
"Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN", the following default
values are applied.
When the maximum bandwidth limit value or separate mode is set
P5: 127 (Kbyte), P6: 64 (Kbyte), P7: 32 (Kbyte), P8: 16 (Kbyte)
When the separate mode (RED) is set
P5: 127 (Kbyte), P6 and P7: disable
P8: 64 (Kbyte), P9 and P10: disable
P11: 32 (Kbyte), P12: 16 (Kbyte), P13: 32
P14: 16 (Kbyte), P15: 8 (Kbyte), P16: 32
Usage
conditions
You can set the priority discard function per input VLAN after setting the maximum
bandwidth limit function per input VLAN.
You cannot specify mode different from the mode specified for the setting of the
maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN.

Notes When P4 is omitted, arbitrarily specify P5 to P8 per class (omissible).
If separate is specified in P4, you can arbitrarily specify P5 to P8 per class as separate
mode { separate } (omissible).
If separate-red is specified in P4, you can arbitrarily specify P5 to P16 per class as
separate mode (RED use) (omissible).
If separate-red is specified in P4, you cannot set a value greater than the value set in
P5 in P6.
The same relationship applies to P8 and P9, P11 and P12, and P14 and P15.
Consider 3.125% as value 1 to set the probability value to be specified in P7, P10, P13,
or P16. When the maximum value of 32 is specified, 3.125% x 32 = 100%.

QoS
6-10
Input examples
*Switch# set qos in-priority maximum 25 vid 100 separate-red class-a
3000 20 4 class-b 1500 disable
*Switch# set qos in-priority maximum 25 vid 70 separate-red class-c 48
disable class-d 8 1 32
*Switch# set qos in-priority maximum 25 vid 1000 separate-red class-a
127 disable class-b 64 disable class-c 3000 16 10 class-d 2000 8 5
*Switch# set qos in-priority maximum 26 vid 100 separate class-a 1
class-b 1 class-c 127 class-d 127
*Switch# set qos in-priority maximum 17 remain initial
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set qos in-rate maximum Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per
input
VLAN
set qos in-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function per input VLAN
show qos in-rate maximum Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per
input VLAN
clear qos in-rate maximum Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per
input VLAN


QoS
6-11

General Privilege Save
show qos in-rate maximum
Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN
Shows the maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN.

Input formats - Displaying specified port/specified VLAN
P1 P2 (vid) P3
- Displaying specified port/specified Remaining-VLAN
P1 P2 (remain)
- Displaying specified port/all VLANs
[P1]
- Displaying specified VLAN
P2 (vid) P3
- Displaying specified Remaining-VLAN
P2 (remain)
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: VLAN specification{ vid | remain }
vid: VLAN identifier specification
remain: Remaining-VLAN specification
When vid is specified in P2
P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
* Multiple VLAN IDs can be specified only when P1 is omitted.
* When P1 is omitted, information for all the VLANs and Remaining-VLANs set in all
the ports is shown.
If P2 and P3 are specified, information is displayed in ascending order of VLAN IDs.
Within the same VLAN, information is displayed in ascending order of ports.
* When P2 is omitted, information for all the VLANs and Remaining-VLANs set in the
port specified in P1 is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
QoS
6-12
Input example
*Switch# show qos in-rate maximum 26
QoS Input Port Maximum Table
============================
Port Registered-VID Available-VID
-----------------------------------
26 2 254

QoS Input VLAN Maximum Table
============================
Port : 26
VID : 1
Mode : separate-RED
===================
Rate Maximum- Minimum-
Priority (Kbps) Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte) Probability
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Class-All :--- --- --- --- ---
Class-A :6,7 1000000 127 disabled disabled
Class-B :4,5 1000000 64 disabled disabled
Class-C :0,3 1000000 32 16 32(100%)
Class-D :1,2 1000000 16 8 32(100%)

Port : 26
VID : remain
Mode : normal
===================
Rate Maximum- Minimum-
Priority (Kbps) Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte) Probability
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Class-All : --- 1000000 --- --- ---
Class-A : 6,7 --- 127 --- ---
Class-B : 4,5 --- 64 --- ---
Class-C : 0,3 --- 32 --- ---
Class-D : 1,2 --- 16 --- ---

*Switch#

QoS
6-13

Output items (QoS Input Port Maximum Table)
Port: Port number
Registered-VID: Number of VLANs registered in maximum bandwidth limit mode
Available-VID: Number of VLANs that can be registered

(QoS Input VLAN Maximum Table)
Port: Port number
VID: VLAN ID
Mode: Setting mode
normal: Normal mode
separate: Separate mode
separate-RED: Separate mode (RED use)
Priority: Class mapping
---: Unset
broadcast: Broadcast setting
multicast: Multicast setting
bc+mc: Broadcast and multicast setting
none: Priority does not belong to any class
Numeric value: Priority
Rate: Maximum bandwidth limit value per class
If Mode is Normal, the maximum bandwidth limit value is shown in Class-All.
Maximum-Burst: Maximum burst tolerance
Minimum-Burst: Minimum burst tolerance
Probability: Probability

Related
commands
set qos in-rate maximum Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per
input VLAN
set qos in-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function per input VLAN
set qos in-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function per input VLAN
clear qos in-rate maximum Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per
input VLAN


QoS
6-14

General Privilege Save
clear qos in-rate maximum
Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN
Clears the maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN.

Input formats - Clearing maximum bandwidth limit setting of specified port/specified VLAN
P1 P2 (vid) P3
- Clearing maximum bandwidth limit setting of specified port/specified
Remaining-VLAN
P1 P2 (remain)
- Clearing maximum bandwidth limit setting of specified port
P1
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (single specification)
P2: VLAN specification { vid | remain }
vid: VLAN identifier specification
remain: Remaining-VLAN specification
* If a VLAN is already registered in the specified port when Remaining-VLAN is
specified in P2, you cannot clear the maximum bandwidth limit function per input
VLAN.
* When P2 is omitted, the settings of the maximum bandwidth limit function of all the
VLANs and the Remaining-VLAN in the port specified in P1 are cleared.
When vid is specified in P2
P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes When P2 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.
The priority mapping function setting of the specified VLAN and the priority discard
function setting are also cleared.

Input examples
*Switch# clear qos in-rate maximum 25 vid 100
*Switch# clear qos in-rate maximum 26 vid VLAN200
*Switch# clear qos in-rate maximum 24
Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y
*Switch#

Output item



QoS
6-15

Related
commands
set qos in-rate maximum Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per
input VLAN
set qos in-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function per input VLAN
set qos in-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function per input VLAN
show qos in-rate maximum Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per
input VLAN


QoS
6-16

General Privilege Save
set qos in-port cos-map
Setting of input CoS priority mapping
Sets input CoS priority mapping.

Input formats - CoS priority mapping setting
P1 P2 (DSCP value) P3
- CoS priority mapping default specification
P1 P2 (default)
Parameters P1: Port (line) number (17 to 26) (single specification)
P2: DSCP value or default specification { default }
DSCP value: 0 to 63 (Multiple values can be specified.)
default: Default specification
When DSCP value is specified in P2
P3: CoS value (0 to 7)
* When DSCP value is specified in P2, the previous CoS values corresponding
to the unspecified DSCP values are retained.

Default values When 0 to 7 is specified in P2, P3: 0
When 8 to 15 is specified in P2, P3: 1
When 16 to 23 is specified in P2, P3: 2
When 24 to 31 is specified in P2, P3: 3
When 32 to 39 is specified in P2, P3: 4
When 40 to 47 is specified in P2, P3: 5
When 48 to 55 is specified in P2, P3: 6
When 56 to 63 is specified in P2, P3: 7

Usage condition None
Note None
Input examples
*Switch# set qos in-port cos-map 17 7 1
*Switch# set qos in-port cos-map 18 default
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show qos in-port cos-map Display of input CoS priority mapping
set qos in-port cos-map mode Setting of input CoS priority mapping enable/disable
show qos in-port cos-map mode Display of input CoS priority mapping enable/disable

QoS
6-17

General Privilege Save
show qos in-port cos-map
Display of input CoS priority mapping
Shows input CoS priority mapping.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P1 is omitted, information on input CoS priority mapping for all ports are
shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show qos in-port cos-map 17
QoS Input CoS Priority Mapping Table
====================================
Port : 17
=========
CoS DSCP
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0-7
1 8-15
2 16-23
3 24-31
4 32-39
5 40-47
6 48-55
7 56-63

*Switch#

Output items Port: Port number
CoS: CoS value
DSCP: DSCP value

Related
commands
set qos in-port cos-map Setting of input CoS priority mapping
set qos in-port cos-map mode Setting of input CoS priority mapping enable/disable
show qos in-port cos-map mode Display of input CoS priority mapping enable/disable


QoS
6-18

General Privilege Save
set qos in-port cos-map mode
Setting of input CoS priority mapping enable/disable
Sets input CoS priority mapping enable/disable.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Input CoS priority mapping enable/disable setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables input CoS priority mapping
disable: Disables input CoS priority mapping

Default value P2: disable
Usage condition None
Note None
Input examples
*Switch# set qos in-port cos-map mode 25 enable
*Switch# set qos in-port cos-map mode 17-24 disable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show qos in-port cos-map mode Display of input CoS priority mapping enable/disable
set qos in-port cos-map Setting of input CoS priority mapping
show qos in-port cos-map Display of input CoS priority mapping


QoS
6-19

General Privilege Save
show qos in-port cos-map mode
Display of input CoS priority mapping enable/disable
Shows input CoS priority mapping enable/disable.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P1 is omitted, information on input CoS priority mapping enable/disable for
all ports is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show qos in-port cos-map mode 17
QoS CoS Mapping Mode Table
==========================
Port Mode
--------------
17 disabled

*Switch#

Output items Port: Port number
Mode: Input CoS priority mapping enable/disable setting
enabled: Enabled
disabled: Disabled

Related
commands
set qos in-port cos-map mode Setting of input CoS priority mapping enable/disable
set qos in-port cos-map Setting of input CoS priority mapping
show qos in-port cos-map Display of input CoS priority mapping


QoS
6-20

General Privilege Save
set [reserve] qos initial-buffer
Setting of L2 switch buffer
Sets L2 switch buffer.

- Setting L2 switch buffer
P1 P2 (class-a queue length) P3 P4 P5
Input formats
- Specifying device initial value
P1 P2 (default)
Parameters P1: Port (line) group or port number
Port (line) group (1/1 to 2/2) (single specification)
Port number (17 to 24) (single specification)
* The following shows the relationship between the port (line) group indicated by the
port (line) group parameter and the installed card.
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1H (32 x E1/T1 TDM/ATM)
1/1= ATMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
1/2= TDMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1T (32 x E1/T1 TDM)
1/2= TDMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 1ATM155A (1 x STM-1/OC-3 ATM)
1/1=ATMoP (1)
Installed card LINE2: 2GBE (2 x GbE)
2/1= GbE (25)
2/2= GbE (26)
P2: Class A queue length specification or device initial value specification { default }
Class A queue length specification: class-a 0, 32 to 1008 (frame)
* Setting granularity: 16 (frame)
default: Device initial value specification
When Class A queue length is specified in P2.
P3: Class B queue length specification
class-b 0, 32 to 1008 (frame) * Setting granularity: 16 (frame)
P4: Class C queue length specification
class-c 0, 32 to 1008 (frame) * Setting granularity: 16 (frame)
P5: Class D queue length specification
class-d 0, 32 to 1008 (frame) * Setting granularity: 16 (frame)
* If P2 to P5 are specified, an error occurs when a multiple of the setting
granularity is not specified.
* If P2 to P5 are specified, an error occurs when the total queue length is other
than 1008 (frame).

Default values P2: 256 (frame), P3: 256 (frame), P4: 256 (frame), P5: 240 (frame)
Usage
conditions
The L2 switch buffer setting is reflected upon a device restart.
Note None
QoS
6-21
Input examples
*Switch# set qos initial-buffer 2/1 class-a 880 class-b 64 class-c 32
class-d 32
*Switch# set qos initial-buffer 1/1 default
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show qos initial-buffer Display of L2 switch buffer
set qos out-wred Output WRED function setting
show qos out-wred Output WRED function setting


QoS
6-22

General Privilege Save
show qos initial-buffer
Display of L2 switch buffer
Shows L2 switch buffer.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port (line) group or port number
Port (line) group (1/1 to 2/2) (single specification)
Port number (17 to 24) (single specification)
* The following shows the relationship between the port (line) group indicated by the
port (line) group parameter and the installed card.
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1H (32 x E1/T1 TDM/ATM)
1/1= ATMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
1/2= TDMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1T (32 x E1/T1 TDM)
1/2= TDMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 1ATM155A (1 x STM-1/OC-3 ATM)
1/1=ATMoP (1)
Installed card LINE2: 2GBE (2 x GbE)
2/1= GbE (25)
2/2= GbE (26)
* When P1 is omitted, information on Ls switch buffer set for all ports is shown.
However, information on uninstalled cards is not shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None

QoS
6-23

Input example When LINE1: 32T1E1H line card is installed;
*Switch# show qos initial-buffer
QoS Initial Buffer Table
========================
Port Type Condition Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D
---------------------------------------------------------------
1/1 atmop Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve 32 32 64 880
1/2 tdmop Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
2/1 gbe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve 32 32 64 880
2/2 gbe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
17 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
18 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
19 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
20 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
21 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
22 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
23 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
24 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---

*Switch#

* Difference in display when other line card is installed at LINE1:
32T1E1T: [Port: 1/1 Type atmop] is not displayed.
1ATM155A: [Port: 1/2 Type tdmop] is not displayed.

Output items Port: Port (line) group/port number
Type: Port (line) group/port (line) type
atmop: ATM over Packet
tdmop: TDM over Packet
gbe: Gigabit Ethernet
fe: Fast Ethernet
Condition: Switch setting
Present: Value assigned for L2 switch buffer
Reserve: Value assigned for L2 switch buffer reserve
Class-A to D: Value assigned for L2 switch buffer for each class

Related
command
set qos initial-buffer Setting of L2 switch buffer setting


QoS
6-24

General Privilege Save
set qos switch-class-map
Setting of class mapping for switch fabric
Sets class mapping for switch fabric.

Input formats - Class mapping setting
P1 (class-a) P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8
- Class mapping default specification
P1 (initial)
Parameters P1: Class A priority { class-a } or default specification { initial }
class-a: Class A priority specification
initial: Default specification
When class-a is specified in P1
P2: Priority specification { priority | none }
priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.)
none: Unset
P3: Class B priority { class-b }
class-b: Class B priority specification
P4: Priority specification { priority | none }
priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.)
none: Unset
P5: Class C priority { class-c }
class-c: Class C priority specification
P6: Priority specification { priority | none }
priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.)
none: Unset
P7: Class D priority { class-d }
class-d: Class D priority specification
P8: Priority specification { priority | none }
priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.)
none: Unset

Default values P2: 6, 7, P4: 4, 5, P6: 0, 3, P8: 1, 2
Usage condition You cannot enter the command setting a priority for two or more classes or setting no
class.

Note The continuity stops from the command entry to the setting completion.
Input examples
*Switch# set qos switch-class-map class-a 1,2 class-b 3,4 class-c 5,6
class-d 0,7
*Switch# set qos switch-class-map initial
*Switch#

Output item


QoS
6-25

Related
commands
set qos out-bandwidth Setting of output bandwidth
show qos switch-class-map Display of class mapping setting of switch fabric


QoS
6-26

General Privilege Save
show qos switch-class-map
Display of class mapping setting of switch fabric
Shows the class mapping setting of switch fabric.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show qos switch-class-map
QoS Switch Class Map Table
==========================
Class Priority
------------------------
class-a 6,7
class-b 4,5
class-c 0,3
class-d 1,2

*Switch#

Output items Class: Class
Priority: Class mapping

Related
command
set qos switch-class-map Setting of class mapping for switch fabric


QoS
6-27

General Privilege Save
set qos out-bandwidth
Setting of output bandwidth
Sets the output bandwidth.

Input formats - Specifying output scheduling operation mode
P1(mode) P2
- Specifying maximum bandwidth limit value for output port shaper
P1 (maximum) P2 P3 (maximum bandwidth limit value)
- Specifying separate mode for output port shaper
P1 (maximum) P2 P3 (separate) P4 P5 P6 P7
- Specifying default for output port shaper
P1 (maximum) P2 P3 (default)
- Specifying separate mode for Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution
function
P1 (wrr-rate) P2 P3 (separate) P4 P5 P6
- Specifying default for Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function
P1 (wrr-rate) P2 P3 (default)
Parameters P1: Output bandwidth specification type { mode | maximum | wrr-rate }
mode: Output scheduling operation specification
maximum: Output port shaper specification
wrr-rate: Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution specification
When mode is specified in P1
P2: Output scheduling operation specification { sp | sp+wrr }
sp: SP mode
sp+wrr: Deficit WRR mode
When maximum is specified in P1
P2: Lline group or port number
Line group (1/1 to 2/2) (single specification)
Port number (17 to 24) (single specification)
P3: Maximum bandwidth limit value, default specification { default }, or separate
mode specification { separate }
Maximum bandwidth limit value (0 to 1000000) * Granularity: 64 Kbps
default: Default specification
separate: Separate mode specification
When separate is specified in P3
P4: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class A
class-a 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)
P5: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class B
class-b 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)
P6: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class C
class-c 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)


P7: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class D
class-d 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)
QoS
6-28
* The setting range for the maximum bandwidth limit value in P3 to P7
depending on the P2 value is given below.
- 1/1 : 0 to 1000000 Kbps
- 1/2 : 0 to 1000000 Kbps
- 2/1 : 0 to 1000000 Kbps
- 2/2 : 0 to 1000000 Kbps
- 17 to 24 : 0 to 100000 Kbps
* The setting granularity of the maximum bandwidth limit value when the
command is entered: 1 Kbps
The setting granularity of the maximum bandwidth limit value when the device
is set: 64 Kbps
(The value specified at the command entry is rounded down to a multiple of 64
Kbps to set to the device.)
* The total of the maximum bandwidth limit values of each class after they are
rounded down to the granularity of 64 Kbps is limited to the following.
When the total exceeds the following, an error occurs.
- 1/1 : 1000000 Kbps
- 1/2 : 1000000 Kbps
- 2/1 : 1000000 Kbps
- 2/2 : 1000000 Kbps
- 17 to 24 : 100000 Kbps
When wrr-rate is specified in P1
P2: Line group or port number
Line group (1/1 to 2/2) (single specification)
Port number (17 to 24) (single specification)
P3: Default specification { default } or separate mode specification { separate }
default: Default specification
separate: Separate mode specification
When separate is specified in P3
P4: Surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value of class B
class-b 64 to 1000000 (Kbps)
P5: Surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value of class C
class-c 64 to 1000000 (Kbps)
P6: Surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value of class D
class-d 64 to 1000000 (Kbps)
* When the output frames of class-b to class-d are equal to or below
the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value in P4 to P6, the surplus
bandwidth is distributed according to the surplus bandwidth
distribution ratio value set in P4 to P6.
When the output frames of class-b to class-d exceed the surplus
bandwidth distribution ratio value in P4 to P6, the surplus bandwidth
may not be distributed according to the surplus bandwidth
distribution ratio value set in P4 to P6.
* The setting range for the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value in
P4 to P6 depending on the P2 value is given below.
1/1 : 64 to 1000000 Kbps
1/2 : 64 to 1000000 Kbps
2/1 : 64 to 1000000 Kbps
2/2 : 64 to 1000000 Kbps
17 to 24 : 64 to 100000 Kbps


* The setting granularity of the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio
QoS
6-29
value when the command is entered: 1 Kbps
The setting granularity of the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio
value when the device is set: 64 Kbps
(The value specified at the command entry is rounded down to a
multiple of 64 Kbps to set to the device.)
* The total of the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio values of each
class after they are rounded down to the granularity of 64 Kbps is
limited to the following.
When the total exceeds the following, an error occurs.
1/1 : 1000000 Kbps
1/2 : 1000000 Kbps
2/1 : 1000000 Kbps
2/2 : 1000000 Kbps
17 to 24 : 100000 Kbps
* The following shows the relationship between the port (line) group indicated by the
port (line) group parameter and the installed card when maximum or wrr-rate is
specified in P1.
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1H (32 x E1/T1 TDM/ATM)
1/1=ATMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
1/2=TDMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1T (32 x E1/T1 TDM)
1/2=TDMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 1ATM155A (1 x STM-1/OC-3 ATM)
1/1=ATMoP (1)
Installed card LINE2: 2GBE (2 x GbE)
2/1=GbE (25)
2/2=GbE (26)

Default values Output scheduling operation mode: sp
Maximum bandwidth limit value for the output port shaper:
100000 Kbps (17 to 24)
1000000 Kbps (1/1, 1/2, 2/1, 2/2)
Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function:
64 Kbps (class-b to d for all line groups or port numbers)

Usage condition You can set "set qos out-bandwidth wrr-rate" only when sp+ wrr is set with "set qos out-
bandwidth mode".

Note None
Input examples
*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth mode 2/1 sp+wrr
*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth maximum 2/1 separate class-a 2000 class-
b 1500 class-c 1000 class-d 500
*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth wrr-rate 2/1 separate class-b 192 class-
c 128 class-d 64
*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth wrr-rate 2/1 default
*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth maximum 17 default
*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth maximum 1/2 10000
*Switch#
Output item




QoS
6-30

Related
command
set qos switch-class-map Setting of class mapping for switch fabric
show qos out-bandwidth Display of output bandwidth


QoS
6-31

General Privilege Save
show qos out-bandwidth
Display of output bandwidth
Shows the output bandwidth.

Input format [P1]
Parameters P1: Line group or port number
Line group (1/1 to 2/2) (single specification)
Port number (17 to 24) (single specification)
* The following shows the relationship between the port (line) group indicated by the
port (line) group parameter and the installed card.
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1H (32 x E1/T1 TDM/ATM)
1/1=ATMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
1/2=TDMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1T (32 x E1/T1 TDM)
1/2=TDMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 1ATM155A (1 x STM-1/OC-3 ATM)
1/1=ATMoP (1)
Installed card LINE2: 2GBE(2 x GbE)
2/1=GbE (25)
2/2=GbE (26)
* When P1 is omitted, information on the output bandwidth set for all ports is shown.
However, information on uninstalled cards is not shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
QoS
6-32

Input example When LINE1: 32T1E1H line card is installed;
*Switch# show qos out-bandwidth
QoS Out Bandwidth Table
=======================
Scheduler Mode : SP+WRR

Rate(Kbps)
Port Type Mode Condition Class-All Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1/1 atmop normal maximum 600000 --- --- --- ---
separate wrr-rate --- 600000 160000 120000 80000
1/2 tdmop normal maximum 150000 --- --- --- ---
separate wrr-rate --- 150000 50000 50000 50000
2/1 gbe separate maximum --- 2000 1500 1000 500
separate wrr-rate --- 2000 1500 800 64
2/2 gbe normal maximum 1000000 --- --- --- ---
separate wrr-rate --- 1000000 64 64 64
17 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---
separate wrr-rate --- 100000 64 64 64
18 fe normal maximum 80000 --- --- --- ---
separate wrr-rate --- 80000 128 192 256
19 fe normal maximum 80000 --- --- --- ---
separate wrr-rate --- 80000 128 192 256
20 fe separate maximum --- 50000 256 192 128
separate wrr-rate --- 50000 256 192 128
21 fe separate maximum --- 50000 256 192 128
separate wrr-rate --- 50000 256 192 128
22 fe normal maximum 12000 --- --- --- ---
separate wrr-rate --- 12000 4000 4000 4000
23 fe normal maximum 12000 --- --- --- ---
separate wrr-rate --- 12000 4000 4000 4000
24 fe separate maximum --- 80000 128 192 256
separate wrr-rate --- 80000 128 192 256

*Switch#

* Difference in display when other line card is installed at LINE1:
32T1E1T: [Port: 1/1 Type atmop] is not displayed.
1ATM155A: [Port: 1/2 Type tdmop] is not displayed.

Output items (QoS Out Bandwidth Table)
Scheduler Mode: Output scheduler operation mode
Port: Line group/port number
Type: Line group/line type
atmop: ATM over Packet
tdmop: TDM over Packet
gbe: Gigabit Ethernet
fe: Fast Ethernet
Mode: Setting mode
normal: Normal mode
separate: Separate mode
Condition: Output bandwidth specification type
maximum: Output port shaper
wrr-rate: Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function
Class-All: Maximum bandwidth limit value when Normal is specified is displayed.
Class-A to D: Bandwidth value of each class
QoS
6-33

Related
command
set qos out-bandwidth Setting of output bandwidth


QoS
6-34

General Privilege Save
set qos out-wred
Setting the output WRED function
Set the output WRED function.

Input formats - Class discarding starting position specification
P1 [P2 (class-a discarding-starting-position)] [P3] [P4] [P5]
- Default specification
P1 P2(default)
Parameters P1: Line group or port number
Line group (1/1 to 2/2) (single specification)
Port number (17 to 24) (single specification)
* The following shows the relationship between the port (line) group indicated by
the port (line) group parameter and the installed card.
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1H (32 x E1/T1 TDM/ATM)
1/1=ATMoP group (1 to 16,33 to 48)
1/2=TDMoP group (1 to 16,33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1T (32 x E1/T1 TDM)
1/2=TDMoP group (1 to 16,33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 1ATM155A(1 x STM-1/OC-3 ATM)
1/1=ATMoP(1)
Installed card LINE2: 2GBE(2 x GbE)
2/1=GbE(25)
2/2=GbE(26)
When the class discarding starting position is specified
P2: Class A discarding starting position specification: class-a 0 to 100 (%)
P3: Class B discarding starting position specification: class-b 0 to 100 (%)
P4: Class C discarding starting position specification: class-c 0 to 100 (%)
P5: Class D discarding starting position specification: class-d 0 to 100 (%)
* When none of the discarding starting positions of classes A to D (P2 to P5) is
specified, the value that was set previously is retained.
Default specification
P2: default: Default specification

Default values P2:100(%), P3:100(%), P4:100(%), P5:100(%)
Usage condition None
Note When a line group is specified, transmission of the specified line group stops until the
setting is completed. When a port number (17 to 24) is specified, transmission of all the
FE ports (17 to 24) stops until the setting is completed.

QoS
6-35
Input examples
*Switch# set qos out-wred 2/2 class-a 50 class-b 75 class-c 100 class-d
25
*Switch# set qos out-wred 17 class-a 25 class-c 50
*Switch# set qos out-wred 1/1 default
*Switch#
Output item



Related
command
set qos initial-buffer L2 switch buffer setting
show qos out-wred Display of the output WRED function


QoS
6-36

General Privilege Save
show qos out-wred
Display of the output WRED function
Displays the output WRED function.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Line group or port number
Line group (1/1 to 2/2) (single specification)
Port number (17 to 24) (single specification)
* The following shows the relationship between the port (line) group indicated by the
port (line) group parameter and the installed card.
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1H (32 x E1/T1 TDM/ATM)
1/1=ATMoP group (1 to 16,33 to 48)
1/2=TDMoP group (1 to 16,33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1T (32 x E1/T1 TDM)
1/2=TDMoP group (1 to 16,33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 1ATM155A(1 x STM-1/OC-3 ATM)
1/1=ATMoP(1)
Installed card LINE2: 2GBE(2 x GbE)
2/1=GbE(25)
2/2=GbE(26)
* When P1 is omitted, information on Ls switch buffer set for all ports is shown.
However, information on uninstalled cards is not shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note The minimum discarding threshold value is set based on the ratio (%) to the maximum
discarding threshold value by the discarding starting position specification.
The maximum discarding threshold value is the same as the maximum number of
frames that are accumulated by class that is set for the L2 switch buffer setting.

QoS
6-37

Input example When LINE1: 32T1E1H line card is installed;
*Switch# show qos out-wred
QoS Out WRED Table
==================
Drop-Start
Port Type Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D
---------------------------------------------------------------
1/1 atmop 50 75 50 25
(128/256) (192/256) (128/256) (60/240)
1/2 tdmop 33 66 99 1
(84/256) (168/256) (253/256) (2/240)
2/1 gbe 100 100 100 100
(256/256) (256/256) (256/256) (240/240)
2/2 gbe 100 100 100 100
(256/256) (256/256) (256/256) (240/240)
17 fe 100 100 100 100
(256/256) (256/256) (256/256) (240/240)
18 fe 100 100 100 100
(256/256) (256/256) (256/256) (240/240)
19 fe 100 100 100 100
(256/256) (256/256) (256/256) (240/240)
20 fe 100 100 100 100
(256/256) (256/256) (256/256) (240/240)
21 fe 100 100 100 100
(256/256) (256/256) (256/256) (240/240)
22 fe 100 100 100 100
(256/256) (256/256) (256/256) (240/240)
23 fe 100 100 100 100
(256/256) (256/256) (256/256) (240/240)
24 fe 100 100 100 100
(256/256) (256/256) (256/256) (240/240)

*Switch#

* Difference in display when other line card is installed at LINE1:
32T1E1T: [Port: 1/1 Type atmop] is not displayed.
1ATM155A: [Port: 1/2 Type tdmop] is not displayed.

Output items Port: Line group/port number
Type: Line group/port (line) type
atmop: ATM over Packet
tdmop: TDM over Packet
gbe: Gigabit Ethernet
fe: Fast Ethernet
Drop-Start Class-A to D:
Discarding starting position (%)
(Minimum discarding value/Maximum discarding value)

Related
command
set qos out-wred Setting of the WRED function
set qos initial-buffer L2 switch buffer setting



















(blank page)

Switch Control
7-1













7
Switch Control
Switch Control
7-2

General Privilege Save
set frame-size
Setting of frame size
Sets a frame size.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Port (line) group { fe | gbe }
fe: FE group
gbe: GbE group
P2: Frame size maximum value (byte)
FE group: 64 to 1536
GbE group: 64 to 9000

Default value P2: 1536
Usage condition None
Notes Tagbase VLAN port: Allowable frame size = Command specification value + 4 (byte)
Input examples
*Switch# set frame-size fe 1536
*Switch# set frame-size gbe 9000
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show frame-size Display of frame size


Switch Control
7-3

General Privilege Save
show frame-size
Display of frame size
Shows a frame size.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes Tagbase VLAN port: Allowable frame size = Command specification value + 4 (byte)
Input example
*Switch# show frame-size
Frame Size Value (Byte)
=======================
FE-Port : 1536
GbE-Port : 9000

*Switch#

Output items FE-Port: Frame value of FE port
GbE-Port: Frame value of GbE port


Related
command
set frame-size Setting of frame size


Switch Control
7-4

General Privilege Save
set fdb agingtime
Setting of aging time
Sets FDB aging time.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Aging time (10 to 1000000 seconds)

Default value P1: 300 seconds
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set fdb agingtime 1000000
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show fdb agingtime Display of aging time


Switch Control
7-5

General Privilege Save
show fdb agingtime
Display of aging time
Shows the currently set FDB aging time.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show fdb agingtime
FDB AgingTime Configuration
===========================
AgingTime (sec) : 1000000
(hh:mm:ss) : 277:46:40

*Switch#

Output items Agingtime(sec): Aging time value (second)
Agingtime(hh:mm:ss): Aging time value (hour:minute:second)

Related
command
set fdb agingtime Setting of aging time


Switch Control
7-6

General Privilege Save
show fdb count port
Display of MAC learning count per port
Shows the MAC learning count per port.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port (line) group or port number
Port (line) group (1/1 to 2/2) (Multiple values can be specified.)
Port number (17 to 24) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* The following shows the relationship between the port (line) group indicated by the
port (line) group parameter and the installed card.
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1H (32 x E1/T1 TDM/ATM)
1/1= ATMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
1/2= TDMoP group(1 to 16, 33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1T (32 x E1/T1 TDM)
1/2= TDMoP group(1 to 16, 33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 1ATM155A (1 x STM-1/OC-3 ATM)
1/1=ATMoP (1), adaptive clock (1)
Installed card LINE2: 2GBE (2 x GbE)
2/1= GbE (25)
2/2= GbE (26)
* When P1 is omitted, the MAC learning counts for all ports are shown.

Default value None
Usage condition You cannot specify a port (line) group and a port number to P1 simultaneously.
Note None
Switch Control
7-7

Input examples When LINE1: 32T1E1H line card is installed;

*Switch# show fdb count port
FDB Learned Entry
=================
Port Type Learned-Entry
--------------------------
1/1 atmop 1
1/2 tdmop 1
2/1 gbe 1
2/2 gbe 0
17 fe 1
18 fe 0
19 fe 0
20 fe 0
21 fe 0
22 fe 0
23 fe 0
24 fe 0

*Switch#

* Difference in display when other line card is installed at LINE1:
32T1E1T: [Port: 1/1 Type: atmop] is not displayed.
1ATM155A: [Port: 1/1 Type: adaptive clock] is displayed.
[Port: 1/2 Type: tdmop] is not displayed.

Output items Port: Port (line) group or port number
Type: Port (line) group/port (line) type
atmop: ATM over Packet
tdmop: TDM over Packet
adaptive-clock: Adaptive clock
gbe: Gigabit Ethernet
fe: Fast Ethernet
Learned-Entry: FDB learning count

Related
commands
show fdb count vid Display of MAC learning count per VLAN
show fdb count all Display of MAC learning count per device
show fdb table port Display of MAC learning information per port
show fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information per VLAN


Switch Control
7-8

General Privilege Save
show fdb count vid
Display of MAC learning count per VLAN
Shows the MAC learning count per VLAN.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
* When P1 is omitted, the MAC learning counts for all the VLANs are shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show fdb count vid 1-5
FDB Learned Entry
=================
VID Name Learned-Entry
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 VLAN0001 1
2 0
3 0
4 0
5 0

*Switch#

Output items VID: VLAN ID
Name: VLAN name
Learned-Entry: FDB learning count


Related
commands
show fdb count port Display of MAC learning count per port
show fdb count all Display of MAC learning count per device
show fdb table port Display of MAC learning information per port
show fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information per VLAN


Switch Control
7-9

General Privilege Save
show fdb count all
Display of MAC learning count per device
Shows the MAC learning count per device.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show fdb count all
FDB Learned Entry
=================
Total Learned Entry : 15000

*Switch#

Output item Total Learned Entry: FDB learning count

Related
commands
show fdb count port Display of MAC learning count per port
show fdb count vid Display of MAC learning count per VLAN
show fdb table port Display of MAC learning information per port
show fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information per VLAN


Switch Control
7-10

General Privilege Save
show fdb table port
Display of MAC learning information per port
Shows MAC learning information per port.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port (line) group or port number
Port (line) group (1/1 to 2/2) (Multiple values can be specified.)
Port number (17 to 24) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* The following shows the relationship between the port (line) group indicated by the
port (line) group parameter and the installed card.
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1H (32 x E1/T1 TDM/ATM)
1/1= ATMoP group (1 to 16 , 33 to 48)
1/2= TDMoP group(1 to 16 , 33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1T (32 x E1/T1 TDM)
1/2= TDMoP group(1 to 16 , 33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 1ATM155A (1 x STM-1/OC-3 ATM)
1/1=ATMoP (1), adaptive clock (1)
Installed card LINE2: 2GBE (2 x GbE)
2/1= GbE (25)
2/2= GbE (26)
* When P1 is omitted, MAC learning information for all ports is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition You cannot set a port (line) group and a port number to P1 simultaneously.
Notes None
Input examples When LINE1: 32T1E1H line card is installed;

*Switch# show fdb table port
FDB Learning Table
==================
Port Type MAC Address VID Name
----------------------------------------------------------------------
1/1 atmop 00:00:00:00:00:01 1 VLAN0001
1/2 tdmop 00:00:00:00:00:02 100 VLAN0100
2/1 gbe 00:00:00:00:00:03 100 VLAN0100
2/2 gbe 00:00:00:00:00:04 1000 VLAN1000
17 fe 00:00:00:00:40:94 4094 VLAN4094

*Switch#
* Difference in display when other line card is installed at LINE1:
32T1E1T: [Port: 1/1 Type: atmop] is not displayed.
1ATM155A: [Port: 1/1 Type: adaptive clock] is displayed.
[Port: 1/2 Type: tdmop] is not displayed.
Switch Control
7-11


Output items Port: Port (line) group or port number
Type: Port (line) group/port (line) type
atmop: ATM over Packet
tdmop: TDM over Packet
adaptive-clock: Adaptive clock
gbe: Gigabit Ethernet
fe: Fast Ethernet
MAC Address: MAC address
VID: VLAN ID
Name: VLAN name

Related
commands
show fdb count port Display of MAC learning count per port
show fdb count all Display of MAC learning count per device
clear fdb table port Clearing of MAC learning information per port


Switch Control
7-12

General Privilege Save
clear fdb table port
Clearing of MAC learning information per port
Clears MAC learning information for the specified port.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port (line) group or port number
Port (line) group (1/1 to 2/2) (single specification)
Port number (17 to 24) (single specification)
* The following shows the relationship between the port (line) group indicated by the
port (line) group parameter and the installed card.
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1H (32 x E1/T1 TDM/ATM)
1/1= ATMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
1/2= TDMoP group(1 to 16, 33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1T (32 x E1/T1 TDM)
1/2= TDMoP group(1 to 16, 33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 1ATM155A (1 x STM-1/OC-3 ATM)
1/1=ATMoP (1), adaptive clock (1)
Installed card LINE2: 2GBE (2 x GbE)
2/1= GbE (25)
2/2= GbE (26)
* When P1 is omitted, MAC learning information for all ports is cleared.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes When P1 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command is entered.
For ATMoP and TDMoP groups, the operation is as follows.
If the VLAN ID that is the same as that set in the specified port number is set in another
port in the same port (line) group when MAC learning information is cleared per port,
the MAC learning information relating to the VLAN ID is also cleared.

Input example
*Switch# clear fdb table port
Would you like to clear the information? :(Y/N): y
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show fdb table port Display of MAC learning information per port


Switch Control
7-13

General Privilege Save
show fdb table vid
Display of MAC learning information per VLAN
Shows MAC learning information per VLAN.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
* When P1 is omitted, MAC learning information for all the VLANs is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes
None
Input example When LINE1: 32T1E1H line card is installed;

*Switch# show fdb table vid
FDB Learning Table
==================
VID Name MAC Address Port Type
----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 VLAN0001 00:00:00:00:00:01 1/1 atmop
100 VLAN0100 00:00:00:00:00:02 1/2 tdmop
1 VLAN0001 00:00:00:00:40:94 2/1 gbe
100 VLAN0100 00:00:00:00:00:04 2/2 gbe
4094 VLAN4094 00:00:00:00:00:03 17 fe

*Switch#

* Difference in display when other line card is installed at LINE1:
32T1E1T: [Port: 1/1 Type: atmop] is not displayed.
1ATM155A: [Port: 1/1 Type: adaptive clock] is displayed.
[Port: 1/2 Type: tdmop] is not displayed.

Output items VID: VLAN ID
Name: VLAN name
MAC Address: MAC address
Port: Port number
Type: Port (line) group/port (line) type
atmop: ATM over Packet
tdmop: TDM over Packet
adaptive-clock: Adaptive clock
gbe: Gigabit Ethernet
fe: Fast Ethernet
Switch Control
7-14

Related
commands
show fdb count vid Display of MAC learning count per VLAN
show fdb count all Display of MAC learning count per device
clear fdb table vid Clearing of MAC learning information per VLAN


Switch Control
7-15

General Privilege Save
clear fdb table vid
Clearing of MAC learning information per VLAN
Clears MAC learning information for the specified VLAN.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear fdb table vid 1
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information per VLAN



















(blank page)

Route Control
8-1













8
Route Control


Route Control
8-2

General Privilege Save
set spantree
Setting of spanning tree protocol enable/disable support
Sets whether to enable or disable spanning tree protocol support.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Spanning tree protocol support enable/disable setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables spanning tree protocol support
disable: Disables spanning tree protocol support

Default value P1: disable
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set spantree enable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show spantree mode Display of spanning tree mode


Route Control
8-3

General Privilege Save
set spantree mode
Setting of spanning tree mode
Sets spanning tree mode.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Spanning tree mode { rstp | stp }
rstp: RSTP mode
stp: STP mode

Default value P1: rstp
Usage condition You can enter this command only when spanning tree protocol support is disabled.
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set spantree mode rstp
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show spantree mode Display of spanning tree mode
show spantree info Display of spanning tree switch information


Route Control
8-4

General Privilege Save
show spantree mode
Display of spanning tree mode
Shows spanning tree mode.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show spantree mode
Spantree Mode Information
=========================
Mode : RSTP
Status : disabled

*Switch#

Output items Mode: Mode type
RSTP: RSTP mode
STP: STP mode
Status: Spanning tree enable/disable status
enabled: Spanning tree enabled
disabled: Spanning tree disabled

Related
command
set spantree mode Setting of spanning tree mode


Route Control
8-5

General Privilege Save
set spantree priority
Setting of switch priority
Sets a switch priority.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Priority
RSTP mode: 0 to 61440 *Setting granularity: 4096
STP mode: 0 to 65535
* If the priority is not a multiple of the setting granularity, this parameter results in an
error.

Default value P1: 32768
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set spantree priority 61440
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show spantree info Display of spanning tree switch information


Route Control
8-6

General Privilege Save
set spantree time
Setting of spanning tree timer
Sets a spanning tree timer.

Input formats - Default specification
P1 (default)
- Type setting (hello time/maximum aging time/forward delay time)
P1 (hello | maxage | forward) P2
Parameters P1: Setting type specification { default | hello | maxage | forward }
default: Default setting
hello: Hello time
maxage: Maximum aging time
forward: Forward delay time
* Multiple setting of hello, maxage, and forward is possible.
* When entering all the hello, maxage, and forward parameters, you must enter
them in any of the following orders:
hello->maxage->forward, maxage->hello->forward, and forward->hello->maxage
When hello, maxage, or forward is specified in P1.
P2: Time setting (seconds)
When hello is specified: 1 to 10
When maxage is specified: 6 to 40
When forward is specified: 4 to 30

Default values P1: default
Hello time: 2 seconds
Maximum aging time: 20 seconds
Forward delay time: 15 seconds

Usage
conditions
The spanning tree timer to be set must meet the following:
2 (forward delay time - 1) maximum aging time
Maximum aging time 2 (hello time + 1)

Note An unspecified type is not set.
Input example
*Switch# set spantree time hello 4 maxage 10 forward 12
*Switch#

Output item

Related
command
show spantree info Display of spanning tree switch information
Route Control
8-7

General Privilege Save
set spantree txholdcount
Setting of hold count
Sets a hold count.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Maximum BPDU transmission count (1 to 10 times)

Default value P1: 3
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set spantree txholdcount 10
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show spantree info Display of spanning tree switch information


Route Control
8-8

General Privilege Save
show spantree info
Display of spanning tree switch information
Shows spanning tree switch information.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show spantree info
STP Global Information
======================
Spanning Tree Version : IEEE802.1w(RSTP)
STP Priority : 61440
Time Since Topology Change (sec) : ---
STP Topology Changes : ---
STP Designated Root : ---
STP Root Cost : ---
STP Root Port Number : ---
STP MAX Age (sec): ---
STP Hello Time (sec): ---
STP Hold Time (sec): ---
STP Forward Delay (sec): ---

Local Switch Information
========================
STP Bridge MAX Age (sec): 20
STP Bridge Hello Time (sec): 2
STP Bridge Forward Delay (sec): 15
STP TX Hold Count : 10

*Switch#

Route Control
8-9
Output items Spanning Tree Version: Spanning tree version
STP Priority: Spanning tree switch priority
Time Since Topology Change (sec): Topology post-change time
STP Topology Changes: Topology change count
STP Designated Root: Spanning tree root switch
STP Root Cost: Spanning tree root cost
STP Root Port Number: Spanning tree root port number
STP MAX Age (sec): Maximum aging time of spanning tree
STP Hello Time (sec): Hello time of spanning tree
STP Hold Time (sec): Hold time of spanning tree
STP Forward Delay (sec): Forward delay time of spanning tree
STP Bridge MAX Age (sec): Maximum aging time
STP Bridge Hello Time (sec): Hello time
STP Bridge Forward Delay (sec): Forward delay time
STP TX Hold Count: Transmission hold count value

Related
commands
set spantree mode Setting of spanning tree mode
set spantree priority Setting of switch priority
set spantree time Setting of spanning tree timer
set spantree txholdcount Setting of hold count


Route Control
8-10

General Privilege Save
set spantree port
Setting of spanning tree enable/disable per port
Sets whether to enable or disable the spanning tree per port.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Spanning tree enable/disable setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables spanning tree
disable: Disables spanning tree

Default value P2: disable
Usage condition None
Note Disabled ports are excluded from the spanning tree.
Input example
*Switch# set spantree port 17 enable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show spantree port Display of spanning tree port information


Route Control
8-11

General Privilege Save
set spantree port priority
Setting of priority per port
Sets a priority per port.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Priority
RSTP mode: 0 to 240 * Setting granularity: 16
STP mode: 0 to 255
* If the priority is not a multiple of the setting granularity, this parameter results in an
error.

Default value P2: 128
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set spantree port priority 17 240
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show spantree port Display of spanning tree port information


Route Control
8-12

General Privilege Save
set spantree port cost
Setting of path cost per port
Sets path cost per port.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Port cost value or automatic setting { auto }
RSTP mode : 1 to 200000000
STP mode : 1 to 65535
Automatic setting : auto

Default value P2: auto
Usage condition None
Note When setting auto, the port cost value depends on the port speed.

Actual default values when auto is set:
RSTP mode STP mode
10 (Mbps) 2000000 10 (Mbps) 100
100 (Mbps) 200000 100 (Mbps) 19
1 (Gbps) 20000 1 (Gbps) 4
Input example
*Switch# set spantree port cost 18 auto
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show spantree port Display of spanning tree port information


Route Control
8-13

General Privilege Save
show spantree port
Display of spanning tree port information
Shows spanning tree port information.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P1 is omitted, spanning tree port information for all the ports is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None

Input example
*Switch# show spantree port
RSTP Port Configuration Table
=============================
Port Priority Status Edge Cost
---------------------------------------------
17 128 disabled disabled auto
18 128 disabled disabled auto
19 128 disabled disabled auto
20 128 disabled disabled auto

<Omission>

25 128 disabled disabled auto
26 128 disabled disabled auto

RSTP Port Status Table
======================
DES DES DES
Port Status Role Cost Bridge Cost Port TC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
17 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb47c7f 0 8001 0
18 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb47c7f 0 8002 0
19 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb47c7f 0 8003 0
20 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb47c7f 0 8004 0

<Omission>

25 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb47c7f 0 8051 0
26 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb47c7f 0 8059 0

*Switch#

Route Control
8-14

Output items Port: Port number
STP(RSTP) Port Configuration Table
Priority: Priority per port
Status: Spanning tree status per port
enabled: Spanning tree enabled
disabled: Spanning tree disabled
Edge: Edge port status
enabled: Edge port enabled
disabled: Edge port disabled
Cost: Port path cost value or auto
STP(RSTP) Port Status Table
Status: Spanning tree status per port
disabled: Disabled spanning tree
discarding: Discarding spanning tree
learning: Learning spanning tree
forwarding: Forwarding spanning tree
Role: Port role status
disabled: Disabled port
alternate: Alternate port
designated: Designated port
root: Root port
backup: Backup port
Cost: Path cost value per port
DES Bridge: Specified bridge information
DES Cost: Specified port cost
DES Port: Specified port number
TC: Topology change count

Related
commands
set spantree port Setting of spanning tree enable/disable per port
set spantree port priority Setting of priority per port
set spantree port cost Setting of path cost per port


Route Control
8-15

General Privilege Save
set spantree port edge
Setting of edge port
Sets an edge port.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Edge port enable/disable setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables edge port
disable: Disables edge port

Default value P2: disable
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set spantree port edge 19 enable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show spantree port edge Display of edge port


Route Control
8-16

General Privilege Save
show spantree port edge
Display of edge port
Shows an edge port.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P1 is omitted, all edge ports are shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show spantree port edge
RSTP Operational Status of Edge Port Table
==========================================
Port Oper Admin
--------------------------
17 disabled disabled
18 disabled disabled
19 disabled disabled
20 disabled disabled
21 disabled disabled
22 disabled disabled
23 disabled disabled
24 disabled disabled
25 disabled disabled
26 disabled disabled

*Switch#

Output items Port: Port number
Oper: Edge port status
enabled: Edge port enabled
disabled: Edge port disabled
Admin: Edge port settings information
enabled: Edge port settings enabled
disabled: Edge port settings disabled

Related
command
set spantree port edge Setting of edge port
Route Control
8-17

General Privilege Save
set spantree port point-to-point
Setting of point-to-point
Sets point-to-point.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Point-to-point setting { enable | disable | auto }
enable: Enables point-to-point setting
disable: Disables point-to-point setting
auto: Automatic point-to-point setting

Default value P2: auto
Usage
conditions
If the port is full duplex when auto is set in P2, point-to-point setting is enabled.
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set spantree port point-to-point 17 enable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show spantree port point-to-point Display of point-to-point


Route Control
8-18

General Privilege Save
show spantree port point-to-point
Display of point-to-point
Shows point-to-point information.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P1 is omitted, point-to-point setting information for all the ports is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show spantree port point-to-point
RSTP Operational Status of Point-To-Point Table
===============================================
Port Oper Admin
------------------------------------
17 enabled auto
18 enabled auto
19 enabled auto
20 enabled auto
21 enabled auto
22 enabled auto
23 enabled auto
24 enabled auto
25 disabled disabled
26 enabled auto

*Switch#

Output items Port: Port number
Oper: Point-to-point status
enabled: Point-to-point enabled
disabled: Point-to-point disabled
Admin: Point-to-point setting information
enabled: Point-to-point setting enabled
disabled: Point-to-point setting disabled
auto: Automatic point-to-point setting

Related
command
set spantree port point-to-point Setting of point-to-point
Route Control
8-19

General Privilege Save
set aggregation group
Setting of link aggregation group
Sets a link aggregation group.

Input format P1 P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] P6 [P7]
Parameters P1: Group index (1 to 5)
P2: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P3: Number of valid ports (1 to 8)
* Specify the number of ports to be made valid in the group.
* When P3 is omitted, all the grouped ports are made valid.
P4: Standby filtering { standby-block | standby-admit }
standby-block: Discards receiving frames at standby port
standby-admit: Admits receiving frames at standby port
* Set whether to discard (standby-block) or admit (standby-admit) receiving frames
except LACP in the standby port.
* You can specify standby-admit only when local is selected in P5.
* When P4 is omitted, standby-block is set.
P5: Aggregation mode { local | dot3ad | passive }
local: Simple aggregation mode
dot3ad: LACP link aggregation mode
passive: Passive mode
* When P5 is omitted, local is set.
P6: Distribution setting { both-mac | src-mac | dst-mac }
both-mac: XOR values of source MAC address and destination MAC address
src-mac: Source MAC address
dst-mac: Destination MAC address
P7: Group name:1 to 32 characters
* When P7 is omitted, no group name is set.

Default values P3: 8, P4: standby-block, P5: local
Usage condition None
Note When configuring link aggregation, specify two or more ports (lines).
If no parameter is specified when the setting is overwritten, the default values are set.

Input example
*Switch# set aggregation group 1 17-19 2 standby-admit local both-mac
Index1
*Switch#

Output item




Route Control
8-20
Related
command
show aggregation group Display of link aggregation setting status

Route Control
8-21

General Privilege Save
show aggregation group
Display of link aggregation setting status
Shows the link aggregation setting status.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Group identifier { group index group name }
Group index (1 to 5)
Group name (1 to 32 characters)
* When P1 is omitted, all the set groups are shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show aggregation group 1
Switch Aggregate Table
======================
Aggregated Ports/ Active-Numbers/ Mode/ Distribute
Index Name Standby-Filter Time(msec) Type
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 17-19 2 local both-mac
index1 standby-admit 10000

Switch Aggregate Port Information
=================================
Partner Port
Port Status Status Priority
------------------------------------
17 active NO-LACP 128
18 active NO-LACP 128
19 standby NO-LACP 128

*Switch#

Route Control
8-22

Output items Index: Group index
Aggregated Ports: Port number set as link aggregation
Name: Group name
Active-numbers: Number of active ports
Standby-filter: Standby filtering
standby-block: Discards receiving frames except LACP
standby-admit: Admits receiving frames except LACP
Mode: Aggregation mode
local: Simple aggregation
dot3ad: LACP link aggregation mode
passive: Passive mode
Time(msec): Link aggregation protection time setting
Distribute Type: Distribution type setting
both-mac: XOR values of source MAC address and destination MAC address
src-mac: Source MAC address
dst-mac: Destination MAC address
Port: Port number
Status: block/down/active/standby status per port
block: Port blocked
down: Port unblocked and port physical link down
active: Active port
standby: Standby port
Partner Status: Partner status
LACP: LACP received
NO-LACP: LACP not received
Port Priority: Port priority

Related
command
set aggregation group Setting of link aggregation group


Route Control
8-23

General Privilege Save
clear aggregation group
Clearing of link aggregation group
Clears a link aggregation group.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Group identifier { group index group name }
Group index (1 to 5)
Group name (1 to 32 characters)

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note Clearing a group by specifying its group name requires that the group name be
registered in the set link aggregation in advance.

Input example
*Switch# clear aggregation group 1
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
set aggregation group Setting of link aggregation group


Route Control
8-24

General Privilege Save
set aggregation system priority
Setting of system priority
Sets a link aggregation system priority.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: System priority (0 to 65535)

Default value P1: 32768
Usage condition If a link aggregation group is already set in the device, you are not allowed to set the
system priority.

Note None
Input example
*Switch# set aggregation system priority 65535
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show aggregation system priority Display of system priority


Route Control
8-25

General Privilege Save
show aggregation system priority
Display of system priority
Shows the link aggregation system priority.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show aggregation system priority
LAG System Priority
===================
System Priority: 65535

*Switch#

Output item LAG System Priority: Link aggregation system priority value


Related
command
set aggregation system priority Setting of system priority


Route Control
8-26

General Privilege Save
set aggregation port priority
Setting of port priority
Sets a link aggregation port priority.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Port number(17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Priority (0 to 255)

Default value P2: 128
Usage condition Setting for a port to which the link is down in the link aggregation group cannot be
allowed.

Note None
Input example
*Switch# set aggregation port priority 17 255
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show aggregation port priority Display of port priority


Route Control
8-27

General Privilege Save
show aggregation port priority
Display of port priority
Shows a link aggregation port priority.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P1 is omitted, the priorities of all the installed ports are shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note When P1 is omitted, the priorities of all the installed ports are shown.
Input example
*Switch# show aggregation port priority 17
LAG Port Information
====================
Port Index Priority
-------------------
17 255

*Switch#

Output items Port: Port number
Index: Group index
Priority: Port priority value

Related
command
set aggregation port priority Setting of port priority


Route Control
8-28

General Privilege Save
set aggregation protection-time
Setting of link aggregation protection time
Sets link aggregation protection time.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Group identifier { group index group name }
Group index (1 to 5)
Group name (1 to 32 characters)
P2: Link aggregation protection time (0 to 10000 ms)
* Setting granularity: 100 ms
* If a multiple of the setting granularity is not specified, an error occurs.

Default value P2: 0
Usage condition None
Note The link aggregation protection time function is effective for the link aggregation group
that operates in simple aggregation and for which standby-admit is set.

Input example
*Switch# set aggregation protection-time 1 10000
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show aggregation protection-time Display of link aggregation protection time


Route Control
8-29

General Privilege Save
show aggregation protection-time
Display of link aggregation protection time
Shows link aggregation protection time.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Group identifier { group index group name }
Group index (1 to 5)
Group name (1 to 32 characters)
* When P1 is omitted, link aggregation protection times for all group indexes are
shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show aggregation protection-time 1
LAG Protection Time Information
===============================
Index Name Time(msec)
----------------------------------------------
1 index1 10000

*Switch#

Output items Index: Group index
Name: Group name
Time(msec): Link aggregation protection time (msec)

Related
command
set aggregation protection-time Setting of link aggregation protection time


















(blank page)

Filters
9-1













9
Filters


Filters
9-2

General Privilege Save
set isolate port
Setting/clearing of port isolate
Sets and clears port isolate.

Input format P1 P2 P3
Parameters P1: Receiving port (line) group or receiving port number
Receiving port (line) group: 1/1 to 2/2 (Multiple values can be specified.)
Receiving port number: 17 to 24 (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Destination port (line) group or destination port number
Destination port (line) group: 1/1 to 2/2 (Multiple values can be specified.)
Destination port number: 17 to 24 (Multiple values can be specified.)
P3: Port isolate enable/disable setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables port isolate setting
disable: Disables port isolate setting
* The following shows the relationship between the port (line) group indicated by the
port (line) group parameter in P1 and P2 and the installed card.
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1H (32 x E1/T1 TDM/ATM)
1/1=ATMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
1/2=TDMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1T (32 x E1/T1 TDM)
1/2=TDMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 1ATM155A (1 x STM-1/OC-3 ATM)
1/1=ATMoP (1)
Installed card LINE2: 2GBE (2 x GbE)
2/1=GbE (25)
2/2=GbE (26)

Default value disable is set to all destination ports that correspond to all receiving ports.
Usage
conditions
You cannot set a receiving port (line) group and a receiving port number to P1
simultaneously.
You cannot set a destination port (line) group and a destination port number to P2
simultaneously.

Notes Specifying enable in P3 disables transfer of the inflow frame from the specified
receiving port to the specified destination port.
If enable is specified, the configuration that is already set is not affected because the
destination line number or destination line module number specified in P2 is added to
the receiving line number or receiving line module number specified in P1.
If disable is specified, the other configurations already set are not affected because only
the destination line number or destination line module number in P2 corresponding to
the receiving line number or receiving line module number specified in P1 is disabled.

Filters
9-3
Input example
*Switch# set isolate port 1/1 17-24 enable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show isolate port Display of port isolate setting state


Filters
9-4

General Privilege Save
show isolate port
Display of port isolate setting state
Shows the port isolate setting state.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port (line) group or port number
Port (line) group: 1/1 to 2/2 (Multiple values can be specified.)
Port number: 17 to 24 (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P1 is omitted, all port numbers are assumed.
* The following shows the relationship between the port (line) group indicated by the
port (line) group parameter and the installed card.
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1H (32 x E1/T1 TDM/ATM)
1/1=ATMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
1/2=TDMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 32T1E1T (32 x E1/T1 TDM)
1/2=TDMoP group (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
Installed card LINE1: 1ATM155A (1 x STM-1/OC-3 ATM)
1/1=ATMoP (1)
1/2=none
Installed card LINE2: 2GBE (2 x GbE)
2/1=GbE (25)
2/2=GbE (26)

Default value None
Usage condition You cannot set a port (line) group and a port number to P1 simultaneously.

Note None
Filters
9-5
Input example When LINE1: 32T1E1H line card is installed;
*Switch# show isolate port
ATMoP Isolate Configuration
===========================
State of Port-Isolate of Port: 1/1
Transfer-Blocking Port :
TDMoP Isolate Configuration
===========================
State of Port-Isolate of Port: 1/2
Transfer-Blocking Port :
GbE Isolate Configuration
=========================
State of Port-Isolate of Port: 2/1
Transfer-Blocking Port :
----------------------------------------------------------
State of Port-Isolate of Port: 2/2
Transfer-Blocking Port :
FE Isolate Configuration
========================
State of Port-Isolate of Port: 17
Transfer-Blocking Port :
----------------------------------------------------------
State of Port-Isolate of Port: 18
Transfer-Blocking Port :
----------------------------------------------------------
State of Port-Isolate of Port: 19
Transfer-Blocking Port : 1/1,2/1-2 17-18,20-21,23-24
----------------------------------------------------------
State of Port-Isolate of Port: 20
Transfer-Blocking Port :
----------------------------------------------------------
State of Port-Isolate of Port: 21
Transfer-Blocking Port : 1/1-2/2
----------------------------------------------------------
State of Port-Isolate of Port: 22
Transfer-Blocking Port :
----------------------------------------------------------
State of Port-Isolate of Port: 23
Transfer-Blocking Port :
----------------------------------------------------------
State of Port-Isolate of Port: 24
Transfer-Blocking Port
*Switch#

* Difference in display when other line card is installed at LINE1:
32T1E1T: [ATMoP Isolate Configuration] is [No entry in the table.].
1ATM155A: [TDMoP Isolate Configuration] is [No entry in the table.].

Output items State of Port-Isolate of Port: Receiving port
Transfer-Blocking Port: Destination port whose port isolate setting in the receiving port
is enabled

Related
command
set isolate port Setting/clearing of port isolate
Filters
9-6

General Privilege Save
set filter in-port
Setting of input filtering
Sets input filtering.

Input formats - Setting destination MAC address filter
P1 P2 P3 [P4] [P5] [P6]
- Setting source MAC address filter
P1 P2 [P3] P4 [P5] [P6]
- Setting VLAN ID filter
P1 P2 [P3] [P4] P5 [P6]
- Setting Ethernet type filter
P1 P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] P6
- Setting all filters
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6
Parameters P1 Port number (25 to 26) (single specification)
P2: Index number (1 to 32)
P3: Destination MAC address filter
dest-mac (00:00:00:00:00:00 to ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff)
P4: Source MAC address filter
src-mac (00:00:00:00:00:00 to ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff)
P5: VLAN ID filter
: vlan-id (1 to 4094)
P6: Ethernet type filter
: ether-type (0x600 to 0xffff)

Default value None
Usage
conditions
To enter all parameters, enter them in the order of dest-mac -> src-mac -> vlan-id ->
ether-type.
Any of P3, P4, P5, or P6 must be entered.
An index which is already registered to a port can be overwritten. However, the same
filter cannot be registered doubly.
When multiple filters are set, only the frames which satisfy all filtering conditions set are
filtered.

Note None
Input example
*Switch# set filter in-port 25 32 dest-mac 00:30:40:30:50:20 src-mac
00:02:00:03:00:01 vlan-id 100 ether-type 0x9100
*Switch#

Filters
9-7
Output item



Related
commands
show filter in-port Display of input filtering
clear filter in-port Clearing of input filtering


Filters
9-8

General Privilege Save
show filter in-port
Display of input filtering
Shows input filtering.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number (25 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P1 is omitted, input filtering settings of all indexes set for the device are
shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show filter in-port 25
Input Filter Table
==================
Port : 25
=========
Destination Source
Index MAC Address MAC Address VID Ether-Type
--------------------------------------------------------------------
1 10:20:30:40:50:60 --- --- ---
2 --- --- 4094 0x8100
32 00:30:40:30:50:20 00:02:00:03:00:01 100 0x9100

*Switch#

Output items Port: Port number
Index: Index number
Destination MAC Address
Source MAC Address
VID: VLAN ID
Ether-Type: Ethernet type value

Related
commands
set filter in-port Setting of input filtering
clear filter in-port Clearing of input filtering


Filters
9-9

General Privilege Save
clear filter in-port
Clearing of input filtering
Clears input filtering.

Input format P1 [P2]
Parameters P1: Port number (25 to 26) (single specification)
P2: Index number (1 to 32)
* When P2 is omitted, settings for all ports specified in P1 are cleared.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note When P2 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command is entered.
Input example
*Switch# clear filter in-port 25 1
*Switch# clear filter in-port 25
Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set filter in-port Setting of input filtering
show filter in-port Display of input filtering



















(blank page)

EtherOAM
10-1













10
EtherOAM


EtherOAM
10-2

General Privilege Save
set ether-oam meg
Setting of MEG
Creates MEG.

Input format P1 P2 P3 [P4]
Parameters P1: MEG index (1 to 128)
P2: MEG ID (1 to 13 characters or 32 to 32 digits (hexadecimal))
* Range that can be set for 32-digit specification
0x00000000000000000000000000000000 to 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
P3: MEG level (0 to 7)
P4: CC transmission period : period { 3.33ms | 10ms | 100ms | 1s | 10s | 60s }
period 3.33ms: 3.33 milliseconds
period 10ms: 10 milliseconds
period 100ms:
period 1s: 1 second
period 10s: 10 seconds
period 60s: 60 seconds
* When P4 is omitted, 1s is assumed.

Default value P4: 1s
Usage condition You cannot register the same MEG ID for two or more MEG indexes. If the specified
MEG ID has already been registered for another MEG index, an error occurs.
If the MEP data of the specified MEG index exists, you cannot execute update.

Note None
Input examples
*Switch# set ether-oam meg 10 NEC0000000001 1 period 10s
*Switch# set ether-oam meg 100 0x0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef 4
period 3.33ms
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show ether-oam meg Display of MEG setting information
clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG
set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP
show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information
clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP


EtherOAM
10-3

General Privilege Save
show ether-oam meg
Display of MEG setting information
Displays the setting information of MEG.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: MEG index (1 to 128)
* When P1 is omitted, all MEG setting information is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input examples
*Switch# show ether-oam meg 10
Ether OAM MEG Information
=========================
MEG Index MEG ID MEG Level ETH-CC Period
-------------------------------------------------------------------
10 NEC0000000001 3 10sec

MEP Index
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
5,10,25,30

*Switch# show ether-oam meg
Ether OAM MEG Information
=========================
Total number of entries: 3

MEG Index MEG ID MEG Level ETH-CC Period
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 NEC0000000001 2 1sec
10 NEC0000000002 3 10sec
100 0x0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef 4 3.33msec

*Switch# show ether-oam meg
Ether OAM MEG Information
=========================
No entry in the table.

*Switch#

EtherOAM
10-4

Output items Total number of entries: Number of registered MEG
MEGIndex: MEG index
MEG ID: MEG ID
MEG Level: MEG level
ETH-CC Period: Transmission period
MEP Index: Value of the MEP index of the MEP which includes the MEG index
specified with the command (Only when P1 is specified)

Related
commands
set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG
clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG
set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP
show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information
clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP


EtherOAM
10-5

General Privilege Save
clear ether-oam meg
Clearing of MEG
Clears MEG.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: MEG index (1 to 128)

Default value None
Usage
conditions
If the MEP data of the specified MEG index exists, you cannot clear it.
Note None

Input example
*Switch# clear ether-oam meg 10
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG
show ether-oam meg Display of MEG setting information
set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP
show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information
clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP


EtherOAM
10-6

General Privilege Save
set ether-oam mep
Setting of MEP
Creates MEP.

Input format P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 128)
P2: Port number (25 to 26) (single specification)
P3: VLAN ID or Untag specification { untag }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification))
untag: Untag specification
P4: MEG index (1 to 128)
P5: MEP ID (1 to 8191)

Default value None
Usage
conditions
If the MEG data of the specified MEG index does not exist, or if the MEP data of the
specified MEP index has already been registered, you cannot execute registration.
If the data of the maximum number of MEPs (= 64) has already been registered for the
specified port number, you cannot execute registration.
Two or more MEPs cannot be registered for the ports for which the EtherRing function
is enabled.
If the EtherRing control VLAN is set, set the same value for the VLAN ID in P3 as the
EtherRing control VLAN or set untag in P3.

Notes The specified VLAN ID must have been set for the specified port (line).
When VLAN tag swapping is set to the specified port number, set MEP to the swapping
destination VLAN ID.
When VLAN tag swapping is set to the specified port number and the swapping
destination VLAN ID is 0, MEP cannot be set for VLAN ID 0.
When you register MEP to the specified port number using the same VLAN ID as that
for the control VLAN of EtherRing, set the MEG level of the MEP smaller than that for
the control VLAN of EtherRing.

Input example
*Switch# set ether-oam mep 20 25 333 10 2000
*Switch#

Output item


EtherOAM
10-7
Related
commands
set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG
show ether-oam meg Display of MEG setting information
clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG
show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information
clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP
set ether-oam peer-mep Setting of associated MEP ID
clear ether-oam peer-mep Clearing of associated MEP ID


EtherOAM
10-8

General Privilege Save
show ether-oam mep
Display of MEP setting information
Displays the setting information of MEP.

Input formats - Specifying port (line)
P1 (port) [P2]
- Specifying index
P1 (index) [P2]
Parameters P1: Port (line) specification { port } or index specification { index }
port: Port (line) specification
index: Index specification
When port is specified in P1
P2: Port number (25 to 26) (single specification)
* When P2 is omitted, setting information of all ports is shown.
When index is specified in P1
P2: MEP index (1 to 128)
* When P2 is omitted, setting information of all indexes is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note To refer to MEP fault information (ETH-CC Fault Table) or associated MEP/RDI fault
information (Ether OAM Peer MEP Information), specify index in P1 and MEP index in
P2.

Input examples
*Switch# show ether-oam mep port 25
Ether OAM MEP Information
=========================
Port : 25 MEP Index : 1
==========================
VID : 10
MEG Level : 4
MEG Index : 1
MEG ID : NEC0000000002
Position : outside
MEP ID : 300
CC Priority : 7
Transmit : enabled
Receive : disabled
Kind : unicast
DES MAC Address : 00:11:22:33:44:55
RDI : disabled

*Switch# show ether-oam mep port
Ether OAM MEP Information
EtherOAM
10-9
=========================
Port : 25 MEP Index : 1
==========================
VID : 10
MEG Level : 4
MEG Index : 1
MEG ID : NEC0000000002
Position : outside
MEP ID : 300
CC Priority : 7
Transmit : enabled
Receive : disabled
Kind : unicast
DES MAC Address : 00:11:22:33:44:55
RDI : disabled

Port : 26 MEP Index : 20
==========================
VID : 20
MEG Level : 3
MEG Index : 2
MEG ID : 0x01020304050607080910111213141516
Position : outside
MEP ID : 180
CC Priority : 7
Transmit : disabled
Receive : enabled
Kind : ---
DES MAC Address : ---
RDI : disabled

*Switch# show ether-oam mep index 10
Ether OAM MEP Information
=========================
MEP Index : 10 Port : 25
==========================
VID : 20
MEG Level : 3
MEG Index : 2
MEG ID : NEC0000000003
Position : outside
MEP ID : 180
CC Priority : 7
Transmit : disabled
Receive : enabled
Kind : ---
DES MAC Address : ---
RDI : disabled
EtherOAM
10-10


ETH-CC Fault Table
==================
Status : mismerge,unexpected-mep,loc,rdi

Ether OAM Peer MEP Information
==============================
Peer MEP ID Condition RDI-Received
------------------------------------
10 normal rdi
28 loc no-rdi
123 normal rdi
3333 disabled disabled

*Switch# show ether-oam mep index
Ether OAM MEP Information
=========================
MEP Index : 1 Port : 25
==========================
VID : 10
MEG Level : 4
MEG Index : 1
MEG ID : NEC0000000003
Position : outside
MEP ID : 300
CC Priority : 7
Transmit : enabled
Receive : disabled
Kind : unicast
DES MAC Address : 00:11:22:33:44:55
RDI : disabled

MEP Index : 20 Port : 26
==========================
VID : 20
MEG Level : 3
MEG Index : 2
MEG ID : 0x01020304050607080910111213141516
Position : outside
MEP ID : 180
CC Priority : 7
Transmit : disabled
Receive : enabled
Kind : ---
DES MAC Address : ---
RDI : disabled

*Switch#

EtherOAM
10-11

Output items Port: Port number
MEP Index: MEP index
VID: VLAN ID
For untagMEP, "untag" is displayed.
MEG Level: MEG level
MEG Index: MEG index
MEG ID: MEG ID
MEP ID: MEP ID
Position: Frame transmission direction
CC Priority: CC frame priority
Transmit: Enabling/disabling setting of CC frame sending
Receive: Enabling/disabling setting of CC frame receiving
Kind: CC frame transmission type
DES MAC Address: Destination MAC address of CC frame
RDI: RDI transmission setting
Status: MEP fault information
Peer MEP ID: Associated MEP ID
Condition: Associated MEP fault information
normal: No LOC fault, when no VLAN is set
loc: LOC fault
disabled: Receiving check is stopped
RDI-Received: RDI fault information
no-rdi: No RDI fault
rdi: RDI fault
disabled: Receiving check is stopped

Related
commands
set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG
show ether-oam meg Display of MEG setting information
clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG
set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP
clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP
set ether-oam peer-mep Setting of associated MEP ID
clear ether-oam peer-mep Clearing of associated MEP ID


EtherOAM
10-12

General Privilege Save
clear ether-oam mep
Clearing of MEP
Clears MEP.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: MEP index (1 to 128)

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes If the associated MEP ID has been registered for the specified MEP index, the setting
of the associated MEP ID is also cleared when the MEP index is cleared.
If the specified MEP index has been registered as a test target MEP, the test target
MEP is cleared when the MEP index is cleared.
During ETH-CCM operation (either of sending or receiving is currently enabled), the
MEP of the specified MEP index cannot be cleared.

Input example
*Switch# clear ether-oam mep 20
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG
show ether-oam meg Display of MEG setting information
clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG
set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP
show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information
set ether-oam peer-mep Setting of associated MEP ID
clear ether-oam peer-mep Clearing of associated MEP ID
set ether-oam lm Setting of test target MEP
clear ether-oam lm Clearing of test target MEP


EtherOAM
10-13

General Privilege Save
set ether-oam lm
Setting of test target MEP
Sets a test target MEP.

Input format P1 [P2]
Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 128)
P2: Test target frame priority specification or all priorities specification { all }
Specifying test target frame priority: 0 to 7
all: Specifying all priorities
* When P2 is omitted, all is assumed.

Default value P2: all
Usage
conditions
If the MEP data of the specified MEP index has not been registered, you cannot
execute registration.
If the test target MEP has already been registered, you cannot execute registration.

Note None
Input example
*Switch# set ether-oam lm 15 all
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG
show ether-oam meg Display of MEG setting information
clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG
show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information
clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP
show ether-oam lm Display of test target MEP
clear ether-oam lm Clearing of test target MEP


EtherOAM
10-14

General Privilege Save
show ether-oam lm
Display of test target MEP
Shows the test target MEP setting information.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show ether-oam lm
Ether OAM Loss Measurement Information
======================================
MEP Index : 15
Target Priority : all
Port : 25
MAC Address : 00:30:13:a1:0f:3c
VID : 100
MEG ID : A
MEP ID : 15
MEG Level : 1

*Switch#

Output items MEP Index: MEP index
Target Priority: Priority of measurement target frame
Port: Port number
MAC Address: MAC address of test target port
VID: VLAN ID
For untagMEP, "untag" is displayed.
MEG ID: MEG ID
MEP ID: MEP ID
MEG Level: MEG level

Related
commands
set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG
clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG
set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP
clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP
set ether-oam lm Setting of test target MEP
clear ether-oam lm Clearing of test target MEP
EtherOAM
10-15

General Privilege Save
clear ether-oam lm
Clearing of test target MEP
Clears a test target MEP.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear ether-oam lm
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG
show ether-oam meg Display of MEG
clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG
set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP
show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information
clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP
set ether-oam lm Setting of test target MEP
show ether-oam lm Display of test target MEP


EtherOAM
10-16

General Privilege Save
set ether-oam peer-mep
Setting of associated MEP ID
Sets the associated MEP ID.

Input format P1 P2 [P3]
Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 128)
P2: Associated MEP ID (1 to 8191) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P3: CCM receiving setting { receive-enable | receive-disable }
receive-enable: Enables CCM receiving setting
receive-disable: Disables CCM receiving setting
* When P3 is omitted, receive-enable is assumed.

Default value P3: receive-enable
Usage
conditions
If the MEP data of the specified MEP index has not been registered, you cannot
execute registration. The maximum number of the associated MEPs can be registered
on a per-port number basis. (The maximum number of the associated MEPs: 64)
Two or more associated MEPs cannot be registered for the MEPs which are registered
for the ports for which the EtherRing function is enabled.

Note To enable CCM receiving monitoring, you must set receive-enable for ETH-CC
transmission setting to allow receiving.

Input example
*Switch# set ether-oam peer-mep 10 3000,4000
*Switch#

Output item


Related
commands
set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP
show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information
clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP
clear ether-oam peer-mep Clearing of associated MEP ID


EtherOAM
10-17

General Privilege Save
clear ether-oam peer-mep
Clearing of associated MEP ID
Clears the associated MEP ID.

Input format P1 [P2]
Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 128)
P2: Associated MEP ID (1 to 8191) (single specification)
* When P2 is omitted, all the associated MEP IDs are cleared.

Default value None
Usage
conditions
You can clear the associated MEP ID of the specified MEP index only in the following
conditions. Otherwise, you cannot clear it.
Conditions:
[1] If the receiving setting of the own MEP is disabled, all the associated MEP ID of the
own MEP can be cleared.
[2] If the receiving setting of the own MEP is enabled and that of an associated MEP is
disabled, only the associated MEP of the own MEP can be cleared.

Notes None

Input example
*Switch# clear ether-oam peer-mep 10 3000
*Switch#

Output item


Related
commands
set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP
show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information
clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP
set ether-oam peer-mep Setting of associated MEP ID


EtherOAM
10-18

General Privilege Save
set ether-oam frame
Setting of EtherOAM frame common information
Sets the common information of EtherOAM frame.

Input formats - Specifying DA Multicast MAC address
P1
- Specifying protocol type
P2
- Specifying both conditions
P1 P2
Parameters P1: DA Multicast MAC address (01:00:00:00:00:00 to 01:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff)
* When P1 is omitted, nothing is specified.
P2: Protocol type (0x0600 to 0xffff)
* When P2 is omitted, nothing is specified.

Default values P1: 01:80:c2:00:00:30
P2: 0x8902

Usage condition None

Notes Execute this setting before performing ETH-CC, ETH-LB, ETH-LT, ETH-DM and ETH-
LM tests.
The following MAC address cannot be set in P1.
01:80:C2:00:00:00 - 01:80:C2:00:00:2F/01:19:A7:00:00:00 to 01:19:A7:00:00:FF
Since MEG Level is automatically set for the last four digits of the MAC address
specified in P1, the value of the last four digits specified with this command is not
reflected. For the automatic setting of MEG Level, refer to "Setting EtherOAM frame
common information" of "EtherOAM Function" in the "Instruction Manual".

Input example
*Switch# set ether-oam frame 01 :02 :03 :04 :05 :06 0x0600
*Switch#

Output item


Related
commands
show ether-oam frame Display of Ether-OAM frame common information


EtherOAM
10-19

General Privilege Save
show ether-oam frame
Display of EtherOAM frame common information
Displays the common information of EtherOAM frame.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show ether-oam frame
Ether OAM Frame Multicast MAC Address
=====================================
Class1 : 01:80:c3:00:00:70
Class2 : 01:80:c3:00:00:78

Ether OAM Frame Protocol Type
=============================
Protocol Type : 0xfffe

*Switch#

Output items Multicast MAC address(class1):
Destination Multicast MAC address for Ether CC/LB frame
Multicast MAC address(class2):
Destination Multicast MAC address for Ether LT frame
Protocol type

Related
command
set ether-oam frame Setting of Ether-OAM frame common information


EtherOAM
10-20

General Privilege Save
set ether-oam reply-period
Setting of Reply frame returning period
Sets the returning period of Reply frame.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Reply frame type { loopback | linktrace }
loopback: ETH-LBR
linktrace: ETH-LTR
P2: Reply frame returning period { random | immediately }
random: Random
immediately: Immediate

Default value P2: random (loopback)
immediately (linktrace)

Usage condition None
Note ETH-LBR is applied only multicast ETH-LBM is received.
Input example
*Switch# set ether-oam reply-period loopback random
*Switch#

Output item


Related
command
show ether-oam reply-period Display of Reply frame returning period


EtherOAM
10-21

General Privilege Save
show ether-oam reply-period
Display of Reply frame returning period
Displays the returning period of Reply frame.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show ether-oam reply-period
Ether OAM Reply Period Information
==================================
Reply Frame Reply Period
-------------------------
ETH-LBR immediately
ETH-LTR random

*Switch#

Output items Reply Frame: Reply frame type
Reply Period: Reply frame returning period

Related
command
set ether-oam reply-period Setting of Reply frame returning period


EtherOAM
10-22

General Privilege Save
show ether-oam mac-address
Display of EtherOAM MAC address
Shows the MAC address for a port supporting the EtherOAM function.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show ether-oam mac-address
Ether OAM MAC Address
=====================
Port MAC Address
-----------------------
25 00:0b:6d:02:21:95
26 00:0b:6d:02:21:96

*Switch#

Output items Port: Port number
MAC Address: MAC address

Related
command
None


EtherOAM
10-23

General Privilege Save
set ether-oam cc
Setting of EtherOAM Continuity Check transmission
Sets the transmission of EtherOAM Continuity Check.

Input formats - Starting transmission
P1 P2 (transmit-enable) [P3] P4 [P5]
- Stopping transmission
P1 P2 (transmit-disable) P3
Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 128)
P2: Transmission type { transmit-enable | transmit-disable }
transmit-enable: Starts ETH-CCM transmission
transmit-disable: Stops ETH-CCM transmission
When transmit-enable is specified in P2
P3: Destination MAC address
* When P3 is omitted, the multicast transmission is assumed.
P4: Receiving allowance { receive-enable | receive-disable }
receive-enable: Starts ETH-CCM receiving check
receive-disable: Stops ETH-CCM receiving check
P5: Priority priority (0 to 7)
* When P5 is omitted, 7 is assumed.
When transmit-disable is specified in P2
P3: Receiving allowance { receive-enable | receive-disable }
receive-enable: Starts ETH-CCM receiving check
receive-disable: Stops ETH-CCM receiving check

Default values P2: transmit-disable
P4: receive-disable
P5: 7

Usage condition If the MEP data of the specified MEP index has not been registered, you cannot
execute this setting.

Note None
Input example
*Switch# set ether-oam cc 20 transmit-enable 00 :03 :06 :09 :12 :15
receive-enable priority 4
*Switch#

Output item

Related
commands
set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP
show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information
clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP
EtherOAM
10-24

General Privilege Save
set ether-oam rdi
Setting of RDI operation
Sets RDI transmission.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 128)
P2: RDI operation { enable | disable }
enable: RDI operation enabled
disable: RDI operation disabled

Default value P2: disable
Usage condition If the MEP data of the specified MEP index has not been registered, you cannot
execute registration.

Note Unless the ETH-CC transmission is enabled in the ETH-CC transmission setting, you
cannot send RDI frames.

Input example
*Switch# set ether-oam rdi 1 enable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP
show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information
clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP
set ether-oam cc Setting of Ether-OAM Continuity Check transmission


EtherOAM
10-25

General Privilege Save
show ether-oam fault last-change
Display of final fault information
Displays the LOC/LOC recovery/RDI/RDI recovery information detected last.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show ether-oam fault last-change
Ether OAM CCM DB Final Fault Information
========================================
Date : 01/01/2000 00:00:00
Fault : LOC DETECT MEP INDEX:1

*Switch#

Output items Date: Date
Fault: Fault information
LOC DETECT: LOC detection
LOC RECOVER: LOC recovery
RDI DETECT: RDI detection
RDI RECOVER: RDI recovery
MEP INDEX: MEP index

Related
command
None


EtherOAM
10-26

General Privilege Save
show ether-oam fault reason
Display of CCM error cause
Displays the detailed information on CCM error cause of the port.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number (25 to 26) (single specification)
* When P1 is omitted, detailed information on error cause for all the ports is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None

Input examples
*Switch# show ether-oam fault reason
Ether OAM CCM Fault Table Information
=====================================
Port : 25 MEP Index : 1
==========================
Fault : unexpected-level
MAC Address : 01:02:03:04:05:06
Value : 4

Port : 26 MEP Index : 128
==========================
Fault : unexpected-period
MAC Address : 03:03:03:03:03:03
Value : 10sec

*Switch# show ether-oam fault reason 25
Ether OAM CCM Fault Table Information
=====================================
Port : 25 MEP Index : 3
==========================
Fault : mismerge
MAC Address : 01:01:01:01:01:01
Value : [01 20 0d] NEC0000000001

*Switch#
EtherOAM
10-27
Output items Port: Port number
MEP Index: MEP index
Fault: Fault cause
unexpected-level: Unexpected MEG Level
mismerge: Mismerge
unexpected-mep: Unexpected MEP ID
unexpected-period: Unexpected Period
MAC Address: Source MAC address
Value: Fault detailed information *Value varies depending on [Fault] (fault cause).
unexpected-level: MEG level
mismerge: MEG ID
[01 20 0d] is added at the beginning when MEG ID has 1 to 13 characters.
unexpected-mep: MEP ID
unexpected-period: Period value
3.33 msec, 10 msec, 100 msec, 1 sec, 10 sec, 60 sec, 10 min

Related
command
clear ether-oam fault reason Clearing of CCM error cause


EtherOAM
10-28

General Privilege Save
clear ether-oam fault reason
Clearing of CCM error cause
Clears the detailed information about CCM error cause of the port.

Input format [P1]
Parameter
P1: Port number (25 to 26) (single specification)
* When P1 is omitted, detailed information of error cause for all the ports is cleared.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear ether-oam fault reason 25
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show ether-oam fault reason Display of CCM error cause


EtherOAM
10-29

General Privilege Save
loopback ether-oam
Executing of ETH-LB
Executes ETH-LB and displays the execution result.

Input format P1 [P2 [P3] [P4]] [P5] [P6]
Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 128)
P2: Destination MAC address
* When P2 is omitted, the multicast transmission is assumed.
P3: LBM transmission count count (1 to 127)
* When P3 is omitted, 4 is assumed.
P4: Transmission period (sec) period (1 to 10)
* When P4 is omitted, 1 is assumed.
P5: PDU size size (46 to 8982)
* When P5 is omitted, 46 is assumed.
P6: Priority priority (0 to 7)
* When P6 is omitted, 7 is assumed.

Default values P3: 4
P4: 1
P5: 46
P6: 7

Usage
conditions
If the MEP data of the specified MEP index does not exist, you cannot execute this
command.
You cannot activate two or more of this command simultaneously. Also, you cannot
activate this command and any/all of the ETH-LT execution command, the ETH-DM
execution command, or/and the ETH-LM execution command simultaneously.

Note None
EtherOAM
10-30
Input example
*Switch# loopback ether-oam 1 00:30:13:41:77:70
Ether OAM Loopback Port Information
===================================
Port : 25
MAC Address : 00:30:13:41:77:d0
VID : 1
MEG ID : NEC000001
MEP ID : 1
MEG Level : 1

result 00:30:13:41:77:70 seq=1 bytes=46 time<5ms
result 00:30:13:41:77:70 seq=2 bytes=46 time<5ms
result 00:30:13:41:77:70 seq=3 bytes=46 time<5ms
result 00:30:13:41:77:70 seq=4 bytes=46 time<5ms

Ether OAM Loopback Result Information for 00:30:13:41:77:70
===========================================================
request = 4, test ok = 4, fail = 0 (0% failure)
delay minimum = 5ms, maximum = 5ms, average = 5ms
delay variation = 0ms
*Switch#

Output items port: Port number
MAC Address: Destination MAC address
VID: VLAN ID
MEG ID: MEG ID
MEP ID: MEP ID
MEG Level: MEG level

Related
commands
set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP
show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information
clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP


EtherOAM
10-31

General Privilege Save
linktrace ether-oam
Executing of ETH-LT
Executes ETH-LT and displays the execution result.

Input format P1 P2 [P3] [P4] [P5]
Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 128)
P2: Destination MAC address
P3: ETH-LTR monitoring time wait-time { 5s | 10s }
wait-time 5s: 5 seconds
wait-time 10s: 10 seconds
* When P3 is omitted, 5s is assumed.
P4:TTL value ttl (1 to 255)
* When P4 is omitted, 255 is assumed.
P5: Priority priority (0 to 7)
* When P5 is omitted, 7 is assumed.

Default values P3: 5s
P4: 255
P5: 7

Usage
conditions
If the MEP data of the specified MEP index does not exist, you cannot execute this
command.
You cannot activate two or more of this command simultaneously. Also, you cannot
activate this command and any/all of the ETH-LB execution command, the ETH-DM
execution command, or/and the ETH-LM execution command simultaneously.

Note None
EtherOAM
10-32
Input example
*Switch# linktrace ether-oam 1 00:30:13:b0:01:03
Ether OAM Link Trace Port Information
=====================================
Port : 25
MAC Address : 00:30:13:b0:01:01
VID : 3
MEG ID : NEC000001
MEP ID : 1
MEG Level : 1

Ether OAM Link Trace Result Information for 00:30:13:b0:01:03
=============================================================
TTL MAC Address Relay Action
------------------------------------
254 00:30:13:b0:01:03 RlyHit

Trace Complete

*Switch#

Output items port: Port number
MAC Address: Source MAC address
VID: VLAN ID
MEG ID
MEP ID
MEG Level

TTL: TTL value
MAC Address: Source MAC address of ETH-LT returning
Relay Action

Related
commands
set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP
show ether-oam mep Display of MEP
clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP


EtherOAM
10-33

General Privilege Save
dm ether-oam
Executing of ETH-DM
Executes ETH-DM and displays the execution result.

Input format P1 P2 [P3] [P4] [P5]
Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 128)
P2: Destination MAC address
P3: DMM frame transmission count count (1 to 500)
* When P3 is omitted, 4 is assumed.
P4: Transmission period of ETH-DMM (sec or msec)
Transmission period (sec): second-period (1 to 10) (sec)
Transmission period (msec): milli-period (100 to 1000) (msec)
* When P4 is omitted, 1 is assumed.
P5: Priority priority (0 to 7)
* When P5 is omitted, 7 is assumed.

Default values P3: 4
P4: 1
P5: 7

Usage
conditions
If the MEP data of the specified MEP index does not exist, you cannot execute this
command.
You cannot activate two or more of this command simultaneously. Also, you cannot
activate this command and any/all of the ETH-LB execution command, the ETH-LT
execution command, or/and the ETH-LM execution command simultaneously.

Note None
EtherOAM
10-34

Input example
*Switch# dm ether-oam 1 00:30:13:41:37:a3 count 10 second-period 1
Ether OAM Delay Measurement Port Information
============================================
Port : 25
MAC Address : 00:30:13:41:37:fd
VID : 1
MEG ID : NEC000001
MEP ID : 1
MEG Level : 1

During an ETH-DM examination........

Ether OAM Delay Measurement Result Information for 00:30:13:41:37:a3
====================================================================
Request DMM : 10
Receive DMR : 10
Delay Minimum(msec) : 0.11
Delay Maximum(msec) : 0.11
Delay Average(msec) : 0.11
Delay Variation(msec) : 0.00
Error Count : 0
Result : complete

*Switch#

Output items port: Port number
MAC Address: Source MAC address
VID: VLAN ID
MEG ID: MEG ID
MEP ID: MEP ID
MEG Level: MEG level
Request DMM: Sending DMM count
Receive DMR: Receiving DMR count
Delay Minimum(msec): Delay time (Minimum)
Delay Maximum(msec): Delay time (Maximum)
Delay Average(msec): Delay time (Average)
Delay Variation(msec): Delay time (Deviation)
Error Count: Error count
Result: Result
complete: ETH-DMM transmission of the set count has been completed.
over flow: Stopped due to overflow
forced stop: Stopped by Ctrl-C
link down: Stopped due to link down
failed: Stopped because ETH-DMR has not been received three consecutive times

Related
commands
set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP
show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information
clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP


EtherOAM
10-35

General Privilege Save
lm ether-oam
Executing of ETH-LM
Executes ETH-LM and displays the execution result.

Input format P1 P2 [P3] [P4] [P5]
Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 128)
P2: Destination MAC address
P3: LMM frame transmission count count (1 to 500)
* When P3 is omitted, 4 is assumed.
P4: Transmission period of ETH-LMM (sec or msec)
Transmission period (sec): second-period (1 to 10) (sec)
Transmission period (msec): milli-period (100 to 1000) (msec)
* Setting granularity: 100 (msec)
* An error occurs when a multiple of the setting granularity is not specified.
* When P4 is omitted, 1 (sec) is assumed.
P5: Priority priority (0 to 7)
* When P5 is omitted, 7 is assumed.

Default values P3: 4
P4: 1
P5: 7

Usage
conditions
If the MEP data of the specified MEP index does not exist, you cannot execute this
command.
You cannot activate two or more of this command simultaneously. Also, you cannot
activate this command and any/all of the ETH-LB execution command, the ETH-LT
execution command, or/and the ETH-DM execution command simultaneously.

Note When a Loss Measurement test is performed, the counter value used as a base for
calculating frame loss is obtained using ETH-LMM/LMR. Therefore, Request
LMM/Receive LMR in the execution result is frame loss measurement count + 1.

EtherOAM
10-36

Input example
*Switch# lm ether-oam 15 00:30:13:a1:0f:0a
Ether OAM Loss Measurement Port Information
===========================================
Port : 25
MAC Address : 00:30:13:a1:0f:7c
VID : 100
MEG ID : NEC000001
MEP ID : 15
MEG Level : 1

During an ETH-LM examination.....

Ether OAM Loss Measurement Result Information for 00:30:13:a1:0f:0a
===================================================================
Examination MEP Index : 15
Examination MEP ID : 15
Target Priority : all
Request LMM : 5
Receive LMR : 5
Transmit Frame Near : 100
Receive Frame Far : 100
Transmit Frame Far : 100
Receive Frame Near : 100
Sum of Frame Loss Far : 0
Rate of Frame Loss Far : 0.00%
Sum of Frame Loss Near : 0
Rate of Frame Loss Near : 0.00%
Error Count : 0
Result : complete

*Switch#
Output items Port: Port number
MAC Address: Source MAC address
VID: VLAN ID
MEG ID
MEP ID
MEG Level
Examination MEP Index: Test target MEP Index
Examination MEP ID: Test target MEP ID
Target Priority: Measurement target frame priority
Request LMM: Sending LMM count
Receive LMR: Receiving LMR count
Sum of Frame Loss Far: Sending frame loss count
Sum of Frame Loss Near: Receiving frame loss count
Error Count: Error count
Result
complete: ETH-LMM transmission of the set count has been completed.
over flow: Stopped due to overflow
forced stop: Stopped by Ctrl-C
link down: Stopped due to link down
failed: Stopped because ETH-LMR is not received three consecutive times

EtherOAM
10-37

Related
commands
set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP
show ether-oam mep Display of MEP
clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP


EtherOAM
10-38

General Privilege Save
set ether-ring
Setting of EtherRing enable/disable
Sets whether to enable or disable the EtherRing function.

Input formats - Enabling EtherRing
P1 P2 (enable) P3 P4 P5
- Disabling EtherRing
P1 P2 (disable)
Parameters P1: Ring index (1 to 16)
P2: EtherRing setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables EtherRing
disable: Disables EtherRing
When enable is specified in P2
P3: Ring configuration port number 1 (25 to 26) (single specification)
P4: Ring configuration port number 2 (25 to 26) (single specification)
P5: Switchback mode { revertive }
revertive: Automatic switchback

Default value P2: disable
Usage
conditions
If the same port number is specified for ring configuration port numbers 1 and 2, you
cannot execute this setting.
If a link aggregation group is set or the spanning tree port is enabled for the specified
ring configuration port number, you cannot execute this setting.
If a ring index has already been registered for the specified ring configuration port
number, you cannot execute this setting.
If two or more MEPs have been set for the specified ring configuration port number or
two or more associated MEPs are set for the registered MEP, you cannot execute this
setting.
Note To modify the setting, disable EtherRing once.
Input example
*Switch# set ether-ring 1 enable 25 26 revertive
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ether-ring control-vlan Setting of EtherRing control VLAN
set ether-ring rpl-owner Setting of EtherRing RPL port
set ether-ring time Setting of EtherRing timer
show ether-ring config Display of EtherRing configuration information
show ether-ring status Display of EtherRing status information


EtherOAM
10-39
General Privilege Save
set ether-ring control-vlan
Setting of EtherRing control VLAN
Sets control VLAN for the EtherRing function.

Input formats - Enabling EtherRing control VLAN
P1 P2 (enable) P3 P4 P5 [P6]
- Disabling EtherRing control VLAN
P1 P2 (disable)
Parameters P1: Ring index (1 to 16)
P2: EtherRing control VLAN setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables EtherRing control VLAN
disable: Disables EtherRing control VLAN
When enable is specified in P2
P3: Ring ID (0 to 255)
P4: Control VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification)
P5: MEG level (0 to 7)
P6: Priority (0 to 7)
* When P6 is omitted, 7 is assumed.

Default values P2: disable
P6: 7

Usage
conditions
If the EtherRing function of the specified ring index is not enabled, you cannot execute
this setting
If MEP has already been registered for the ring configuration port number of the
specified ring index, you cannot execute this setting when different values are set for
the VLAN ID specified for the MEP and the control VLAN ID or when the MEP is not
untag MEP.

Notes To modify the setting, disable EtherRing control VLAN once.
Set "1" for Ring ID since only the single ring is supported.
When you register MEP to the specified port number using the same VLAN ID as that
for the control VLAN of EtherRing, set the MEG level of the MEP smaller than that for
the control VLAN of EtherRing.

Input example
*Switch# set ether-ring control-vlan 1 enable 1 4094 7 7
*Switch#

Output item

Related
commands
set ether-ring Setting of EtherRing enable/disable
show ether-ring config Display of EtherRing configuration information
EtherOAM
10-40

General Privilege Save
set ether-ring rpl-owner
Setting of EtherRing RPL port
Sets the RPL port for the EtherRing function.

Input formats - Enabling EtherRing RPL port
P1 P2 (enable) P3
- Disabling EtherRing RPL port
P1 P2 (disable)
Parameters P1: Ring index (1 to 16)
P2: EtherRing RPL port setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables EtherRing RPL port
disable: Disables EtherRing RPL port
When enable is specified in P2
P3: Port number (25 to 26) (single specification)

Default value P2: disable
Usage condition If the EtherRing function of the specified ring index is not enabled, you cannot execute
this setting.

Note To modify the setting, disable EtherRing RPL port once.
Input example
*Switch# set ether-ring rpl-owner 1 enable 25
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ether-ring Setting of EtherRing enable/disable
show ether-ring config Display of EtherRing configuration information


EtherOAM
10-41

General Privilege Save
set ether-ring time
Setting of EtherRing timer
Sets the timer for the EtherRing function.

Input formats - Setting EtherRing recovery standby protection time
P1 P2 (wtr) P3
- Setting EtherRing status change protection time
P1 P2 (guard) P3
Parameters P1: Ring index (1 to 16)
P2: Change timer type { wtr | guard }
wtr: Recovery standby protection time
guard: Status change protection time
When wtr is specified in P2
P3: Time (5 to 12) (min)
When guard is specified in P2
P3: Time (10 to 2000) (msec)
* Setting granularity: 10 (msec)
* If you do not specify a multiple of the setting granularity, this parameter
results in an error.

Default values P3: 5 (min) when P2=wtr
P3: 500 (msec) when P2=guard

Usage
conditions
If the EtherRing function of the specified ring index is not enabled, you cannot execute
this setting.
If you specify the recovery standby protection time, you cannot execute this setting
when RPL port is not enabled.

Note To set the status change protection time, specify a multiple of the setting granularity.
Input examples
*Switch# set ether-ring time 1 wtr 12
*Switch# set ether-ring time 1 guard 2000
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ether-ring Setting of EtherRing enable/disable
set ether-ring rpl-owner Setting of EtherRing RPL port
show ether-ring config Display of EtherRing configuration information

EtherOAM
10-42

General Privilege Save
clear ether-ring loop-detection
Clearing of EtherRing loop detection status
Clears the loop detection status of the EtherRing function.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number (25 to 26) (single specification)
* When P1 is omitted, the loop detection statuses for all ports are cleared.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear ether-ring loop-detection 25
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show ether-ring status Display of EtherRing status information


EtherOAM
10-43

General Privilege Save
show ether-ring config
Display of EtherRing configuration information
Shows the configuration information of the EtherRing function.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Ring index (1 to 16)
* When P1 is omitted, the configuration information on all ring indexes is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show ether-ring config
Ether Ring Configuration
========================
Revertive RPL Guard
Index Port Mode Owner WTR(min) Time(msec)
-----------------------------------------------------------
1 25,26 revertive 25 12 2000

Ether Ring Frame Configuration
==============================
Multicast MAC Address : 01:19:A7:00:00:(RingID)
Protocol Type : 0x8902
===============================================
Index RingID Control VID MEG Level Priority
-----------------------------------------------
1 1 4094 7 7

*Switch#

EtherOAM
10-44

Output items Items to be displayed for Ether Ring Configuration
Index: Ring index
Port: Ring configuration port number
Revertive Mode: Recovery mode
revertive: Automatic recovery
RPL Owner: RPL port number
Port number
---: No RPL port setting
WTR: Recovery standby protection time
5-12: 5-12 (min)
---: No RPL port setting
Guard Time: Status change protection time
10-2000: 10-2000 (msec)

Items to be displayed for Ether Ring Frame Configuration
Multicast MAC Address: Destination multicast MAC address
Protocol Type: Protocol type
Index: Ring index
RingID: Ring ID
Control VID: VLAN ID
MEG Level: MEG level
Priority: Priority

Related
commands
set ether-ring Setting of EtherRing enable/disable
set ether-ring control-vlan Setting of EtherRing control VLAN
set ether-ring rpl-owner Setting of EtherRing RPL port
set ether-ring time Setting of EtherRing timer


EtherOAM
10-45

General Privilege Save
show ether-ring status
Display of EtherRing status information
Shows the status information of the EtherRing function.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Ring index (1 to 16)
* When P1 is omitted, the status information on all ring indexes is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show ether-ring status
Ether Ring Status
=================
Port Node
Index Port Status Status Request
---------------------------------------------------
1 25 rpl-block idle local-nr
26 forward idle local-nr

Ether Ring Port Information
===========================
Loop
Port Detection
---------------
25 ---
26 ---

*Switch#

EtherOAM
10-46

Output items Items to be displayed for Ether Ring Status
Index: Ring index
Port: Ring configuration port number
Port Status: Port status
Node Status: Node status
Request: Status change cause

* For the port status, the node status, and the status change cause, refer to "EtherRing
Function" in the "Instruction Manual".

Items to be displayed for Ether Ring Port Information
Port: Ring configuration port number
Loop Detection: Loop detection status
---: Not detected
defect: Detected

Related
commands
set ether-ring Setting of EtherRing enable/disable
clear ether-ring loop-detection Clearing of EtherRing loop detection status

ATM Control
11-1













11
ATM Control


ATM Control
11-2

General Privilege Save
set pvc static
Registration of PVC
Registers a PVC.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: VPI value/VCI value or VPI value
VPI value/VCI value (Multiple values can be specified only for VCI values.)
VPI value (single specification)

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set pvc static 1 0/32
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
clear pvc static Clearing of PVC
show pvc information Display of PVC setting information


ATM Control
11-3

General Privilege Save
clear pvc static
Clearing of PVC
Clears a PVC.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number [VPI value] | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all the PVCs for the specified port number
are cleared.
* When VPI value is specified or omitted, execution confirmation is shown after
entering the command.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes If a PVC is cleared, all other settings related to the PVC are also cleared.
If the "clear pvc static" command with single specification of PVC identifier is executed
when no PVC is registered, an error occurs. When P1 is omitted, this command
terminates normally.

Input example
*Switch# clear pvc static 1 0/32
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set pvc static Registration of PVC
show pvc information Display of PVC setting information


ATM Control
11-4

General Privilege Save
set pvc name
Registration of PVC name
Registers a PVC name.

Input format P1 P2 P3
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: VPI value/VCI value or VPI value
VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
VPI value (single specification)
P3: PVC name (1 to 32 characters)

Default value None
Usage condition If no PVC is registered, you cannot use this function.
Note When a PVC is cleared, the PVC name is automatically cleared.
Input example
*Switch# set pvc name 1 0/32 pvc32
*Switch#

Output item




Related
commands
set pvc static Registration of PVC
clear pvc static Clearing of PVC
clear pvc name Clearing of PVC name
show pvc information Display of PVC setting information


ATM Control
11-5

General Privilege Save
clear pvc name
Clearing of PVC name
Clears a PVC name.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number [VPI value] | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all the PVC names for the specified port are
cleared.
* When VPI value is specified or omitted, execution confirmation is shown after
entering the command.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note If the "clear pvc name" command with single specification of PVC identifier is executed
when no PVC is registered, an error occurs. When P1 is omitted, this command
terminates normally.

Input example
*Switch# clear pvc name 1 0/32
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set pvc static Registration of PVC
clear pvc static Clearing of PVC
set pvc name Registration of PVC name
show pvc information Display of PVC setting information


ATM Control
11-6

General Privilege Save
set pvc admin
Setting of PVC blocking/unblocking
Sets whether to block or unblock a PVC.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number VPI value | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (Multiple values can be specified only for VCI values.)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
P2: PVC blocking/unblocking setting { enable | disable }
enable: Unblocks PVC
disable: Blocks PVC

Default value P2: enable
Usage condition If no PVC is registered, you cannot use this function.
Note When the PVC is cleared, this function is automatically cleared.
Input example
*Switch# set pvc admin 1 0/32 disable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set pvc static Registration of PVC
clear pvc static Clearing of PVC
set pvc port admin Setting of enbloc PVC blocking/unblocking
show pvc information Display of PVC setting information


ATM Control
11-7

General Privilege Save
set pvc port admin
Setting of enbloc PVC blocking/unblocking
Sets enbloc PVC blocking/unblocking.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: PVC blocking/unblocking setting { enable | disable }
enable: Unblocks PVC
disable: Blocks PVC

Default value P2: enable
Usage condition None
Notes When the PVC is cleared, this function is automatically cleared.
Entering this command applies enbloc PVC blocking/unblocking to all the PVCs
registered in the specified port.

Input example
*Switch# set pvc port admin 1 disable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set pvc static Registration of PVC
clear pvc static Clearing of PVC
set pvc admin Setting of PVC blocking/unblocking
show pvc information Display of PVC setting information


ATM Control
11-8

General Privilege Save
show pvc information
Display of PVC setting information
Shows PVC setting information.

Input format [P1]
Parameters P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number [VPI value] | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (Multiple values can be specified only for VCI values.)
- VPI value (Multiple values can be specified.)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all PVC setting information for the specified
port is shown.
* When port number is omitted, all PVC setting information for the ATM ports of the
entire device is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
ATM Control
11-9

Input example
*Switch# show pvc information
PVC System Connection Count
===========================
Configured Configurable
------------------------
4 252

PVC Port Connection Count
=========================
Port Enabled Disabled Configured
-----------------------------------
1 2 0 2
14 0 1 1
15 1 0 1

PVC Table
=========
Port VPI/VCI Name Admin
---------------------------------------------------------
1 0/32 ab123456789012345678901234567890 enabled
1 1/255 c98765432109876543210987654321ab enabled
14 1/255 disabled
15 100/--- enabled

*Switch#
Output items PVC System Connection Count
Configured: Number of registered PVCs in the entire device
Configurable: Number of remaining registerable PVCs in the entire device
PVC Port Connection Count
Port: Port number
Enabled: Number of unblocked PVCs
Disabled: Number of blocked PVCs
Configured: Number of registered port PVCs
Configurable: Number of remaining registerable port PVCs
PVC Table
Port: Port number
VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value
Name: PVC name
Admin: enabled: Unblocks PVC
disabled: Blocks PVC

Related
commands
set pvc static Registration of PVC
clear pvc static Clearing of PVC
set pvc name Registration of PVC name
clear pvc name Clearing of PVC name
set pvc admin Setting of PVC blocking/unblocking
set pvc port admin Setting of enbloc PVC blocking/unblocking


ATM Control
11-10

General Privilege Save
set atmop mode
Setting of ATMoP mode
Sets ATMoP mode.

Input formats - Specifying c-tag
P1 (c-tag) [P5 (control-word) P6]
- Specifying udp-ip
P1 (udp-ip) P2 [P3 (port-mode) P4] [P5 (control-word) P6]
Parameters P1: Packet format { c-tag | udp-ip }
c-tag: Supports ATM over Ether of VLAN with double tag
udp-ip: Supports ATM over UDP/IP of VLAN with single tag
When udp-ip is specified in P1
P2: Source IP address
P3: Port mode specification { port-mode }
port-mode: Port mode specification
P4: Port mode { source | destination }
source: Source port mode
destination: Destination port mode
* When omitted: source
P5: Control word specification { control-word }
control-word: Control word specification
P6: Control word setting{ enable | disable }
enable: Enable
disable: Disable
* When omitted: disable

Default value P1: c-tag
P4: source
P6: disable

Usage
conditions
If ATMoP format has already been set, an error occurs.
If a path between ATMs has already been set, an error occurs.
If ATM cell concatenation has already been set, an error occurs.
The following IP addresses cannot be used.
IP address of 0.xxx.xxx.xxx, 127.xxx.xxx.xxx, 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx,
192.168.128.0/24, and 192.168.129.0/24.

Note None
Input example
*Switch# set atmop mode c-tag control-word enable
*Switch# set atmop mode udp-ip 1.2.3.4 port-mode destination
*Switch#

ATM Control
11-11
Output item



Related
commands
set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format
clear atmop format Clearing of ATMoP format setting
show atmop format Display of ATMoP format information
set pvc connection Setting of path between ATMs
clear pvc connection Clearing path setting between ATMs
show pvc connection Display of path information between ATMs
set atmop format concatenation Setting of ATM cell concatenation group
clear atmop format concatenation Clearing of ATM cell concatenation group
show atmop format concatenation Display of ATM cell concatenation information


ATM Control
11-12

General Privilege Save
set atmop format
Setting of ATMoP format
Sets ATMoP format.

Input formats - Specifying c-tag for ATMoP mode
P1 [P2] P3 P4 P5 P6 (inner) P7
- Specifying udp-ip for ATMoP mode
P1 [P2] P3 P4 P5 P6 (Destination IP address) P7 [P8]
Parameters P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number VPI value | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
P2: Conversion PVC { VP value/VCI value | VPI value }
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
P3: Destination MAC address
P4: VLAN identifier 1 { outer }
outer: VLAN identifier 1
P5: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification)
VLAN name (1 to 32 characters)
P6: VLAN identifier 2 { inner } or destination IP address
inner: VLAN identifier 2
Destination IP address
When inner is specified in P6
P7: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification)
VLAN name (1 to 32 characters)
When destination IP address is specified in P6
P7: UDP port number (1024 to 65535)
P8: TTL value (1 to 255)
* When omitted: 128


Default value P8: 128

Usage
conditions
If the specified PVC has not been set, you cannot execute this command.
A PVC identifier used for path connection between ATMs cannot be set.
A PVC identifier used for the ATM cell concatenation cannot be set.
If the settings do not match the ATM mode which has already been set, an error occurs.
You cannot specify the broadcast address, multicast address, local address and the
address entirely composed of "0"s.
ATM Control
11-13
The following IP addresses cannot be used.
IP address of 0.xxx.xxx.xxx, 127.xxx.xxx.xxx, 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx,
192.168.128.0/24, and 192.168.129.0/24.
A VLAN ID which has already been registered for TDMoP or the like cannot be set.
This is for VLAN identifier 1.
You can register up to 256 VLANs per device. This is for VLAN identifier 1.
If this function is set, the same combination cannot be set for another port. The
following patterns are available for the combinations of this setting.
- When double tag is specified: combination of the specified PVC and Inner-VLAN
- When UDP/IP and the source UDP port number check is specified: combination of
the specified PVC, destination IP address, and source UDP port number
- When UDP/IP and the destination UDP port number check is specified: combination
of the specified PVC, destination IP address, and destination UDP port number
* The specified PVC means the conversion PVC.
When the conversion PVC is omitted, it means the PVC identifier.
If path connection between ATMs or the ATM cell concatenation function is set, the
same combination values cannot be set. The following patterns are available for the
combination for path connection between ATMs.
- When double tag is specified: combination of PVC1 and Inner-VLAN1, PVC1 and
Inner-VLAN2, PVC2 and Inner-VLAN2, or PVC2 and Inner-VLAN1
- When UDP/IP is specified: combination of
PVC1, source IP address, and UDP port number 1,
PVC1, source IP address, and UDP port number 2,
PVC2, source IP address, and UDP port number 2, or
PVC2, source IP address, and UDP port number 1
* For a VP connection, VPI value is checked for the combination conditions.

Note When the PVC is cleared, this setting is also cleared.
When the ATMoP mode is UDP/IP and the port mode is source, the destination port
number is 2142 and the source port number is the value specified in this command.
When the ATMoP mode is UDP/IP and the port mode is destination, the destination
port number is the value specified in this command and the source port number is
2142.

Input example
*Switch# set atmop format 1 0/32 5/100 00:00:00:00:00:01 outer 200
inner 3000
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode
clear atmop format Clearing of ATMoP format setting
show atmop format Display of ATMoP format information
set pvc connection Setting of path between ATMs
show pvc connection Display of path information between ATMs
set atmop format concatenation member Setting of ATM cell concatenation member


ATM Control
11-14

General Privilege Save
show atmop format
Display of ATMoP format information
Shows the ATMoP format information.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number VPI value | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (Multiple values can be specified only for VCI values.)
- VPI value (Multiple values can be specified.)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all ATMoP format setting information for the
specified port is shown.
* When PVC identifier is omitted, all ATMoP format setting information for the ATMP
ports of the entire device is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show atmop format 10 0/32
ATMoP Table
===========
Source Packet Source Control
MAC Address Format IP Address Port Mode Word
-----------------------------------------------------------------
00:30:13:a1:2a:82 udp-ip 192.168.1.1 destination disabled

ATMoP L2-Header Table
=====================
VPI/VCI VPI/VCI Destination Outer Inner
Port (ATM) (ATMoP) MAC Address VID VID
-----------------------------------------------------------
10 0/32 0/32 00:00:4c:01:02:03 1 ---

ATMoP L3-Header Table
=====================
VPI/VCI Source Destination Destination
Port (ATM) UDP Port IP Address UDP Port TTL
-------------------------------------------------------------
10 0/32 1024 192.168.2.1 60000 128

*Switch#
ATM Control
11-15

Output items ATMoP Table
Source MAC Address: Source MAC address
Packet Format: Allowed packet format
Source IP Address: Source IP address
Port Mode:
source: UDP port mode is source
destination: UDP port mode is destination
Control Word:
enabled: Adds Control Word
disabled: Do not add Control Word
ATMoP L2-Header Table
Port: Port number
VPI/VCI(ATM): VPI/VCI value
VPI/VCI(ATMoP): Conversion VPI/VCI value
Destination MAC Address: Destination MAC address
Outer VID: VLAN identifier 1
Inner VID: VLAN identifier 2
ATMoP L3-Header Table
Port: Port number
VPI/VCI(ATM): VPI/VCI value
Source UDP Port: Source port number
Destination IP Address: Destination IP address
Destination UDP Port: Destination port number
TTL: TTL value

Related
commands
set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode
set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format
clear atmop format Clearing of ATMoP format setting


ATM Control
11-16

General Privilege Save
clear atmop format
Clearing of ATMoP format setting
Clears the ATMoP format setting.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number [VPI value] | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification )
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all the ATMoP format settings for the
specified port number are cleared.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note If this command is executed with single specification when no ATMoP format setting is
registered, an error occurs. When P1 is omitted, this command terminates normally.

Input example
*Switch# clear atmop format 1 0/32
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode
set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format
show atmop format Display of ATMoP format information


ATM Control
11-17

General Privilege Save
set pvc connection
Setting of path between ATMs
Sets a path between ATMs.

Input formats - Specifying c-tag for ATMoP mode
P1 P2 P3 P4 (inner) P5 P6 [P7 P8 P9 (inner) P10]
- Specifying udp-ip for ATMoP mode
P1 P2 P3 P4 (udp-port) P5 P6 [P7 P8 P9 (udp-port) P10]
Parameters P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number VPI value | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
P2: VLAN identifier 1 { outer }
outer: VLAN identifier 1
P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification)
VLAN name (1 to 32 characters)
P4: VLAN identifier 2 { inner } or UDP port number 1 { udp-port }
inner: VLAN identifier 2
udp-port: UDP port number 1
When inner is specified in P4
P5: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification)
VLAN name (1 to 32 characters)
When udp-port is specified in P4
P5: UDP port number 1: 1024 to 65535
P6: PVC identifier 2 { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number VPI value | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
P7: VLAN identifier 3 { outer }
outer: VLAN identifier 3
P8: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification)
VLAN name (1 to 32 characters)
P9: VLAN identifier 4 { inner } or UDP port number 2 { udp-port }
inner: VLAN identifier 4
udp-port: UDP port number 2


ATM Control
11-18
When inner is specified in P9
P10: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification)
VLAN name (1 to 32 characters)
When udp-port is specified in P9
P10: UDP port number 2: 1024 to 65535

Default value None
Usage
conditions
If the specified PVC has not been set, you cannot execute this command.
A PVC identifier already used for the ATMoP format or this function cannot be set.
A PVC identifier already used for the ATM cell concatenation member cannot be set.
If the settings do not match the ATMoP mode which has already been set, an error
occurs.
A VLAN ID which has already been registered for TDMoP or the like cannot be set.
This is for VLAN identifiers 1 and 3.
You can register up to 256 VLANs per device. This is for VLAN identifiers 1 and 3.
The following can be set, depending on conditions. (Note 1)
(1) Same physical port, same PVC
(2) Same physical port, different PVC
(3) Different physical port, same PVC
(4) Different physical port, different PVC
Note 1) The settings are not allowed under the following conditions.
In the double tag mode, only one combination of the following PVC and VLAN ID can
be set.
"PVC identifier 1 (P1) and VLAN identifier 2 (P4)",
"PVC identifier 1 (P1) and VLAN identifier 4 (P9)",
"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and VLAN identifier 2 (P4)", or
"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and VLAN identifier 4 (P9)"
The same combination as that for the ATMoP format or ATM cell concatenation
function cannot be set.
In the UDP/IP mode, only one combination of the following PVC and UDP port number
can be set.
"PVC identifier 1 (P1) and UDP port number 1 (P4)",
"PVC identifier 1 (P1) and UDP port number 4 (P9)",
"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and UDP port number 1 (P4)", or
"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and UDP port number 4 (P9)"
If the above combination with the source IP address specified in the ATMoP mode is
the same as that for the ATMoP format or ATM cell concatenation function, the setting
cannot be configured.
* The PVC identifier in the above combination condition does not include a port
number.
* If PVC identifier 1 and PVC identifier 2 are the same in the above combination
condition, the same combination can be set.
* For a VP connection, VPI value is checked for the above combination conditions.

Note When the PVC is cleared, this setting is also cleared.
Input example
*Switch# set pvc connection 1 0/32 outer 200 inner 3000 5 1/40 outer
400 inner 4000
*Switch#

ATM Control
11-19
Output item



Related
commands
set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode
clear pvc connection Clearing path setting between ATMs
show pvc connection Display of path information between ATMs
set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format
set atmop format concatenation member Setting of ATM cell concatenation member


ATM Control
11-20

General Privilege Save
show pvc connection
Display of path information between ATMs
Shows the information of the path between ATMs.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number VPI value | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (Multiple values can be specified only for VCI values.)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
* When omitted, all path setting information between all ATMs for the ATMP ports of
the entire device is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show pvc connection
ATM Connection Table
====================
Outer Inner UDP Outer Inner UDP
Port VPI/VCI VID VID Port Port VPI/VCI VID VID Port
----------------------------------------------------------------------
4 0/16383 1000 --- 65534 4 4/8191 1001 --- 65535
8 255/255 2000 --- 2142 8 5/40 2001 --- 3072

*Switch#

Output items ATM Connection Table
Port: Port number
VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value
Outer VID: VLAN identifier 1
Inner VID: VLAN identifier 2
UDP Port: UDP port number

Related
commands
set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode
set pvc connection Setting of path between ATMs
clear pvc connection Clearing path setting between ATMs

ATM Control
11-21

General Privilege Save
clear pvc connection
Clearing path setting between ATMs
Clears the path setting between ATMs.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number VPI value | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear pvc connection 1 0/32
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode
set pvc connection Setting of path between ATMs
show pvc connection Display of path information between ATMs


ATM Control
11-22

General Privilege Save
set atmop format concatenation
Setting of ATM cell concatenation group
Sets an ATM cell concatenation group.

Input formats - Specifying c-tag for ATMoP mode
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 [P7] P8 (inner) P9 [P10]
- Specifying udp-ip for ATMoP mode
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 [P7] P8 (destination IP address) P9 [P10] [P11]
Parameters P1: Group number (1 to 16)
P2: Number of ATM cell concatenations (1 to 16)
P3: Timeout value (0 to 25500) * Setting granularity: 100 (sec)
* When a multiple of the setting granularity is not specified, an error occurs.
P4: Destination MAC address
P5:VLAN identifier 1 { outer }
outer: VLAN identifier 1
P6: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
P7: CoS value of the outer tag (0 to 7)
* When P7 is omitted, 5 is assumed.
P8: VLAN identifier 2 { inner } or destination IP address
inner: VLAN identifier 2
Destination IP address
When inner is specified in P8
P9: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
P10: CoS value of the inner tag (0 to 7)
* When P10 is omitted, 5 is assumed.
When destination IP address is specified in P8
P9: UDP port number (1024 to 65535)
P10: TTL value ttl (1 to 255)
* When P10 is omitted, 128 is assumed.
P11: DSCP value dscp (0 to 63)
* When P11 is omitted, 46 is assumed.

Default values P7: 5
P10 (CoS value): 5
P10 (TTL value): 128
P11: 46
ATM Control
11-23
Usage
conditions
If 0 is set for the timeout value, capsulization is performed for one cell.
If you specify a format which is different from that for the ATMoP mode setting, an error
occurs.
You cannot specify the broadcast address, multicast address, local address and the
address entirely composed of "0"s.
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx, 127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the IP address. ("xxx" is any number.) You cannot set the IP addresses which
correspond to the network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24.
You cannot set the same value for the Outer-VLAN identifier as that for the VLAN set
for the TDMoP function.

Notes This f is cleared automatically when the ATM cell concatenation group is cleared.
Reconfiguring a group that has already been set for this function overwrites the existing
setting.
If the ATMoP mode is UDP/IP and the port mode is the source port, the destination port
number is 2142 and the source port number is the value specified in P9.
If the ATMoP mode is UDP/IP and the port mode is the destination port, the destination
port number is the value specified in P9 and the source port number is 2142.

Input example
*Switch# set atmop format concatenation 1 5 300 00:30:13:01:01:01 outer
200 inner 3000
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode
show atmop format concatenation Display of ATM cell concatenation
information
clear atmop format concatenation Clearing of ATM cell concatenation
group
set atmop format concatenation member Setting of ATM cell concatenation
member
clear atmop format concatenation member Clearing of ATM cell concatenation
member


ATM Control
11-24

General Privilege Save
show atmop format concatenation
Display of ATM cell concatenation information
Shows the ATM cell concatenation information.

Input format [P1]
Parameter
P1: Group number (1 to 16)
* When the specification is omitted, information on all the groups is displayed.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show atmop format concatenation
ATMoP Concatenation table
=========================
Number
Group of Cells TimeOut
------------------------
1 16 200
2 16 25500

Concatenation L2-Header Table
=============================
Destination Outer Outer Inner Inner
Group MAC Address VID VID COS VID VID COS
---------------------------------------------------------------
1 00:00:4c:01:02:03 1 5 10 6
2 00:00:4c:01:02:aa 2 5 20 6

Concatenation L3-Header Table
=============================
No entry in the table.

Concatenation Member Table
==========================
VPI/VCI VPI/VCI
Group Port (ATM) (ATMoP)
------------------------------
1 40 0/32 ---
42 1/33 2/44
2 41 10/35 ---

*Switch#
ATM Control
11-25

Output items ATMoP Concatenation Table
Group: Cell concatenation group number
Number of Cells: Number of cells to be capsulized
TimeOut: Time out period
Concatenation L2-Header Table
Group: Cell concatenation group number
Destination MAC Address: Destination MAC address
Outer VID: VLAN identifier 1
Outer VID COS: CoS value of VLAN identifier 1
Inner VID: VLAN identifier 2
Inner VID COS: CoS value of VLAN identifier 2
Concatenation L3-Header Table
Source UDP Port: Source port number
Destination IP Address: Destination IP address
Destination UDP Port: Destination port number
TTL: TTL value
DSCP: DSCP value
Concatenation Member Table
Port: Port number
VPI/VCI(ATM): VPI/VCI value (VC connection) or VPI value (VP connection)
VPI/VCI(ATMoP): Conversion VPI/VCI value (VC connection) or conversion VPI
value (VP connection)

Related
commands
set atmop format concatenation Setting of ATM cell concatenation group
clear atmop format concatenation Clearing of ATM cell concatenation group
set atmop format concatenation member Setting of ATM cell concatenation member
clear atmop format concatenation member Clearing of ATM cell concatenation member


ATM Control
11-26

General Privilege Save
clear atmop format concatenation
Clearing of ATM cell concatenation group
Clears an ATM cell concatenation group.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Group number (1 to 16)

Default value None
Usage condition This function cannot be used when the specified group is not set.
Note If a group is cleared, all ATM cell concatenation members in the group are cleared.
Input example
*Switch# clear atmop format concatenation 1
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set atmop format concatenation Setting of ATM cell concatenation group
show atmop format concatenation Display of ATM cell concatenation
information
set atmop format concatenation member Setting of ATM cell concatenation member


ATM Control
11-27

General Privilege Save
set atmop format concatenation member
Setting of ATM cell concatenation member
Sets an ATM cell concatenation member.

Input format P1 P2 [P3]
Parameters P1: Group number (1 to 16)
P2: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number VPI value | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
P3: Conversion PVC { VPI value/VCI value | VPI value }
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
* When the specification is omitted, the PVC that is set in P2 is set.

Default value None
Usage
conditions
If the specified PVC has not been set, you cannot execute this command.
One specified PVC (Note 1) cannot be set two or more times in a group.
A group number which has not been set for the ATM cell concatenation group cannot
be set.
A PVC identifier set as a member cannot be set for another group.
A PVC identifier used for the ATMoP format setting cannot be set.
A PVC identifier used for connection between ATMs cannot be set.
If the connection type of the PVC identifier does not match that of the conversion PVC
value, an error occurs.
If the connection type of the set PVC does not match that of the specified PVC (Note 1),
an error occurs.
If this function or the ATMoP format is set, the same combination cannot be set for
another port. The following patterns are available for the combinations of this setting.
- When double tag is specified: combination of the specified PVC (Note 1) and Inner-
VLAN
- When UDP/IP and the source UDP port number check are specified: combination of
the specified PVC, destination IP address, and source UDP port number
- When UDP/IP and the destination UDP port number check are specified:
combination of the specified PVC (Note 1), destination IP address, and destination
UDP port number
* The specified PVC means the conversion PVC.
When the conversion PVC is omitted, it means the PVC identifier.




ATM Control
11-28
If path connection between ATMs is set, the same combination values cannot be set.
The following patterns are available for the combination for path connection between
ATMs.
- When double tag is specified: combination of PVC1 and Inner-VLAN1, PVC1 and
Inner-VLAN2, PVC2 and Inner-VLAN2, or PVC2 and Inner-VLAN1
- When UDP/IP is specified: combination of
PVC1, source IP address, and UDP port number 1,
PVC1, source IP address, and UDP port number 2,
PVC2, source IP address, and UDP port number 2, or
PVC2, source IP address, and UDP port number 1
* For a VP connection, VPI value is checked for the combination conditions.
Note 1: The specified PVC means the conversion PVC.
When the conversion PVC is omitted, it means the PVC identifier.

Notes If a PVC value is cleared, only the specified PVC identifier is cleared.
When the ATM cell concatenation group is cleared, this setting is automatically cleared.

Input example
*Switch# set atmop format concatenation member1 0/32
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set pvc connection Setting of path between ATMs
set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format
clear atmop format concatenation member Clearing of ATM cell concatenation
member
set atmop format concatenation Setting of ATM cell concatenation group
show atmop format concatenation Display of ATM cell concatenation
information


ATM Control
11-29

General Privilege Save
clear atmop format concatenation member
Clearing of ATM cell concatenation member
Clears an ATM cell concatenation member.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Group number (1 to 16)
P2: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number VPI value | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (Multiple values can be specified only for VCI values.)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)

Default value None
Usage condition This function cannot be used when the specified group is not set.
Note When the VPI value is omitted in P2, execution is confirmed after this command is
entered.

Input example
*Switch# clear atmop format concatenation member 1 0/32
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set atmop format concatenation member Setting of ATM cell concatenation member
show atmop format concatenation Display of ATM cell concatenation
information



















(blank page)

ATM-QoS
12-1













12
ATM-QoS


ATM-QoS
12-2

General Privilege Save
set atm-shaper rate
Setting of ATM shaper
Sets the ATM shaper.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Bandwidth setting value (Kbps)
E1: 64 to 2048 * When IMA is set: 64 to 16256
T1: 64 to 1536 * When IMA is set: 64 to 12224
* The setting granularity for E1 and T1: 64 (Kbps)
STM-1: 500 to149500
* The setting granularity for STM-1: 500 (Kbps)
* When a multiple of the setting granularity is not specified, an error occurs.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes If the line card type is 32T1E1H, this function can be use only when the port mode is
atmop.
Only the root port can be set for an IMA group.
The upper limit that can be set for P2 (shaper bandwidth) depends on the following
conditions.
- Line card type (1ATM155A/32T1E1H)
- Frame type (e1/t1)
- Frame format (crc4/crc4nocas/non-crc4/unframed)
- Number of ports which belong to the IMA group
- IMA frame length (32/64/128/256)

Input example
*Switch# set atm-shaper rate 3 128
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set port mode Setting of port mode
set port frame Setting of port frame
set ima group Setting of IMA group
clear ima group Clearing of IMA group
show atm-shaper rate Display of ATM shaper
clear atm-shaper rate Clearing of ATM shaper

ATM-QoS
12-3

General Privilege Save
show atm-shaper rate
Display of ATM shaper
Shows an ATM shaper.

Input format show atm-shaper rate
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note Only the root port is displayed for an IMA group.

ATM-QoS
12-4

Input examples When IMA group is not set;
*Switch# show atm-shaper rate
ATM Shaper Table (Kbps)
=======================
Port Rate
------------
1 128
2 ---
3 ---
4 64
5 128
6 64
7 ---
8 128
9 64
10 1536
11 ---
12 ---
13 ---
14 ---
15 ---
16 ---

*Switch#

When IMA group (port 1 to 8: root port 1) is set;
*Switch# show atm-shaper rate
ATM Shaper Table (Kbps)
=======================
Port Rate
------------
1 12224
9 128
10 1536
11 ---
12 ---
13 ---
14 ---
15 ---
16 ---

*Switch#

Output items Port: Port number
Rate: Value set for shaper bandwidth

Related
commands
set ima group Setting of IMA group
set atm-shaper rate Setting of ATM shaper
clear atm-shaper rate Clearing of ATM shaper


ATM-QoS
12-5

General Privilege Save
clear atm-shaper rate
Clearing of ATM shaper
Clears an ATM shaper.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
* When P1 is omitted, all shaper settings are cleared.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note When a port number is omitted in P1, execution is confirmed after this command is
entered.

Input example
*Switch# clear atm-shaper rate 3
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set atm-shaper rate Setting of ATM shaper
show atm-shaper rate Display of ATM shaper


ATM-QoS
12-6

General Privilege Save
set atmop out-port strict-priority
Setting of Strict Priority mapping
Sets Strict Priority mapping.

Input formats - Setting default value
P1 P2 (default)
- Setting priority
P1 P2 (class-a x) [P3] [P4] [P5]
P1 P3 (class-b x) [P4] [P5]
P1 P4 (class-c x) [P5]
P1 P5 (class-d x)
Parameters P1: Packet format { c-tag | udp-ip }
c-tag: Specifying CoS value in c-tag
udp-ip: Specifying DSCP value in UDP/IP header
P2: Default value setting { default } or Priority value of class A
Default value setting: default
Priority value of class A
When c-tag is specified: class-a (0 to 7) (Multiple values can be specified.)
When udp-ip is specified: class-a (0 to 63) (Multiple values can be specified.)
When Priority value of class A is specified in P2
P3: Priority value of class B
When c-tag is specified: class-b (0 to 7) (Multiple values can be specified.)
When udp-ip is specified: class-b (0 to 63) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P4: Priority value of class C
When c-tag is specified: class-c (0 to 7) (Multiple values can be specified.)
When udp-ip is specified: class-c (0 to 63) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P5: Priority value of class D
When c-tag is specified: class-d (0 to7) (Multiple values can be specified.)
When udp-ip is specified: class-d (0 to 63) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* Only the classes of the Priority value specified in P2 to P5 are changed. (Partial
change)

Default value P2: default
Usage condition None
ATM-QoS
12-7
Notes In the default setting or when default is specified in P2, the following setting is
configured.
c-tag class-a 6,7
class-b 4,5
class-c 0,3
class-d 1,2
udp-ip class-a 48-63
class-b 32-47
class-c 16-31
class-d 0-15
The setting values of this command are valid only for the packet format (c-tag/udp-ip)
specified in the "set atmop mode" command.

Input examples
*Switch# set atmop out-port strict-priority c-tag default
*Switch# set atmop out-port strict-priority c-tag class-a 0,7 class-b
1-4 class-c 6 class-d 5
*Switch# set atmop out-port strict-priority udp-ip class-c 32-62
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode
show atmop out-port strict-priority Display of Strict Priority mapping


ATM-QoS
12-8

General Privilege Save
show atmop out-port strict-priority
Display of Strict Priority mapping
Shows the setting value of Strict Priority mapping.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show atmop out-port strict-priority
Output Strict Priority Mapping Table (c-tag)
============================================
Class CoS
--------------------
class-a 2,5
class-b 0,3
class-c 7
class-d 1,4,6

Output Strict Priority Mapping Table (udp-ip)
=============================================
Class DSCP
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
class-a 2,5,8,11,14,17,20,23,26,29,32,35
class-b 0-1,3-4,6-7,9-10,12-13,15-16,18-19,21-22,24-25,27-28,30-31,
33-34,36-37, 39-40,42-43,45-46,48-49,51-52,54-55,57-58,
60-61,63
class-c none
class-d 38,41,44,47,50,53,56,59,62

*Switch#

Output items Class: Class to which CoS value/DSCP value is assigned
CoS: CoS value in c-tag
DSCP: DSCP value in UDP/IP header

Related
command
set atmop out-port strict-priority Setting of Strict Priority mapping
ATM-QoS
12-9

General Privilege Save
set atmop out-port clp mode
Setting of Egress CLP conversion mode
Sets the Egress CLP conversion mode.

Input formats - Mode setting (Transparent/Priority-specific CLP specification)
P1 P2 (transparent | priority)
- Mode setting (fixed value overwrite mode)
P1 P2 (fix) P3
Parameters P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number VPI value | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (Multiple values can be specified only for VCI values.)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
P2: Mode setting { transparent | fix | priority }
transparent: Transparent mode
fix: Fixed value overwrite mode
priority: Priority-specific CLP specification mode
When fix is specified in P2
P3: CLP value (0 or 1)

Default value P2: transparent
Usage condition If no PVC is registered, you cannot use this function.
Note When a PVC is cleared, this setting is also cleared.
Input example
*Switch# set atmop out-port clp mode 1 0/32 fix 1
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set pvc static Registration of PVC
set atmop out-port clp priority Setting of Egress CLP conversion priority
show atmop out-port clp Display of Egress CLP conversion setting status


ATM-QoS
12-10

General Privilege Save
set atmop out-port clp priority
Setting of Egress CLP conversion priority
Sets the Egress CLP conversion priority.

Input format P1 P2 P3
Parameters P1: Packet format { c-tag | udp-ip }
c-tag: Specifying CoS value in c-tag
udp-ip: Specifying DSCP value in UDP/IP header
P2: Priority value (0 to 63) (Multiple values can be specified.)
When c-tag is specified: 0 to 7
When udp-ip is specified: 0 to 63
P3: CLP value (0 or 1)

Default value P3: 0
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set atmop out-port clp priority c-tag 2 1
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show atmop out-port clp Display of Egress CLP conversion setting status
set atmop out-port clp mode Setting of Egress CLP conversion mode


ATM-QoS
12-11

General Privilege Save
show atmop out-port clp
Display of Egress CLP conversion setting status
Shows the Egress CLP conversion setting status.

Input formats - Priority information display
[P1 (priority)]
- Mode information display
[P1 (mode) [P2]]
Parameters P1: Display type { priority | mode }
priority: Priority information display
mode: Mode information display
When mode is specified in P1
P2: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number VPI value |
PVC name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (Multiple values can be specified only for VCI values.)
- VPI value (Multiple values can be specified.)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
* When specification of the VPI value or VPI value/VCI value is omitted, the
information on all the modes that are set in the specified port number is
displayed.
* When specification of the VPC identifier is omitted, the information on all
the modes that are set for the unit is displayed.
* When specification of all the parameters is omitted, the information on all the
priorities and the information on all the modes that are set for the unit are displayed.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
ATM-QoS
12-12

Input example
*Switch# show atmop out-port clp
Output CLP Mapping Table on Priority Mode (c-tag)
=================================================
CLP CoS
----------------
0 0-7
1 none

Output CLP Mapping Table on Priority Mode (udp-ip)
==================================================
CLP DSCP
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
0 2,5,8,11,14,17,20,23,26,29,32,35,38,41,43,44,47,50,53,56,59,62
1 0-1,3-4,6-7,9-10,12-13,15-16,18-19,21-22,24-25,27-28,30-31,33-
34,36-37,39-40,42,45-46,48-49,51-52,54-55,57-58,60-61,63

Output CLP Conversion Table
===========================
Port VPI/VCI Mode CLP
-------------------------------
1 1/33 transparent ---
2 0/32 fix 0
4 0/255 fix 1
4 1/16383 priority ---
5 10/4095 priority ---
6 100/--- priority ---
11 100/255 priority ---

*Switch#

Output items Output CLP Mapping Table on Priority Mode (c-tag)
CLP: CLP value
CoS: CoS value

Output CLP Mapping Table on Priority Mode (udp-ip)
CLP: CLP value
DSCP: DSCP value

Output CLP Conversion Table
Port: Port number
VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value
Mode: CLP conversion mode
CLP: CLP value in fixed value mode

Related
commands
set atmop out-port clp mode Setting of Egress CLP conversion mode
set atmop out-port clp priority Setting of Egress CLP conversion priority


ATM-QoS
12-13

General Privilege Save
set atmop in-port priority
Setting of CLP-PW Priority mapping
Sets the CoS value of the VLAN tag and the DSCP value of the IP header, based on the CLP value of an
ATM cell when the ATM cell is encapsulated into an Ethernet frame.
The values are set on a per-PVC basis. When the hop count of the VLAN tag is 2, the values can be set
for each tag and for each CLP.

Input formats - CLP0, CLP1 specification
P1 P2 (clp0) [P3] [P4] [P5] [P6 P7 [P8] [P9]]
* At least one of P3 to P5 must be specified.
* When P6 is specified, at least one of P7 to P9 must be specified.
- CLP1 specification
P1 P2 (clp1) [P3] [P4] [P5]
* At least one of P3 to P5 must be specified.
- Default value specification
P1 P2 (initial)
Parameters P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number VPI value | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (Multiple values can be specified only for VCI values.)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
P2: CLP { clp0 | clp1 } or default value specification { initial }
clp0: CLP0
clp1: CLP1
initial: Default value specification
When clp0 is specified in P2
P3: Outer tag mapping CoS value outer (0 to 7)
P4: Inner tag mapping CoS value inner (0 to 7)
P5: IP header DSCP value dscp (0 to 63)
P6: CLP1 specification { clp1 }
clp1: CLP1
P7: Outer tag mapping CoS value outer (0 to 7)
P8: Inner tag mapping CoS value inner (0 to 7)
P9: IP header DSCP value dscp (0 to 63)

When clp1 is specified in P2
P3: Outer tag mapping CoS value outer (0 to 7)
P4: Inner tag mapping CoS value inner (0 to 7)
P5: IP header DSCP value dscp (0 to 63)

Default values P3, P4, P7, P8: 5
P5, P9: 46

ATM-QoS
12-14
Usage condition If no PVC is registered, you cannot execute this command.
Notes The setting is cleared when the PVC is cleared.
If a value is omitted (excluding initial specification) when this command is executed, the
previous value is retained.
When initial is specified, the default value is set.

Input examples
*Switch# set atmop in-port priority 3 0/32 clp0 outer 7 inner 5 dscp 12
clp1 outer 2 inner 0 dscp 24
*Switch# set atmop in-port priority 3 0/32 clp0 outer 7 dscp 24 clp1
outer 2 dscp 12
*Switch# set atmop in-port priority 3 0/32 clp0 inner 5 clp1 outer 2
*Switch# set atmop in-port priority 3 0/32 clp0 dscp 30 clp1 outer 2
*Switch# set atmop in-port priority 3 0/32 clp0 outer 7 inner 5
*Switch# set atmop in-port priority 3 0/32 clp0 outer 7 dscp 40
*Switch# set atmop in-port priority 3 0/32 clp1 inner 0
*Switch# set atmop in-port priority 3 0/32 clp1 dscp 0
*Switch# set atmop in-port priority initial
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set pvc static Registration of PVC
clear pvc static Clearing of PVC
set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode
set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format
show atmop in-port priority Display of CLP-PW Priority mapping setting status


ATM-QoS
12-15

General Privilege Save
show atmop in-port priority
Display of CLP-PW Priority mapping setting status
Shows the setting status of the CLP-PW Priority mapping per PVC.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number [VPI value] | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (Multiple values can be specified only for VCI values.)
- VPI value (Multiple values can be specified.)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
* When VCI value is omitted, all the priority values set in the specified VPI value are
shown.
* When VPI value is omitted, all the priority values set in the specified port number
are shown.
* When port number is omitted, all the priority values set in the equipment are
shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show atmop in-port priority 5
ATMoP Input CLP Priority Mapping Table (c-tag/udp-ip)
=====================================================
CLP=0 CLP=1
Port VPI/VCI Outer-tag Inner-tag DSCP Outer-tag Inner-tag DSCP
----------------------------------------------------------------------
5 2/62 1 7 46 7 7 46
5 2/63 1 7 46 7 7 46
5 2/64 1 5 50 7 7 46
5 2/65 1 5 40 7 5 30
5 2/66 1 7 5 7 7 46

*Switch#

Output items ATMoP Input CLP Priority Mapping Table (c-tag/udp-ip)
Port: Port number
VPI/VCI: VPI value/VCI value
Outer-tag: CoS value of the Outer tag
Inner-tag: CoS value of the Inner tag
DSCP: DSCP value in IP header

ATM-QoS
12-16
Related
commands
set atmop in-port priority Setting of CLP-PW Priority mapping


ATM-OAM
13-1













13
ATM-OAM


ATM-OAM
13-2

General Privilege Save
set atm-oam
Setting of ATM-OAM operation
Sets the OAM operation of an ATM transmission path.

Input formats - F4 level specification
P1 (f4) P2 P3 (disable)
P1 (f4) P2 P3 (enable) [P4]
- F5 level specification
P1 (f5) P2 P3
Parameters P1: ATM-OAM alarm level setting { f4 | f5 }
f4: F4 level specification
f5: F5 level specification
When f4 is specified in P1
P2: PVC identifier { port number VPI value | PVC name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value (Multiple values can be specified.)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
P3: ATM-OAM alarm level operation setting { enable | disable }
enable: VP-RDI transfer and trap notification available when VP-AIS is
received
Trap notification available when VP-AIS and VP-RDI is received
disable: VP-AIS and VP-RDI discarded
When enable is specified in P3
P4: F4 to F5 transfer setting { f5-generate }
f5-generate: Transfers VC-AIS and VC-RDI to the subordinate VC
when VP-AIS is received
* When P4 is omitted, VC-AIS and VC-RDI are not transferred to
the subordinate VC.
When f5 is specified in P1
P2: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | PVC name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (Multiple values can be specified only for VCI values.)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
P3: ATM-OAM alarm level operation setting { enable | disable }
enable: VC-AIS and VC-RDI transfer and trap notification available when
VC-AIS is received
Trap notification available when VP-AIS and VCRDI are received
disable: VC-AIS and VC-RDI discarded

Default values P3: enable
P4: disable

ATM-OAM
13-3
Usage
conditions
If no PVC is registered, you cannot set this function.
If a VP connection has already been registered for the VPI value/PVC name specified
in P2 and f5-generate is specified in P4 when f4 is specified in P1, an error occurs.
If a VP connection has already been registered for the VPI value/PVC name specified
in P2 when f5 is specified in P1, an error occurs.

Note The setting is automatically cleared when the PVC is cleared.
Input examples
*Switch# set atm-oam f4 1 0 enable
*Switch# set atm-oam f4 1 1 enable f5-generate
*Switch# set atm-oam f4 1 20 disable
*Switch# set atm-oam f5 1 0/32 enable
*Switch# set atm-oam f5 1 20/10000 disable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set atm-oam flow Setting of ATM-OAM flow point
show atm-oam config Display of ATM-OAM setting information
show atm-oam status Display of ATM-OAM status information


ATM-OAM
13-4

General Privilege Save
set atm-oam flow
Setting of ATM-OAM flow point
Sets the OAM flow point of an ATM transmission path.

Input formats - F4 level specification
P1 (f4) P2 P3 P4
- F5 level specification
P1 (f5) P2 P3 P4
Parameters P1: ATM-OAM alarm level setting { f4 | f5 }
f4: F4 level specification
f5: F5 level specification
When f4 is specified in P1
P2: PVC identifier { port number VPI value | PVC name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value (Multiple values can be specified.)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
When f5 is specified in P1
P2: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | PVC name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (Multiple values can be specified only for VCI values.)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
P3: Flow type setting { end-end | segment }
end-end: End to End flow
segment: Segment flow
P4: Flow point setting { end-point | connecting-point | none }
end-point: End point
connecting-point: Connecting point
none: No setting

Default values P4: none
The default values for the flow types to which none cannot be set are as follows.
- F4 End to End flow of a VC connection: end-point
- F4 End to End flow of a VP connection: connecting-point
- F5 End to End flow of a VC connection: connecting-point

Usage condition If a VP connection or PVC has not been registered for the VPI value/PVC name
specified in P2 when f4 is specified in P1, this function cannot be set.
If a PVC has not been registered for the VPI value/PVC name specified in P2 when f5
is specified in P1, this function cannot be set.
You cannot set the ATM-OAM flow point for a PVC for which ATM loopback monitoring
is set.
* Refer to the "set loopback atm keepalive" command for ATM loopback monitoring
setting.

ATM-OAM
13-5
Note The setting is automatically cleared when the PVC is cleared.
Input examples
*Switch# set atm-oam flow f4 8 0 end-end end-point
*Switch# set atm-oam flow f4 8 1 segment none
*Switch# set atm-oam flow f5 8 0/32 end-end connecting-point
*Switch# set atm-oam flow f5 8 1/100 segment end-point
*Switch# set atm-oam flow f5 8 20/10000 segment none
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show atm-oam Setting of ATM-OAM operation
show atm-oam config Display of ATM-OAM setting information
show atm-oam status Display of ATM-OAM status information


ATM-OAM
13-6

General Privilege Save
show atm-oam config
Display of ATM-OAM setting information
Shows the setting information of the specified VPI or VPI/VCI of the specified port.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number [VPI value] | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
-PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
* When port number is omitted, the setting information of all VPIs/VCIs in the device
is shown.
* When VPI value is omitted, the setting information of all VPIs/VCIs registered for
the specified port number is shown.
* When VCI value is omitted, the setting information of all VCIs registered for the
specified port number and VPI is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
ATM-OAM
13-7

Input example
*Switch# show atm-oam config 1
ATM OAM Configuration Table
===========================
OAM Configuration (F4)
==============
Port VPI Configuration Option Segment End-End
----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 enabled f5-generation end-point end-point
1 1 enabled none connecting-point connecting-point
1 2 enabled none end-point connecting-point
1 20 disabled --- --- ---
1 30 disabled --- --- ---
1 255 enabled f5-generation end-point end-point

OAM Configuration (F5)
==============
Port VPI/VCI Configuration Segment End-End
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0/32 enabled none connecting-point
1 0/100 enabled end-point connecting-point
1 0/1000 enabled connecting-point connecting-point
1 0/10000 disabled --- ---
1 20/32 disabled --- ---
1 20/100 disabled --- ---
1 20/1000 disabled --- ---
1 255/32 enabled end-point connecting-point
1 255/100 enabled connecting-point connecting-point

*Switch#

ATM-OAM
13-8

Output items OAM Configuration (F4)
Port: Port number
VPI: Virtual path number
Configuration: Configuration
enabled:
VP-AIS and VP-RDI detection enabled
Trap notified when VP-AIS or VP-RDI is detected
VP-RDI transferred when VP-AIS is detected
disabled:
VP-AIS and VP-RDI detection disabled
Option: Expansion setting
f5-generation: VP-RDI and VC-RDI transferred when VP-AIS is detected
none: Not specified
--- : When ATM-OAM operation setting is disabled
Segment: Flow point of Segment flow
end-point: End point
connecting-point: Connecting point
End-End: Flow point of End to End flow
end-point: End point
connecting-point: Connecting point

OAM Configuration (F5)
Port: Port number
VPI/VCI: Virtual path number/virtual channel number
Configuration:
enabled:
VC-AIS and VC-RDI detection enabled
Trap notified when VC-AIS or VC-RDI is detected
VC-RDI transferred when VC-AIS is detected
disabled:
VC-AIS and VC-RDI detection disabled
Segment: Flow point of Segment flow
end-point: End point
connecting-point: Connecting point
End-End: Flow point of End to End flow
end-point: End point
connecting-point: Connecting point

Related
commands
set atm-oam Setting of ATM-OAM operation
set atm-oam flow Setting of ATM-OAM flow point
show atm-oam status Display of ATM-OAM status information

ATM-OAM
13-9

General Privilege Save
show atm-oam status
Display of ATM-OAM status information
Shows ATM-OAM status information.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number [VPI value] | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
* When port number is omitted, the status information of all VPIs/VCIs in the device
is shown.
* When VPI value is omitted, the status information of all VPIs/VCIs registered for
the specified port number is shown.
* When VCI value is omitted, the status information of all VCIs registered for the
specified port number and VPI is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
ATM-OAM
13-10

Input example
*Switch# show atm-oam status 1
ATM OAM Status Table
====================
OAM Status(F4 Detect/Generate)
==============================
Detect Generate(gen)
----------------------------- -------------------------------
Segment End-End Segment End-End
-------------- ------------- -------------- ---------------
Port VPI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 detect --- --- --- --- gen --- ---
1 1 --- --- --- --- gen --- gen ---
1 2 --- detect --- --- --- gen gen ---
1 20 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
1 30 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
1 255 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
OAM Status(F5 Detect/Generate)
==============================
Detect Generate(gen)
----------------------------- ----------------------------
Segment End-End Segment End-End
-------------- -------------- ------------- -------------
Port VPI/VCI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0/32 --- --- --- --- --- --- gen ---
1 0/100 --- detect --- --- gen gen gen ---
1 0/1000 --- --- --- --- gen --- gen ---
1 0/10000 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
1 20/32 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
1 20/100 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
1 20/1000 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
1 255/32 detect --- --- --- --- gen gen ---
1 255/100 --- --- --- --- gen --- gen ---

*Switch#

ATM-OAM
13-11

Output items OAM Status(F4 Detect/Generate)
Port: Port (line) number
VPI: Virtual path number
Detect VP-AIS:
detect: VP-AIS detected
---: VP-AIS not detected
Detect VP-RDI:
detect: VP-RDI detected
---: VP-RDI not detected
Generate VP-AIS:
generate: VP-AIS generated
---: VP-AIS not generated
Generate VP-RDI:
generate: VP-RDI generated
---: VP-RDI not generated

OAM Status(F5 Detect/Generate)
Port: Port (line) number
VPI/VCI: Virtual path number/virtual channel number
Detect VC-AIS:
detect: VC-AIS detected
---: VC-AIS not detected
Detect VC-RDI:
detect: VC-AIS detected
---: VC-AIS not detected
Generate VC-RDI:
generate: VC-RDI generated
---: VC-RDI not generated
Generate VC-AIS:
generate: VC-AIS generated
---: VC-AIS not generated

Related
commands
set atm-oam Setting of ATM-OAM operation
set atm-oam flow Setting of ATM-OAM flow point
show atm-oam config Display of ATM-OAM setting information



















(blank page)

ATM-IMA
14-1













14
ATM-IMA


ATM-IMA
14-2

General Privilege Save
set ima group
Setting of IMA group
Sets an IMA group.

Input format P1 P2 P3 [P4] [P5] [P6] [P7]
Parameters P1: IMA group index (1 to 8) (single specification)
P2: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P3: IMA ID id 0 to 7
* Specify a unique value.
P4: Number of minimum required links links 1 to 8
* When omitted: 1
* This value cannot exceed the total number of the ports (lines) specified in P2.
P5: IMA frame length len { 32 | 64 | 128 | 256 }
len 32: 32 Cell
len 64: 64 Cell
len 128: 128 Cell
len 256: 256 Cell
* When omitted: 128
P6: Link differential delay
E1 line: delay 25 to 226 (msec)
T1 line: delay 25 to 282 (msec)
* When omitted: 25
P7: Root port number (single specification) root port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48)
* When the specification is omitted, the lowest port number is set from the port
numbers that are specified in P2.
* A number which is not included in the P2-specified port (line) cannot be specified.

Default values P4: 1
P5: 128
P6: 25 (msec)
P7: The port with the smallest number in the port numbers specified in P2

Usage condition When the following is set, IMA groups cannot be set.
set atm-shaper rate
If T1 is set for the frame type and unframed is set for the frame format in the port frame
setting, IMA groups cannot be set.

Notes A port (line) over multiple IMA groups cannot be registered doubly.
Up to four IMA groups can be registered each for ports 1-8 and ports 9-16.
When P1 has been already set, the registered information will be edited (overwritten).
Specification mixed with ports 1-8 and ports 9-16 for P2 is not allowed.
When PVC is not set for root port, the communication is unavailable.

ATM-IMA
14-3
Input examples
*Switch# set ima group 1 1-3 id 1
*Switch# set ima group 2 4-8 id 1 links 1 len 25 root 4
*Switch# set ima group 2 4-8 id 2 links 5 root 5
*Switch# set ima group 8 9-10,12-13,15-16 id 3 links 6 len 256 delay
282 root 10
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show ima group config Display of IMA group setting information
show ima group status Display of IMA group status information
clear ima group Clearing of IMA group
set ima clock Setting of IMA clock mode
show ima clock Display of IMA clock mode setting information
set atm-shaper rate Setting of ATM shaper


ATM-IMA
14-4

General Privilege Save
show ima group config
Display of IMA group setting information
Shows IMA group setting information.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: IMA group index (1 to 8) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P1 is omitted, IMA group setting information on all IMA groups is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show ima group config
IMA Group Configuration Table
=============================
Min-Req- Frame- Link-Diff- Root-
Index Ports ID Links Length Delay(ms) Port
----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1,3-6 1 4 128 123 1
2 11,14 2 1 32 25 11
8 9-10,12-13,15-16 3 2 256 282 9

*Switch#

Output items Index: IMA index group index
Ports: Port number
ID: IMA ID
Min-Req-Links: Number of minimum required links
Frame-Length: IMA frame length
Link-Diff-Delay(ms): Link differential delay
Root-Port: Root port number

Related
commands
set ima group Setting of IMA group
clear ima group Clearing of IMA group
show ima group status Display of IMA group status information


ATM-IMA
14-5

General Privilege Save
show ima group status
Display of IMA group status information
Shows IMA group status information.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: IMA group index (1 to 8) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When P1 is omitted, IMA group status information on all IMA groups is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input examples
When IMA group index is omitted or multiple IMAA group indexes are specified;
*Switch# show ima group status
IMA Group Status Table
======================
Index ID GSM-State(NE) GSM-State(FE) Failure-State
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1 operational operational no-failure
3 2 --- --- ---
6 4 startup --- no-failure
7 5 startup --- no-failure
8 7 insufficient-links insufficient-links insufficient-links-ne

*Switch#

When single IMA group index is specified;
*Switch# show ima group status 2
IMA Group Status Table
======================
Index ID GSM-State(NE) GSM-State(FE) Failure-State
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2 1 operational operational no-failure

IMA Link Status Table
=====================
Port LID TxState(NE) RxState(NE) TxState(FE) RxState(FE) Failure-State
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 1 misconnect misconnect misconnect misconnect misconnect
4 3 active active active active no-failure
6 5 active active active active no-failure

*Switch#

ATM-IMA
14-6

Output items Index: IMA group index
ID: IMA ID
GSM-State(NE): IMA group status
---: Line unconnected
not-configured: IMA group unregistered
startup: Waiting for associated IMA activation
startup-ack: Waiting for transition to next status
unsupported-length: Associated IMA mismatch (unsupported frame length)
incompatible-symmetry: Associated IMA mismatch (incompatible symmetry)
unsupported-version: Associated IMA mismatch (unsupported IMA version)
other: Associated IMA mismatch (others)
insufficient-links: Insufficient number of links
blocked: IMA group blocked status
operational: Operation status
GSM-State(FE): Associated IMA group status
* Same as GSM-State(NE) above
Failure-State: IMA group failure status
---: Line unconnected
no-failure: No failure information
startup-ne: Waiting for transition to next status
startup-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)
invalid-length-ne: Unsupported frame length
invalid-length-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)
failed-asymmetric-ne: Incompatible symmetry
failed-asymmetric-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)
invalid-version-ne: Unsupported IMA version
invalid-version-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)
other-failure: Other failure
insufficient-links-ne: Insufficient links
insufficient-links-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)
blocked-ne: Group blocked
blocked-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)
Port: Port number
LID: Link ID
TxState(NE): IMA Tx link status
---: Line unconnected
not-group: IMA group unregistered
fault: Failure (user individual)
misconnect: Failure (misconnect)
inhibited: Failure (blocked status)
failed: Failure (LCD, LIF, LODS, etc.)
no-given: Failure (others)
usable: Waiting for transition to next status
active: Link up
RxState(NE): IMA Rx link status
* Same as TxState(NE) above
TxState(FE):
* Same as TxState(NE) above
ATM-IMA
14-7
RxState(FE):
* Same as TxState(NE) above
Failure-State:
---: Line unconnected
no-failure: No failure information
failure: Failure (others)
LIF-failure: Failure (LIF)
LODS-failure: Failure (LODS)
misconnect: Failure (misconnect)
blocked: Failure (blocked status)
fault: Failure (user individual)
tx-unusable: Waiting for transition to next Tx status
rx-unusable: Waiting for transition to next Rx status

Related
commands
set ima group Setting of IMA group
clear ima group Clearing of IMA group
show ima group config Display of IMA group setting information


ATM-IMA
14-8

General Privilege Save
clear ima group
Clearing of IMA group
Clears an IMA group.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: IMA group index (1 to 8) (single specification)

Default value None
Usage condition When the following is set, an error occurs.
set atm-shaper rate

Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear ima group 8
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ima group Setting of IMA group
show ima group config Display of IMA group setting information
show ima group status Display of IMA group status information
set atm-shaper rate Setting of ATM shaper


ATM-IMA
14-9

General Privilege Save
set ima clock
Setting of IMA clock mode
Sets the IMA clock mode.

Input format P1
Parameters P1: Transmit clock mode { ctc | itc }
ctc: Common Transmit Clock mode
itc: Independent Transmit Clock mode

Default value P1: ctc
Usage condition None
Note If any IMA group is already set, corresponding IMA group is reconfigured automatically.
In that case, the communication will be suspended until the reconfiguration is
completed (operational state).

Input example
*Switch# set ima clock itc
*Switch#
Output item



Related
commands
set ima group Setting of IMA group
show ima clock Display of IMA clock mode setting information


ATM-IMA
14-10

General Privilege Save
show ima clock
Display of IMA clock mode setting information
Shows IMA clock mode setting information.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show ima clock
Transmit Clock Mode Information
===============================
Mode : itc

*Switch#

Output items Mode: Transmit clock mode
ctc: Common Transmit Clock mode
itc: Independent Transmit Clock mode

Related
command
set ima clock Setting of IMA clock mode


TDM-Path
15-1













15
TDM-Path


TDM-Path
15-2

General Privilege Save
set tdm group
Setting of TDM group
Sets a TDM group.

Input format P1 P2 P3 P4
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Frame type { e1 | t1 }
e1: Specification for E1 mode
t1: Specification for T1 mode
P3: Group number (single specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
P4: Time slot number (Multiple values can be specified.)
E1 mode: 1 to 31
T1 mode: 1 to 24

Default value None
Usage
conditions
A TDM group can be set only to a port (line) to which the TDM mode is set in the line
mode setting.
Time slot numbers and group numbers already set to a group within the same port
(line) cannot be used.
When the frame format is set to unframed, an error occurs.

Note None
Input examples
*Switch# set tdm group 1 e1 1 1
*Switch# set tdm group 16 e1 1 1-31
*Switch# set tdm group 12 t1 24 1-24
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set port frame Setting of port frame
set port mode Setting of port mode
set tdm path Setting of TDM path
show tdm group Display of TDM group setting information
clear tdm group Clearing of TDM group


TDM-Path
15-3

General Privilege Save
show tdm group
Display of TDM group setting information
Shows TDM group setting information.

Input format [P1 [ P2 ]]
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Group number (Multiple values can be specified.)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
* When P2 is omitted, TDM group setting information on all TDM groups set for the
port (line) specified in P1 is shown.
* When all parameters are omitted, TDM group setting information on all ports (lines)
set to the TDM mode is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes None

Input examples
*Switch# show tdm group
TDM Group Registration Table
============================
Port Group Time Slot Type
---------------------------------
1 1 1-31 e1
2 1 1-31 e1
3 32 1-31 e1
4 23 1-12 e1
5 2 1-10 e1
6 6 12-16 e1

*Switch#

Output items Port: Port number
Group: Group number
Time Slot: Time slot number
Type: Frame type
e1 or t1

Related
commands
set tdm group Setting of TDM group
clear tdm group Clearing of TDM group

TDM-Path
15-4

General Privilege Save
clear tdm group
Clearing of TDM group
Clears a TDM group.

Input format P1 [P2 P3]
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Frame type { e1 | t1 }
e1: Specification for E1 mode
t1: Specification for T1 mode
P3: Group number (single specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
* When P2 and P3 are omitted, all TDM groups set to the port (line) specified in P1 are
cleared.

Default value None
Usage condition Specifying any group to which TDM path is set causes an error.
Note When P2 and P3 are omitted, execution is verified after the command entry.

Input examples
*Switch# clear tdm group 1 e1 1
*Switch# clear tdm group 16
Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set tdm path Setting of TDM path
set tdm group Setting of TDM group
show tdm group Display of TDM group setting information


TDM-Path
15-5

General Privilege Save
set tdm path
Setting of TDM path
Sets a TDM path.

Input format P1 P2 P3 P4
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Group number (single specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
P3: Port number of path destination (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P4: Group number of path destination (single specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24

Default value None
Usage
conditions
A TDM group can be set only to a port (line) to which the TDM mode is set in the line
mode setting.
Specifying any groups to which TDM group is not set causes an error.
Specifying any groups to which TDM path is set causes an error.
Setting a TDM path within the same port (line) causes an error.
A path can be set to groups with the same number of time slots.

Note None
Input example
*Switch# set tdm path 1 1 2 1
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set port frame Setting of port frame
set port mode Setting of port mode
set tdm group Setting of TDM group
show tdm path Display of TDM path setting information
clear tdm path Clearing of TDM path


TDM-Path
15-6

General Privilege Save
show tdm path
Display of TDM path setting information
Shows TDM path setting information.

Input format [P1 [P2]]
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Group number (Multiple values can be specified.)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
* When P2 is omitted, TDM path setting information on all TDM paths set to the port
(line) specified in P1 is shown.
* When all parameters are omitted, TDM path setting information on all ports (lines)
set to the TDM mode is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note Information is displayed based on the small port number with TDM path setting.
Input examples
*Switch# show tdm path
TDM Path Connection Table
=========================
Port Group Time Slot Port Group Time Slot Type
------------------------------------------------------
1 1 1 8 2 24 t1
2 1 1-24 5 24 1-24 t1
3 2 2-6 9 6 12-16 t1

*Switch#

Output items Port: Port number
Group: Group number
Time Slot: Time slot number
Type: Frame type
e1 or t1

Related
commands
set tdm path Setting of TDM path
clear tdm path Clearing of TDM path


TDM-Path
15-7

General Privilege Save
clear tdm path
Clearing of TDM path
Clears a TDM path.

Input format P1 [P2]
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Group number (single specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
* When P2 is omitted, all TDM paths set for the port (line) specified in P1 are
cleared.

Default value None
Usage condition None

Note To clear a TDM path, specify the port number and group number of the start or end
point which are used in the TDM path setting (TDM path can be cleared by specifying
either one.).
When P2 is omitted, execution is verified after the command entry.

Input examples
*Switch# clear tdm path 1 1
*Switch# clear tdm path 12
Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set tdm path Setting of TDM path
show tdm path Display of TDM path setting information



















(blank page)

TDM over Packet
16-1













16
TDM over Packet


TDM over Packet
16-2

General Privilege Save
set tdmop mode
Setting of TDMoP mode
Sets the TDMoP mode.

Input formats - Setting TDM over Ethernet (MEF8)
P1 P2 (mef) [P5][P6][P7]
- Setting TDM over UDP/IP
P1 P2 (udp-ip) P3 [P4] [P5][P6][P7]
Parameters P1: TDMoP operation mode { satop | cesopsn }
satop: SAToP mode
cesopsn: CESoPSN mode
P2: Packet format { mef | udp-ip }
mef: TDM over Ethernet (MEF8)
udp-ip: TDM over UDP/IP
When udp-ip is specified in P2
P3: Source IP address
P4: Flow identification method { udp-src | udp-dst }
udp-src: Distribution method by UDP port (src) + IP (src)
udp-dst: Distribution method by UDP port (dst) + IP (src)
* When P4 is omitted, udp-src is assumed.
P5: Number of sent frames (1 to 8)
* When P5 is omitted, 8 is assumed.
P6: RTP header setting { rtp_on | rtp_off }
rtp_on: Adds RTP header
rtp_off: Do not add RTP header
* When P6 is omitted, rtp_on is assumed
P7: Jitter buffer control method { static | dynamic }
static: Static mode
dynamic: Dynamic mode
* When P7 is omitted, static is assumed.

Default values P1: satop, P2: mef, P5: 8, P6: rtp_on, P7: static
Usage
conditions
If 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx or 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx is set as the IP
address, an error occurs. ("xxx" is any number.)
If network address of 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24 is set, an error occurs.
If any TDMoP group is set in the device, an error occurs.
If the frame format of the port frame setting is unframed, an error occurs when
CESoPSN mode is specified for the TDMoP operation mode.
If other than 8 is set for the number of sent frames, an error occurs when the dynamic
mode is specified for the jitter buffer control method.

TDM over Packet
16-3
Note When the dynamic mode is specified for the jitter buffer control method, the variation
tolerance that can be set with the "set tdmop jitter" command is 2ms, 4ms, or 8ms.
Refer to the following for the details of valid/invalid combinations of the value set for the
number of sent frames and the variation tolerance value set with the "set tdmop jitter"
command.
- Usage conditions of the "set tdmop jitter" command

Input examples
*Switch# set tdmop mode satop mef
*Switch# set tdmop mode satop udp-ip 100.100.100.1 udp-dst 7 rtp_off
static
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set port frame Setting of port frame
set port mode Setting of port mode
set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group
set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance
set adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock
set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format
set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection
set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking
show tdmop connection Display of TDMoP connection setting
show tdmop format Display of TDMoP format setting
reset cesop-device Resetting of CESoP device
show cesop-device status Display of CESoP device status



TDM over Packet
16-4

General Privilege Save
set tdmop group
Setting of TDMoP group
Sets a TDMoP group.

Input format P1 P2 P3 P4
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Frame type { e1 | t1 }
e1: Specification for E1 mode
t1: Specification for T1 mode
P3: Group number (single specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
P4: Time slot number
E1 mode
When time slot number is specified: (1 to 31) (Multiple values can be specified.)
When all time slots are specified: all
T1 mode
When time slot number is specified: (1 to 24) (Multiple values can be specified.)
When all time slots are specified: all

Default value None
Usage
conditions
A TDMoP group can be set only to a TDMP line to which the TDMoP mode is set in the
port mode setting.
The number of TDMoP you can set depends on the line card type.

Line Card The Number of Groups
32T1E1H 112
32T1E1T 96

If more than 112 TDMoP groups are set, an error occurs.
To specify a time slot number, the CESoPSN mode must be set for the TDMoP
operation mode in the TDMoP mode setting.
Any time slot numbers or group numbers to which a group has already been set in the
same port (line) cannot be used.

Note The default value for the variation tolerance is set.
Input examples
*Switch# set tdmop group 1 e1 1 1-32
*Switch# set tdmop group 12 t1 1 1-24
*Switch# set tdmop group 15 t1 1 all
*Switch#
TDM over Packet
16-5
Output item



Related
commands
set port frame Setting of port frame
set port mode Setting of port mode
set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode
set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance
set adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock
set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format
set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection
set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking
show tdmop information Display of TDMoP group setting information
clear tdmop group Clearing of TDMoP group
reset cesop-device Resetting of CESoP device
show cesop-device status Display of CESoP device status


TDM over Packet
16-6

General Privilege Save
show tdmop information
Display of TDMoP group setting information
Shows TDMoP group setting information.

Input format [P1 [P2]]
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Group number (Multiple values can be specified.)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
* When P2 is omitted, TDMoP group setting information on all TDMoP groups set
for the port (line) specified in P1 is shown.
* When all parameters are omitted, TDMoP group setting information on all ports
(lines) set to the TDMoP mode is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show tdmop information
TDMoP Group Count
=================
Enabled Disabled Configured Configurable
-------------------------------------------
1 0 1 111

TDMoP Group Table
=================
Port Group Time Slot Type
----------------------------
1 1 all e1

*Switch#

Output items Enabled: Number of groups unblocked
Disabled: Number of groups blocked
Configured: Number of groups set
Configurable: Remaining number of groups that can be set
Port: Port number
Group: Group number
Time Slot: Time slot
Time slot number or all
Type: Frame type
e1 or t1
TDM over Packet
16-7

Related
commands
set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking
set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group
clear tdmop group Clearing of TDMoP group


TDM over Packet
16-8

General Privilege Save
clear tdmop group
Clearing of TDMoP group
Clears a TDMoP group.

Input format P1 [P2 P3]
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Frame type { e1 | t1 }
e1: Specification for E1 mode
t1: Specification for T1 mode
P3: Group number (single specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
* When P2 and P3 are omitted, all TDMoP groups set for the port (line) specified in P1
are cleared.

Default value None
Usage condition If a group to which any of the following is set is specified, an error occurs.
set tdmop format
set tdmop connection
If the port (line)-independent clock mode is disabled and a group to which the adaptive
clock with the reference clock priority setting is set is specified, an error occurs.
If the port (line)-independent clock mode is enabled and a group to which the adaptive
clock with the reference clock group setting is set is specified, an error occurs.
If a group to which the adaptive clock is set is cleared, the adaptive clock setting for the
group is automatically cleared.

Notes If a group to which variation tolerance is set is cleared, the variation tolerance is set
back to the default value.
When P2 and P3 are omitted, execution is verified after the command entry.

Input examples
*Switch# clear tdmop group 1 e1 1
*Switch# clear tdmop group 12
Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y
*Switch#
Output item



Related
commands
set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance
set adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock
set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format
set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection
set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group
show tdmop information Display of TDMoP group setting information
TDM over Packet
16-9

General Privilege Save
set tdmop connection
Setting of TDMoP connection
Sets a TDMoP connection.

Input formats - When TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) is set for the packet format
P1 P2 P3 (ECID value) P4 P5 P6 P7 [P8]
- When TDM over UDP/IP is set for the packet format
P1 P2 P3 (UDP port number) P4 P5 P6 P7 [P8]
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Group number (single specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
When TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) is set for the packet format in the TDMoP mode
setting
P3: ECID (1 to 1048575)
P4: Port number of loopback destination (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P5: Group number of loopback destination (single specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
P6: Loopback destination ECID (1 to 1048575)
When TDM over UDP/IP is set for the packet format in the TDMoP mode setting
P3: UDP port number udp (1024 to 65535)
P4: Loopback destination port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P5: Group number of loopback destination (single specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
P6: Loopback destination UDP destination port number udp (1024 to 65535)
P7: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
P8: CoS value (0 to 7)
When P8 is omitted, 5 is assumed.

Default value None
TDM over Packet
16-10
Usage
conditions
If a group to which no TDMoP group is set is specified, an error occurs.
If the same port (line) is specified for the TDMoP connection setting, an error occurs.
If a VLAN ID which is set for ATMoP or the like is specified, an error occurs.
You can register up to 256 VLANs per device.
The ECID and the UDP port number must be unique in the device.
If a group to which any of the following is set is specified, an error occurs.
set tdmop format
set tdmop connection
If a CESoP device fault occurs or if this command is entered during a CESoP device
fault, an error occurs.

Note None
Input examples
*Switch# set tdmop connection 1 1 100 12 32 101 1000 7
*Switch# set tdmop connection 2 10 1024 1 8 65535 2 7
*Switch#
Output item


Related
commands
set port frame Setting of port frame
set port mode Setting of port mode
set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode
set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group
set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance
set adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock
set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format
set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking
show tdmop connection Display of TDMoP connection setting
show tdmop format Display of TDMoP format setting
clear tdmop connection Clearing of TDMoP connection
reset cesop-device Resetting of CESoP device
show cesop-device status Display of CESoP device status


TDM over Packet
16-11

General Privilege Save
show tdmop connection
Display of TDMoP connection setting
Shows the TDMoP connection setting.

Input format [P1 [P2]]
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Group number (Multiple values can be specified.)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
* When P2 is omitted, all TDMoP connection settings set for the port (line) specified
in P1 is shown.
* When all parameters are omitted, all TDMoP connection settings set to the device is
shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
TDM over Packet
16-12
Input examples When TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) mode is set;
*Switch# show tdmop connection
TDMoP Mode Configuration Table
==============================
Frame TDMoP Packet Filter Frame RTP Jitter
Module Type Mode Format Mode Count Header Mode
---------------------------------------------------------------
line1 e1 satop mef --- 8 on static

TDMoP Connection L2 Configuration Table
=======================================
Port Group ECID Port Group ECID VID CoS
----------------------------------------------------------
1 1 1 2 2 2 1 0
16 16 1048575 15 15 1048574 4094 7

*Switch#

When TDM over UDP/IP mode is set;
*Switch# show tdmop connection
TDMoP Mode Configuration Table
==============================
Frame TDMoP Packet Filter Frame RTP Jitter
Module Type Mode Format Mode Count Header Mode
-----------------------------------------------------------------
line1 t1 cesopsn udp-ip udp-src 1 off dynamic

TDMoP Connection L2 Configuration Table
=======================================
Port Group ECID Port Group ECID VID CoS
--------------------------------------------------------
1 1 --- 2 2 --- 1 0
16 16 --- 15 15 --- 4094 7

TDMoP Connection L3 Configuration Table
=======================================
Port Group UDP Port Port Group UDP Port
--------------------------------------------
1 1 1024 2 2 1025
16 16 65535 15 15 65534

*Switch#

TDM over Packet
16-13

Output items - TDMoP Mode Config Table
Module: Card type
line1: LINE1 card
Frame Type: Frame type
TDMoP Mode: TDMoP operation mode
Packet Format: Packet format
Filter Mode: Flow identification method
Frame Count: Number of sent frames
RTP Header: RTP header setting
Jitter Mode: Jitter buffer control method

- TDMoP Connection L2 Config Table
Port: Port number
Group: Group number
ECID: ECID
Port: Port number of loopback destination
Group: Group number of loopback destination
ECID: Loopback destination ECID value
VID: VLAN ID
CoS: CoS value

Displayed only in the TDM over UDP/IP mode
- TDMoP Connection L3 Config Table
Port: Port number
Group: Group number
UDP Port: UDP port number
Port: Loopback port number
Group: Loopback group number
UDP Port: Loopback UDP port number

Related
commands
set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection
clear tdmop connection Clearing of TDMoP connection


TDM over Packet
16-14

General Privilege Save
clear tdmop connection
Clearing of TDMoP connection
Clears a TDMoP connection.

Input format P1 [P2]
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Group number (single specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
* When P2 is omitted, all TDMoP connections set for the port (line) specified in P1
are cleared.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes When P2 is omitted, execution is verified after the command entry.
The connection of loopback destination is also cleared.
If the TDMoP is blocked, it is automatically unblocked.

Input examples
*Switch# clear tdmop connection 1 1
*Switch# clear tdmop connection 12
Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking
set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection
show tdmop connection Display of TDMoP connection setting


TDM over Packet
16-15

General Privilege Save
set tdmop jitter
Setting of variation tolerance
Sets variation tolerance.

Input format P1 P2 P3
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Group number (single specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
P3: jitter value (variation) tolerance { 2ms | 4ms | 8ms | 16ms | 32ms | 64ms | 128ms }
2ms: 2 ms
4ms: 4 ms
8ms: 8 ms
16ms: 16 ms
32ms: 32 ms
64ms: 64 ms
128ms: 128 ms

Default value P3: 4ms
Usage
conditions
Only a group number to which a TDMoP group is set can be specified.
If variation tolerance is set for a group to which any of the following is set, an error
occurs.
set tdmop format
set tdmop connection
* However, if the TDMoP is blocked, variation tolerance can be set.
If the dynamic mode has been set for the jitter buffer control method in the TDMoP
mode setting, an error occurs when a value other than 2ms, 4ms, and 8ms is specified
for the variation tolerance.
As described below, if the combination of the variation tolerance and the number of
sent frames in the TDMoP mode setting is not allowed, an error occurs.

Variation tolerance
Allowed number of
frames
Not allowed number of
frames
32 ms 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 1
64 ms 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 1, 2, 3
128 ms 8 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7


Notes If a TDMoP group is cleared, the variation tolerance is set back to the default value.
To return to the default value, enter the command specifying 4ms in P3.

TDM over Packet
16-16
Input example
*Switch# set tdmop jitter 1 1 16ms
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set port frame Setting of port frame
set port mode Setting of port mode
set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode
set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group
clear tdmop group Clearing of TDMoP group
set adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock
set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format
set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection
set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking
show tdmop jitter Display of variation tolerance
reset cesop-device Resetting of CESoP device
show cesop-device status Display of CESoP device status


TDM over Packet
16-17

General Privilege Save
show tdmop jitter
Display of variation tolerance
Shows variation tolerance.

Input format [P1 [P2]]
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Group number (Multiple values can be specified.)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
* When P2 is omitted, information on all variation tolerances set to the port (line)
specified in P1 is shown.
* When all parameters are omitted, information on all ports (lines) to which a TDMoP
group is set is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input examples
*Switch# show tdmop jitter
TDMoP Jitter Configuration
==========================
Port Group Jitter
---------------------
1 1 2ms
12 12 32ms

*Switch#

Output items Port: Port number
Group: Group number
Jitter: Variation tolerance

Related
commands
set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group
set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance


TDM over Packet
16-18

General Privilege Save
show tdmop status
Display of TDMoP path setting status information
Shows TDMoP path setting status information.

Input format [P1 [P2]]
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P2: Group number (Multiple values can be specified.)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
* When P2 is omitted, TDMoP path setting status information on all TDMoP groups
set to the port (line) specified in P1 is shown.
* When all parameters are omitted, TDMoP path setting status information on all ports
(lines) to which a TDMoP group is set is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show tdmop status
TDMoP Status Table
==================
Port Group Underrun Admin
-------------------------------
1 32 normal enabled
2 32 normal enabled
3 24 fault disabled
11 24 fault disabled

*Switch#

Output items Port: Port number
Group: Group number
Underrun: Buffer Underrun state
normal: Buffer Underrun not occurred
fault: Buffer Underrun occurred
Admin: TDMoP block setting
enabled: Unblocked
disabled: Blocked
Related
commands
set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group
set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking

TDM over Packet
16-19

General Privilege Save
set tdmop format
Setting of TDMoP format
Sets a TDMoP format.

Input formats - When TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) is set for the packet format
P1 P2 P3 P4 [P5] P6 (ECID value)
- When TDM over UDP/IP is set for the packet format
P1 P2 P3 P4 [P5] P6 (Destination IP address) P7 [P8] [P9]
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Group number (single specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
P3: Destination MAC address
P4: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification)
VLAN name (1 to 32 characters)
P5: CoS value (0 to 7)
* When P5 is omitted, 5 is assumed.
When TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) is set for the packet format in the TDMoP mode
setting
P6: ECID ecid 1 to 1048575
When TDM over UDP/IP is set for the packet format in the TDMoP mode setting
P6: Destination IP address
P7: Destination UDP port number udp (1024 to 65535)
P8: TTL value ttl (1 to 255)
* When P8 is omitted, 128 is assumed.
P9: DSCP value dscp (0 to 63)
* When P10 is omitted, 46 is assumed.

Default values None
TDM over Packet
16-20
Usage
conditions
A TDMoP format can be set only to a group number to which a TDMoP group is set.
If a VLAN ID which is set for ATMoP or the like is specified, an error occurs.
You can register up to 256 VLANs per device.
If 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx or 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx is set as the IP
address, an error occurs. ("xxx" is any number.)
If network address of 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24 is set, an error occurs.
If you specify the same destination IP address as the source IP address, an error
occurs.
The ECID and the UDP port number must be unique in the device.
If a group to which any of the following is set is specified, an error occurs.
set tdmop format
set tdmop connection
If a CESoP device fault occurs or if this command is entered during a CESoP device
fault, an error occurs.

Note If TDM over UDP/IP has been set for the packet format and udp-src has been set for
the flow identification method in the TDMoP mode setting, the destination UDP port
number is set to 2142 and the source UDP port number is set to the value specified
with this command.
If TDM over UDP/IP has been set for the packet format and udp-dst has been set for
the flow identification method in the TDMoP mode setting, the destination UDP port
number is set to the value specified with this command and the source UDP port
number is set to 2142.

Input example
*Switch# set tdmop format 1 1 00:00:00:00:00:01 1000 7 ecid 10
*Switch# set tdmop format 2 1 00:00:00:00:00:02 21 4 100.100.100.5 udp
1024
*Switch#
Output item



Related
commands
set port frame Setting of port frame
set port mode Setting of port mode
set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode
set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group
set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance
set adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock
set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection
set vlan name Setting of VLAN name
set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format
show tdmop format Display of TDMoP format setting
clear tdmop format Clearing of TDMoP format
reset cesop-device Resetting of CESoP device
show cesop-device status Display of CESoP device status


TDM over Packet
16-21

General Privilege Save
show tdmop format
Display of TDMoP format setting
Shows the TDMoP format setting.

Input format [P1 [P2]]
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Group number (Multiple values can be specified.)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
* When P2 is omitted, all TDMoP format settings set for the port (line) specified in
P1 is shown.
* When all parameters are omitted, all TDMoP format settings set to the device is
shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
TDM over Packet
16-22
Input examples When TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) mode is set;
When TDM over UDP/IP mode is set;
*Switch# show tdmop format
TDMoP Mode Configuration Table
==============================
Frame TDMoP Packet Filter Frame RTP Jitter
Module Type Mode Format Mode Count Header Mode
---------------------------------------------------------------
line1 t1 cesopsn udp-ip udp-src 1 off dynamic

TDMoP Format L2 Configuration Table
===================================
Source Destination
Port Group MAC Address MAC Address VID CoS ECID
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa 00:30:13:a1:2a:bb 1 0 ---
16 16 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa 00:30:13:a1:2a:dd 4094 7 ---

TDMoP Format L3 Configuration Table
===================================
Source Source Destination Destination
Port Group UDP Port IP Address IP Address UDP Port TTL DSCP
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1 1024 192.168.100.100 192.168.100.200 2142 1 0
16 16 65535 192.168.100.100 192.168.100.201 2142 255 63

*Switch#
*Switch# show tdmop format
TDMoP Mode Configuration Table
==============================
Frame TDMoP Packet Filter Frame RTP Jitter
Module Type Mode Format Mode Count Header Mode
---------------------------------------------------------------
line1 e1 satop mef --- 8 on static

TDMoP Format L2 Configuration Table
===================================
Source Destination
Port Group MAC Address MAC Address VID CoS ECID
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa 00:30:13:a1:2a:bb 1 0 1
16 16 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa 00:30:13:a1:2a:dd 4094 7 1048575

*Switch#
TDM over Packet
16-23

Output items - TDMoP Mode Configuration Table
Module: Card type
line1: LINE1 card
Frame Type: Frame type
TDMoP Mode: TDMoP operation mode
Packet Format: Packet format
Filter Mode: Flow identification method
Frame Count: Number of sent frames
RTP Header: RTP header setting
Jitter Mode: Jitter buffer control method

- TDMoP Format L2 Configuration Table
Port: Port number
Group: Group number
Source MAC Address: Source MAC address
Destination MAC Address: Destination MAC address
VID: VLAN ID
CoS: CoS value
ECID: ECID value

Displayed only in the TDM over UDP/IP mode
- TDMoP Format L3 Configuration Table
Port: Port number
Group: Group number
Source UDP Port: Source UDP port number
Source IP Address: Source IP address
Destination IP Address: Destination IP address
Destination UDP Port: Destination UDP port number
TTL: TTL value
DSCP: DSCP value

Related
commands
set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode
set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format
clear tdmop format Clearing of TDMoP format


TDM over Packet
16-24

General Privilege Save
clear tdmop format
Clearing of TDMoP format
Clears a TDMoP format.

Input format P1 [P2]
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Group number (single specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
* When P2 is omitted, all TDMoP formats set for the port (line) specified in P1 are
cleared.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes When P2 is omitted, execution is verified after the command entry.
If the TDMoP is blocked, it is automatically unblocked.

Input examples
*Switch# clear tdmop format 1 8
*Switch# clear tdmop format 10
Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y
*Switch#
Output item



Related
commands
set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking
set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format
show tdmop format Display of TDMoP format setting


TDM over Packet
16-25

General Privilege Save
set tdmop admin
Setting of TDMoP blocking
Sets whether to block or unblock TDMoP.

Input format P1 P2 P3
Parameters P1: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
P2: Group number (single specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
P3: Blocking/unblocking setting { enable | disable }
enable: Unblocking
disable: Blocking

Default value P3: enable
Usage condition If a group to which no TDMoP format or TDMoP connection is set is specified, an error
occurs.
If a CESoP device fault occurs or if this command is entered during a CESoP device
fault, an error occurs.

Note If a TDMoP format or TDMoP connection is cleared when TDMoP is blocked, the
blocking state is automatically cleared.

Input examples
*Switch# set tdmop admin 1 1 disable
*Switch# set tdmop admin 8 8 enable
*Switch#
Output item

Related
commands
set port frame Setting of port frame
set port mode Setting of port mode
set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode
set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group
set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance
set adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock
set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format
set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection
show tdmop status Display of TDMoP path setting status information
reset cesop-device Resetting of CESoP device
show cesop-device status Display of CESoP device status

TDM over Packet
16-26

General Privilege Save
reset cesop-device
Resetting of CESoP device
Resets the CESoP device.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note The TDMoP path communication stops while this command is being executed.
Input example
*Switch# reset cesop-device
Would you like to reset cesop-device? :(Y/N): y
*Switch#
Output item



Related
commands
set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking
set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format
set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection
set adaptive-clock-format Setting of adaptive clock format
show cesop-device status Display of CESoP device status


TDM over Packet
16-27

General Privilege Save
show cesop-device status
Display of CESoP device status
Shows the CESoP device status.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show cesop-device status
CESoP Device Status Table
=========================
Module Status
--------------
line1 normal

*Switch#

Output items Module: Card type
line1: LINE1 card
Status: CESoP device status
normal: CESoP device fault not occurred
fault: CESoP device fault occurred

Related
commands
set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking
set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format
set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection
set adaptive-clock-format Setting of adaptive clock format
reset cesop-device Resetting of CESoP device


















(blank page)

Clock Control
17-1













17
Clock Control



Clock Control
17-2

General Privilege Save
set reference-clock multiple-source
Setting of port (line)-independent clock mode
Sets the port (line)-independent clock mode.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Port (line)-independent clock mode enable/disable setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables the port (line)-independent clock mode
disable: Disables the port (line)-independent clock mode

Default value P1: disable
Usage
conditions
The port (line)-independent clock mode can be enabled only when the
32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card is installed.
The port (line)-independent clock mode can be changed only when the clock control
setting is set to the default value.

Note None
Input examples
*Switch# set reference-clock multiple-source enable
*Switch# set reference-clock multiple-source disable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set reference-clock priority Setting of reference clock priority
reset reference-clock Resetting of reference clock
set reference-clock mode Setting of reference clock switchover mode
set reference-clock group Setting of reference clock group
show reference-clock information Display of reference clock information


Clock Control
17-3

General Privilege Save
set reference-clock priority
Setting of reference clock priority
Sets the reference clock priority.

Input formats - Clear specification for specified priority
P1 P2 (none)
- Port (line) extraction clock specification
P1 P2 (port) P3
- Adaptive clock specification (when 1ATM155A line card is installed)
P1 P2 (adaptive) P3
- Adaptive clock specification (when 32T1E1H/32T1E1T card is installed)
P1 P2 (adaptive) P3
Parameters P1: Priority (1 to 3)
P2: Clear indication for specified priority { none }, port extraction clock { port }, or
adaptive clock { adaptive }
none: Clear indication for specified priority
port: port extraction clock
adaptive: Adaptive clock
When port is specified in P2.
P3: Port number (single specification)
1ATM155A: 1
32T1E1H: 1 to 16, 33 to 48
32T1E1T: 1 to 16, 33 to 48
When adaptive is specified in P2.
|P3: Card number { line1 } or Port number
line1: LINE1 card
* This can be set only to 1ATM155A line card.
Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
* This can be set only to 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card.

Default value None
Usage
conditions
This command can be entered only when the port (line)-independent clock mode is
disabled.
Port extraction clock can be set only to LINE1.
Adaptive clock can be set only to LINE1 for which adaptive clock is already set.
Modification of the priority that has already been set needs to be done after executing
the clear indication (none specification).
Priority of the port whose priority has already been set cannot be changed.
Up to 2 Port (line) extraction clocks can be set to a system, 1 for port 1-8, 1 for port 9-
16, 1 for port 33-40, and 1 for port 41-48.

Note None
Clock Control
17-4
Input examples
*Switch# set reference-clock priority 1 none
*Switch# set reference-clock priority 2 port 1
*Switch# set reference-clock priority 3 adaptive 9
*Switch# set reference-clock priority 2 none
*Switch# set reference-clock priority 2 port 33
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set reference-clock multiple-source Setting of port (line)-independent clock mode
reset reference-clock Resetting of reference clock
set reference-clock mode Setting of reference clock switchover mode
show reference-clock information Display of reference clock information


Clock Control
17-5

General Privilege Save
set reference-clock mode
Setting of reference clock switchover mode
Sets the reference clock switchover mode.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Switchover mode { revertive | non-revertive }
revertive: Autonomous switchover enabled/autonomous reverting enabled
non-revertive: Autonomous switchover enabled/autonomous reverting disabled

Default value P1: non-revertive
Usage condition This command can be entered only when the port (line)-independent clock mode is
disabled.
Note None

Input examples
*Switch# set reference-clock mode revertive
*Switch# set reference-clock mode non-revertive
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set reference-clock multiple-source Setting of port (line)-independent clock mode
set reference-clock priority Setting of reference clock priority
reset reference-clock Resetting of reference clock
show reference-clock information Display of reference clock information


Clock Control
17-6

General Privilege Save
reset reference-clock
Resetting of reference clock
Selectively resets the reference clock.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition This command can be entered only when the port (line)-independent clock mode is
disabled.

Note When a clock is supplied to the source clock with higher priority over the reference
clock that is currently selected, the reference clock is switched over to the source clock
with higher priority.

Input example
*Switch# reset reference-clock
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set reference-clock multiple-source Setting of port (line)-independent clock mode
set reference-clock priority Setting of reference clock priority
set reference-clock mode Setting of reference clock switchover mode
show reference-clock information Display of reference clock information


Clock Control
17-7

General Privilege Save
set reference-clock group
Setting of reference clock group
Sets a reference clock group.

Input formats - Clear specification for the specified group
P1 P2 (none)
- Group 1 specification
P1 (1) P2 (adaptive) P3
- Group 2 or group 3 specification
P1 (2|3) P2 (adaptive) P3 [P4]
Parameters P1: Group number (1 to 3)
P2: Clear indication for the specified group { none } or adaptive clock { adaptive }
none: Clear indication for the specified group
adaptive: Adaptive clock
When adaptive is specified in P2
P3: Port number of the clock extraction source (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single
specification)
P4: Port number of the clock supply destination (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (Multiple
values can be specified.)

Default value All ports from 1 to 16 and from 33 to 48 are the clock supply destination ports for group
1.
Usage
conditions
This command can be entered only when the port (line)-independent clock mode is
enabled.
The adaptive clock can be specified only for LINE1 card to which the adaptive clock has
already set.
Change the setting of the clock extraction source port after the clear indication
(specifying none). (The clear indication (specifying none) also clears the clock supply
destination port.)
When group 1 is specified, the clock supply destination ports cannot be specified.
(The clock supply destination ports for group 1 are changed automatically when the
setting for group 2 or 3 is changed.)
You cannot specify one port for two or more groups as the clock extraction source port
or clock supply destination port.

Notes If you set group 2 or 3 without specifying the clock supply destination port after you
have set that group specifying the clock supply destination port, the clock supply
destination port is cleared.

Input examples
*Switch# set reference-clock group 1 adaptive 3
*Switch# set reference-clock group 2 adaptive 1 10-16
*Switch# set reference-clock group 3 adaptive 5
*Switch# set reference-clock group 2 none
*Switch# set reference-clock group 2 adaptive 2 33-36,41-43,11
*Switch#

Clock Control
17-8
Output item



Related
commands
set reference-clock multiple-source Setting of port (line)-independent clock mode
show reference-clock information Display of reference clock information


Clock Control
17-9

General Privilege Save
show reference-clock information
Display of reference clock information
Displays the reference clock settings and status.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Clock Control
17-10

Input examples When the port (line)-independent clock mode is disabled (when 1ATM155A line card
is installed or LINE1 card is not installed);
*Switch# show reference-clock information
Reference Clock Information
===========================
Multiple-Source : ---
Reference Clock Mode : non-revertive

Clock Supply Status Table
=========================
No entry in the table.

*Switch#

When the port (line)-independent clock mode is disabled (when 32T1E1H/32T1E1T
line card is installed);
*Switch# show reference-clock information
Reference Clock Information
===========================
Multiple-Source : disabled
Reference Clock Mode : revertive

Clock Supply Status Table
=========================
Priority Source Status
-------------------------------------
* 1 port:4 normal
3 port:33 fail

*Switch#

When the port (line)-independent clock mode is enabled;
*Switch# show reference-clock information
Reference Clock Information
===========================
Multiple-Source : enabled

Reference Clock Supply Status Table
===================================
Group Source Status Member Ports
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 adaptive:3 fail 1-2,4-5,7-16,33-48
2 adaptive:6 acquiring ---

*Switch#

Clock Control
17-11

Output items - Reference Clock Information
Multiple-Source: Port (line)-independent clock mode
enabled: Enabled
disable: Disabled
--- : Line card is not installed or 1ATM155A line card is installed

Displayed only when the port (line)-independent clock mode is disabled
Reference Clock Mode: Reference clock switchover mode
revertive: Autonomous reverting setting enabled
non-revertive: Autonomous reverting setting disabled

Displayed only when the port (line)-independent clock mode is disabled
- Clock Supply Status Table
Priority: Clock switchover priority (1 to 3)
Source: Clock supply source
port: Port (line) extraction port
adaptive: Adaptive port
Status: Clock supply status
normal: Clock input
acquiring: Clock currently synchronizing
fail: No clock input

Displayed only when the port (line)-independent clock mode is enabled
- Reference Clock Supply Status Table
Group: Clock group (1 to 3)
Source: Clock extraction source
adaptive: Adaptive port
Status: Reference clock supply status
normal: Reference clock supplied
acquiring: Reference clock currently synchronizing
fail: No reference clock supply
Member Ports: Clock supply destination port (1 to 16, 33 to 48)

Related
commands
set reference-clock multiple-source Setting of port (line)-independent clock mode
set reference-clock priority Setting of reference clock priority
reset reference-clock Resetting of reference clock
set reference-clock mode Setting of reference clock switchover mode
set reference-clock group Setting of reference clock group


Clock Control
17-12

General Privilege Save
set adaptive-clock
Setting of adaptive clock
Sets the adaptive clock.

Input formats - When the command is entered for 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card
P1 (port number) P2 [P3] [P4]
- When the command is entered for 1ATM155A line card
P1 (line1) [P3][P4]
Parameters P1: Port number or line card type { line1 }
Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification) * This can be set only for
32T1E1H/32T1E1T.
line1: LINE1 * This can be set only for 1ATM155A.
When port number is specified in P1
P2: Group number (single specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24
P3: Network type { narrow | middle | wide }
narrow: Small scale
middle: Medium scale
wide: Large scale
When P3 is omitted, wide is assumed.
P4: Operation algorithm { standard | re-sync | averaging }
Standard Mode
*This algorithm decides the optimal packect by processing the statistics in the early
stage,
Re-sync mode
This algorithm decides the optimal packet by processing the statistics periodically, and
generates the clock based on the packet.
Averaging mode
This algorithm generates the clock based on the averaged packet.

*When p4 is omitted, standard is selected.

Default value None
Clock Control
17-13
Usage
conditions
When the command is entered for a 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card, an error occurs if a
group to which no TDMoP group is set is specified.
When the command is entered for a 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card, an error occurs if the
adaptive clock is set for a group to which any of the following is set.
set tdmop format
set tdmop connection
* However, if TDMoP is blocked, it can be set.
When the command is entered for a 1ATM155A line card, an error occurs if the
following is set.
set adaptive-clock-format
If the adaptive clock is not set with this command, adaptive clock cannot be specified in
the reference clock priority setting.

Notes Three systems of the adaptive clock can be set when 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line cards are
installed. One system of the adaptive clock can be set when 1ATM155A line cards are
installed.
When the command is entered for a 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card, if a group to which
the adaptive clock is set is cleared, the adaptive clock setting is automatically cleared.
If the port (line) extraction clock is selected as the reference clock, port (line) alarms
may be detected at the associated device for the TDMoP path which extracts adaptive
clock.

Input examples
*Switch# set adaptive-clock 1 1 middle
*Switch# set adaptive-clock line1 narrow
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set port frame Setting of port frame
set port mode Setting of port mode
set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode
set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group
set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance
set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format
set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection
set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking
set adaptive-clock-mode Setting of adaptive clock mode
set adaptive-clock-format Setting of adaptive clock format
show adaptive-clock Display of adaptive clock setting
clear adaptive-clock Clearing of adaptive clock
reset cesop-device Resetting of CESoP device
show cesop-device status Display of CESoP device status


Clock Control
17-14

General Privilege Save
show adaptive-clock
Display of adaptive clock setting
Shows the adaptive clock setting.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Clock Control
17-15

Input examples When 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card in the TDM over Ethernet(MEF8) mode is set;
*Switch# show adaptive-clock
Adaptive-Clock Mode Configuration Table
=======================================
Frame TDMoP Packet Filter Frame RTP Jitter
Module Type Mode Format Mode Count Header Mode
---------------------------------------------------------------
line1 e1 satop mef --- 8 on static

Adaptive-Clock Table (Port)
===========================
Module Port Group Network Type Algorithm Status
--------------------------------------------------------
line1 1 1 narrow averaging holdover
line1 8 8 middle standard acquiring
line1 16 16 wide re-sync acquired

*Switch#

When 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card in the TDM over UDP/IP mode is set;
*Switch# show adaptive-clock
Adaptive-Clock Mode Configuration Table
=======================================
Frame TDMoP Packet Filter Frame RTP Jitter
Module Type Mode Format Mode Count Header Mode
---------------------------------------------------------------
line1 t1 cesopsn udp-ip udp-src 1 off dynamic

Adaptive-Clock Table (Port)
===========================
Module Port Group Network Type Algorithm Status
------------------------------------------------------------
line1 1 1 narrow averaging holdover
line1 8 8 middle standard acquiring
line1 16 16 wide re-sync acquired

*Switch#

When 1ATM155A line card in the TDM over Ethernet(MEF8) mode;
*Switch# show adaptive-clock
Adaptive-Clock Mode Configuration Table
=======================================
Frame TDMoP Packet Filter Frame RTP Jitter
Module Type Mode Format Mode Count Header Mode
---------------------------------------------------------------
line1 e1 satop mef --- 8 on static

Adaptive-Clock Format L2 Configuration Table
============================================
Source Destination
Module MAC Address MAC Address VID CoS ECID Jitter
----------------------------------------------------------------------
line1 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa 00:30:13:a1:2a:dd 4094 7 1048575 128ms

Clock Control
17-16
Adaptive-Clock Format L3 Configuration Table
============================================
No entry in the table.

Adaptive-Clock Table (Line)
===========================
Module Network Type Algorithm Status
--------------------------------------------
line1 middle standard acquiring

*Switch#

For 1ATM155A line card in the TDM over UDP/IP mode
*Switch# show adaptive-clock
Adaptive-Clock Mode Configuration Table
=======================================
Frame TDMoP Packet Filter Frame RTP Jitter
Module Type Mode Format Mode Count Header Mode
---------------------------------------------------------------
line1 t1 satop udp-ip udp-src 1 off static

Adaptive-Clock Format L2 Configuration Table
============================================
Source Destination
Module MAC Address MAC Address VID CoS ECID Jitter
----------------------------------------------------------------------
line1 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa 00:30:13:a1:2a:dd 4094 7 --- 128ms

Adaptive-Clock Format L3 Configuration Table
============================================
Source Source Destination Destination
Module UDP Port IP Address IP Address UDP Port TTL DSCP
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
line1 65535 192.168.100.100 192.168.100.200 2142 255 63

Adaptive-Clock Table (Line)
===========================
Module Network Type Algorithm Status
--------------------------------------------
line1 middle standard acquiring

*Switch#

Clock Control
17-17

Output items - Adaptive-Clock Mode Configuration Table
Module: Card type
line1: LINE1 card
Frame Type: Frame type
TDMoP Mode: TDMoP operation mode
Packet Format: Packet format
Filter Mode: Flow identification method
Frame Count: Number of sent frames
RTP Header: RTP header setting
Jitter Mode: Jitter buffer control method

When 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card in the TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) mode is set;
When 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card in the TDM over UDP/IP mode is set;
- Adaptive-Clock Table(Port)
Module: Card type
line1: LINE1 card
Port: Port number
Group: Group number
Network Type: Network type
narrow: Small scale
middle: Medium scale
wide: Large scale
Algorithm: Operation algorithm
standard: Standard Mode
re-sync: Re-sync Mode
averaging: Averaging Mode
Status: Clock status
freerun: Lock Out status (operated in freerun clock of the device)
holdover: Lock Out status (operated in clock previously synchronized)
acquiring: Lock Out status (collecting adaptive clock information)
acquired: Lock status

When 1ATM155A line card in the TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) mode is set;
When 1ATM155A line card in the TDM over UDP/IP mode is set:
- Adaptive-Clock Format L2 Configuration Table
Module: Card type
line1: LINE1 card
Source MAC Address: Source MAC address
Destination MAC Address: Destination MAC address
VID: VLAN ID
CoS: CoS value
ECID: ECID
Jitter: Variation tolerance
Clock Control
17-18

- Adaptive-Clock Format L3 Configuration Table
* Displayed only for 1ATM155A line card in the TDM over UDP/IP mode
Module: Card type
line1: LINE1 card
Source UDP Port: Source UDP port number
Source IP Address: Source IP address
Destination IP Address: Destination IP address
Destination UDP Port: Destination UDP port number
TTL: TTL value
DSCP: DSCP value
- Adaptive-Clock Table (Line)
Module: Card type
line1: LINE1 card
Network Type: Network type
narrow: Small scale
middle: Medium scale
wide: Large scale
Algorithm: Operation algorithm
standard: Standard Mode
re-sync: Re-sync Mode
averaging: Averaging Mode
Status: Clock status
freerun: Lock Out status (operated in freerun clock of the device)
holdover: Lock Out status (operated in clock previously synchronized)
acquiring: Lock Out status (collecting adaptive clock information)
acquired: Lock status


Related
commands
set adaptive-clock-mode Setting of adaptive clock mode
set adaptive-clock-format Setting of adaptive clock format
clear adaptive-clock-format Clearing of adaptive clock format setting
set adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock
clear adaptive-clock Clearing of adaptive clock


Clock Control
17-19

General Privilege Save
clear adaptive-clock
Clearing of adaptive clock
Clears the adaptive clock.

Input formats
- When the command is entered for 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card
P1 (port number) P2
- When the command is entered for 1ATM155A line card
P1 (line1)
Parameters P1: Port number or card type { line1 }
Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification) * This can be set only for
32T1E1H/32T1E1T.
line1: LINE1 * This can be set only for 1ATM155A.
When port number is specified in P1
P2: Group number (single specification)
E1 mode: 1 to 32
T1 mode: 1 to 24

Default value None
Usage
conditions
If the line-independent clock mode is disabled and the reference clock priority is set, an
error occurs.
If the line-independent clock mode is enabled and the reference clock group is set, an
error occurs.
When the command is entered for a 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card, an error occurs if any
of the following is set for a group to which the adaptive clock is set.
set tdmop format
set tdmop connection
* However, if TDMoP is blocked, it can be cleared.
When the command is entered for a 1ATM155A line card, an error occurs if the
following is set.
set adaptive-clock-format

Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear adaptive-clock 8 16
*Switch# clear adaptive-clock line1
*Switch#

Output item



Clock Control
17-20
Related
commands
set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format
set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection
set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking
set reference-clock priority Setting of reference clock priority
set adaptive-clock-mode Setting of adaptive clock mode
set adaptive-clock-format Setting of adaptive clock format
clear adaptive-clock-format Clearing of adaptive clock format setting
set adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock
show adaptive-clock Display of adaptive clock setting


Clock Control
17-21

General Privilege Save
set adaptive-clock-mode
Setting of adaptive clock mode
Sets the adaptive clock mode.

Input formats - TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) setting
P1 [P2] P3 (mef) [P6] [P7]
- TDM over UDP/IP setting
P1 [P2] P3 (udp-ip) P4 [P5] [P6] [P7]
Parameters P1: Card type { line1 }
line1: LINE1 card
P2: Frame type { e1 | t1 }
e1: E1 mode specification
t1: T1 mode specification
* When omitted: e1
P3: Packet format { mef | udp-ip }
mef: TDM over Ethernet (MEF8)
udp-ip: TDM over UDP/IP
When udp-ip is specified in P3
P4: Source IP address
P5: Flow identification method { udp-src | udp-dst }
udp-src: Distribution method by UDP port (src) + IP (src)
udp-dst: Distribution method by UDP port (dst) + IP (src)
* When omitted: udp-src
P6: Number of sent frames (1 to 8)
* When omitted: 8
P7: RTP header setting { rtp_on | rtp_off }
rtp_on: Adds RTP header
rtp_off: Do not add RTP header
* When P5 is omitted, rtp_on is assumed.

Default values P2: e1, P3: mef, P6: 8, P7: rtp_on
Usage
conditions
If you set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as the
IP address, an error occurs. ("xxx" is any number.)
If you set 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the network address, an error
occurs.
If the adaptive clock is set for LINE1, an error occurs.

Note None
Input examples
*Switch# set adaptive-clock-mode line1 e1 mef 5 rtp_off
*Switch# set adaptive-clock-mode line1 t1 udp-ip 100.100.100.1 udp-src
*Switch#
Clock Control
17-22

Output item


Related
commands
set adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock
show adaptive-clock Display of adaptive clock setting
set adaptive-clock-format Setting of adaptive clock format
reset cesop-device Resetting of CESoP device
show cesop-device status Display of CESoP device status


Clock Control
17-23

General Privilege Save
set adaptive-clock-format
Setting of adaptive clock format
Sets the adaptive clock format.

Input formats - When TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) is set for packet format
P1 P2 P3 [P4] [P5] P6 (ECID value)
- When TDM over UDP/IP is set for packet format
P1 P2 P3 [P4] [P5] P6 (Destination IP address) P7 [P8] [P9]
Parameters P1: Card type { line1 }
line1: LINE1 card
P2: Destination MAC address
P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification)
VLAN name (1 to 32 characters)
P4: CoS value (0 to 7)
* When P4 is omitted, 5 is assumed.
P5: Variation tolerance
jitter { 2ms | 4ms | 8ms | 16ms | 32ms | 64ms | 128ms }
jitter 2ms: 2ms
jitter 4ms: 4ms
jitter 8ms: 8ms
jitter 16ms: 16ms
jitter 32ms: 32ms
jitter 64ms: 64ms
jitter 128ms: 128ms
* When P5 is omitted, 4ms is assumed.
When TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) is set for the packet format of the adaptive clock
mode setting
P6: ECID ecid (1 to 1048575)
When TDM over UDP/IP is set for the packet format of the adaptive clock mode
setting
P6: Destination IP address
P7: UDP port number udp (1024 to 65535)
P8: TTL value ttl (1 to 255)
* When P8 is omitted, 128 is assumed.
P9: DSCP dscp (0 to 63)
* When P9 is omitted, 46 is assumed.

Default value None
Clock Control
17-24
Usage
conditions
The adaptive clock must be set for LINE1.
You can register up to 256 VLANs per device.
If you set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx as the
IP address, an error occurs. ("xxx" is any number.)
If you set 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the network address, an error
occurs.
If you specify the same value for the destination IP address and the source IP address,
an error occurs.
If the adaptive clock format has already been set, an error occurs.
The ECID and the UDP port number must be unique in the device.
As described below, if the combination of the variation tolerance and the number of
sent frames in the adaptive clock mode setting is not allowed, an error occurs.

Variation tolerance
Allowed number of
frames
Not allowed number of
frames
32 ms 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 1
64 ms 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 1, 2, 3
128 ms 8 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

If a CESoP device fault occurs or if this command is entered during a CESoP device
fault, an error occurs.

Note If TDM over UDP/IP has been set for the packet format and udp-src has been set for
the flow identification method in the adaptive clock mode setting, the destination UDP
port number is set to 2142 and the source UDP port number is set to the value
specified with this command.
If TDM over UDP/IP has been set for the packet format and udp-dst has been set for
the flow identification method in the adaptive clock mode setting, the destination UDP
port number is set to the value specified with this command and the source UDP port
number is set to 2142.

Input examples
*Switch# set adaptive-clock-format line1 00:00:00:00:00:01 1000 7
jitter 32ms ecid 10
*Switch# set adaptive-clock-format line1 00:00:00:00:00:0f 1 1 jitter
2ms 100.100.100.2 udp 1024 ttl 1 dscp 0
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set adaptive-clock-mode Setting of adaptive clock mode
set adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock
show adaptive-clock Display of adaptive clock setting
clear adaptive-clock-format Clearing of adaptive clock format setting
reset cesop-device Resetting of CESoP device
show cesop-device status Display of CESoP device status


Clock Control
17-25

General Privilege Save
clear adaptive-clock-format
Clearing of adaptive clock format setting
Clears the adaptive clock format setting.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Card type { line1 }
line1: LINE1 card

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear adaptive-clock-format line1
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock
show adaptive-clock Display of adaptive clock setting
set adaptive-clock-mode Setting of adaptive clock mode
set adaptive-clock-format Setting of adaptive clock format



















(blank page)

Network Management
18-1













18
Network
Management


Network Management
18-2

General Privilege Save
set snmp
Setting of SNMP enable/disable
Sets SNMP security access.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: SNMP enable/disable setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables SNMP
disable: Disables SNMP

Default value P1: disable
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set snmp enable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
set snmp manager Setting of SNMP manager
set snmp trap-manager Setting of SNMP trap manager
set snmp authen-trap Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission
show snmp Display of SNMP setting information


Network Management
18-3

General Privilege Save
set snmp manager
Setting of SNMP manager
Sets an SNMP manager.

Input format P1 P2 P3 P4 [P5]
Parameters P1: Manager number (1 to 20)
P2: Community name (1 to 255 characters)
P3: IP address
P4: Access authority { read-only | read-write }
read-only: General user
read-write: Privileged user
P5: Memo (1 to 31 characters)

Default value None
Usage
conditions

When using the same community, you cannot set a different access authority.
Notes You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the manager IP address. ("xxx" is any number.)
If an SNMP manager exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or
192.168.129.0/24, you can set the manager. This setting, however, does not provide
correct communication.

Input example
*Switch# set snmp manager 1 a 1.2.3.4 read-only
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
set snmp Setting of SNMP enable/disable
show snmp Display of SNMP setting information
clear snmp manager Clearing of SNMP manager settings


Network Management
18-4

General Privilege Save
set snmp trap-manager
Setting of SNMP trap manager
Sets an SNMP trap manager.

Input format P1 P2 P3 P4 [P5]
Parameters P1: Trap manager number (1 to 10)
P2: Community name (1 to 255 characters)
P3: IP address
P4: Trap format { v1 | v2c }
v1: V1 Trap
v2c: V2C Trap
P5: Memo (1 to 31 characters)

Default value None
Usage
conditions
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the manager IP address. ("xxx" is any number.)
If an SNMP manager exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or
192.168.129.0/24, you can set the manager. This setting, however, does not provide
correct communication.

Notes Set a community name and memo with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control
character].
When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.

Input example
*Switch# set snmp trap-manager 1 a 50.60.70.80 v1
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
set snmp Setting of SNMP enable/disable
show snmp Display of SNMP setting information
clear snmp trap-manager Clearing of SNMP trap manager settings


Network Management
18-5

General Privilege Save
clear snmp manager
Clearing of SNMP manager settings
Clears SNMP manager settings.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Manager number (1 to 20)

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear snmp manager 1
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set snmp Setting of SNMP enable/disable
set snmp manager Setting of SNMP manager
show snmp Display of SNMP setting information


Network Management
18-6

General Privilege Save
clear snmp trap-manager
Clearing of SNMP trap manager settings
Clears SNMP trap manager settings.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Trap manager number (1 to 10)

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear snmp trap-manager 1
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set snmp Setting of SNMP enable/disable
set snmp trap-manager Setting of SNMP trap manager
show snmp Display of SNMP setting information


Network Management
18-7

General Privilege Save
set snmp authen-trap
Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission
Sets SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission enable/disable setting { enable |
disable }
enable: Enables SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission
disable: Disables SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission

Default value P1: enable
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set snmp authen-trap enable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
set snmp trap-manager Setting of SNMP trap manager
show snmp Display of SNMP setting information


Network Management
18-8

General Privilege Save
show snmp
Display of SNMP setting information
Shows SNMP setting information.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Network Management
18-9

Input example
*Switch# show snmp
SNMP Access Configuration
=========================
SNMP Access : disabled

Manager Configuration
=====================
Manager Index 1
Community Name: a
IP Address : 1.2.3.4
Authority : read-only
Note :

Manager Index 2
Community Name: cx2200-2
IP Address : 192.168.0.3
Authority : read-write
Note : right

Manager Index 20
Community Name: b
IP Address : 10.20.30.40
Authority : read-write
Note :

Authentication Failure Trap Configuration
=========================================
Authen Trap : enabled

Trap Manager Configuration
==========================
Trap Manager Index 1
Community Name: a
IP Address : 50.60.70.80
Trap Mode : v1
Note :

Trap Manager Index 2
Community Name: cx2200-2
IP Address : 192.168.0.3
Trap Mode : v2c
Note : right

<Omission>

Network Management
18-10

Output items SNMP Access: SNMP security access setting
Manager Index: Manager number
Community Name: Community name
IP Address: IP address
Authority: Access authority
Authen Trap: Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission
Trap Manager Index: Trap manager number
Community Name: Community name
IP Address: IP address
Trap Mode: Trap format
Note: Memo

Related
commands
set snmp Setting of SNMP enable/disable
set snmp manager Setting of SNMP manager
set snmp trap-manager Setting of SNMP trap manager
set snmp authen-trap Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission
how snmp Display of SNMP setting information
clear snmp trap-manager Clearing of SNMP trap manager settings
clear snmp manager Clearing of SNMP manager settings


Network Management
18-11

General Privilege Save
set session ip-permit
Setting of access list
Sets a telnet connection access list.

Input format P1 P2 [P3]
Parameters P1: Access list number (1 to 4)
P2: IP address
P3: Subnet mask

Default value None
Usage
conditions
When using the same community, you cannot set a different access authority.
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the manager IP address. ("xxx" is any number.) You can set the network
addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the network address but this
setting does not provide correct communication.

Note None
Input example
*Switch# set session ip-permit 1 10.20.30.40 255.255.255.0
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show session ip-permit Display of access list
clear session ip-permit Clearing of access list


Network Management
18-12

General Privilege Save
show session ip-permit
Display of access list
Shows a telnet connection access list.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Access list number (1 to 4)
* When P1 is omitted, telnet connection access list on all access list numbers is
shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show session ip-permit
Telnet Filter Table
===================
No IP Address Netmask
------------------------------------
1 192.168.2.211 255.255.255.0

*Switch#

Output items No: Access list number
IP Address: IP address
Netmask: Subnet mask


Related
commands
set session ip-permit Setting of access list
clear session ip-permit Clearing of access list


Network Management
18-13

General Privilege Save
clear session ip-permit
Clearing of access list
Clears a telnet connection access list.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Access list number (1 to 4)

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear session ip-permit 1
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set session ip-permit Setting of access list
show session ip-permit Display of access list


Network Management
18-14

General Privilege Save
show session
Display of session
Shows terminal line information.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show session
Terminal Session Table
======================
Session ID Terminal IP Address User Name Status
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
* 0 local --- --- established
1 remote 192.168.2.138 --- established
2 remote listen
3 remote listen
4 remote listen

*Switch#

Output items *: Console showing terminal line information
Session ID: Session ID
Terminal: Console type
local: Local console
remote: Remote console
IP Address: Connection source IP address
User Name: Account name
Status: Connection status
established: Session connected
listen: Session not connected
busy: Resource busy
authenticating: During login authentication

Related
command
clear session Clearing of session
Network Management
18-15

General Privilege Save
clear session
Clearing of session
Clears a telnet session.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Session number (1 to 4)

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear session 1
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show session Display of session


Network Management
18-16

General Privilege Save
set syslog remote
Setting of remote log enable/disable
Sets whether to enable or disable a remote log.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Remote log enable/disable setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables remote log
disable: Disables remote log

Default value P1: disable
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set syslog remote enable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
set syslog server Setting of syslog server and message facility
clear syslog server Clearing of syslog server
show syslog server Display of syslog server configuration information


Network Management
18-17

General Privilege Save
set syslog server
Setting of syslog server and message facility
Sets a syslog server and message facility.

Input format P1 P2 P3
Parameters P1: syslog server number (1 to 5)
P2: IP address
P3: Facility { local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6| local7 }
local0: Log type "local user 0"
local1: Log type "local user 1"
local2: Log type "local user 2"
local3: Log type "local user 3"
local4: Log type "local user 4"
local5: Log typ3 "local user 5"
local6: Log type "local user 6"
local7: Log type "local user 7"

Default value None
Usage
conditions
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the server IP address. ("xxx" is any number.)
If a syslog server exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or
192.168.129.0/24, you can set the server. This setting, however, does not provide
correct communication.

Note None
Input example
*Switch# set syslog server 1 1.2.3.4 local0
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
set syslog remote Setting of remote log enable/disable
show syslog server Display of syslog server configuration information
clear syslog server Clearing of syslog server


Network Management
18-18

General Privilege Save
show syslog server
Display of syslog server configuration information
Shows syslog server configuration information.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show syslog server

Syslog Remote Configuration
===========================
Syslog Remote: enabled

Syslog Server Table
===================
Index IP Address Facility
---------------------------------------------------------
1 10.20.30.40 LOG_LOCAL7
2 192.168.0.3 LOG_LOCAL1
5 5.6.7.8 LOG_LOCAL7

*Switch#

Output items Syslog Remote: Remote log setting
enabled: Remote log enabled
disabled: Remote log disabled
Index: syslog server number
IP Address: IP address
Facility: syslog facility

Related
commands
set syslog remote Setting of remote log enable/disable
set syslog server Setting of syslog server and message facility
clear syslog server Clearing of syslog server


Network Management
18-19

General Privilege Save
clear syslog server
Clearing of syslog server
Clears a syslog server.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: syslog server (1 to 5)

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear syslog server 1
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set syslog remote Setting of remote log enable/disable
set syslog server Setting of syslog server and message facility
show syslog server Display of syslog server configuration information


Network Management
18-20

General Privilege Save
set syslog map
Setting of syslog message level remapping
Sets syslog message level remapping.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Group
For the group parameter, refer to "Mapping" of "syslog Functions" of "Method of
Operating Maintenance and Management Functions" in the "Instruction Manual".
P2: syslog level
For the syslog level parameter, refer to "Mapping" of "syslog Functions" of "Method
of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions" in the "Instruction Manual".

Default value For the default values, refer to "Mapping" of "syslog Functions" of "Method of
Operating Maintenance and Management Functions" in the "Instruction Manual".

Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set syslog map TRAP_SYSFLT information
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
clear syslog map Clearing of syslog message level remapping
show syslog map Display of syslog message level mapping status
show syslog local Display of local log


Network Management
18-21

General Privilege Save
show syslog map
Display of syslog message level mapping status
Shows the syslog message level mapping status.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show syslog map
Syslog Map Configuration
========================
TRAP_SYSFLT : LOG_INFO
TRAP_SYSMJR : LOG_ERR
TRAP_SYSMNR : LOG_ERR
TRAP_SYSWAR : LOG_WARNING
TRAP_SYSCLR : LOG_INFO
TRAP_SYSINF : LOG_ERR
TRAP_ROUTEMJR : LOG_ERR
TRAP_ROUTEMNR : LOG_ERR
TRAP_ROUTEWAR : LOG_WARNING
TRAP_ROUTECLR : LOG_INFO
TRAP_ROUTEINF : LOG_INFO
TRAP_PORTMJR : LOG_ERR
TRAP_PORTCLR : LOG_INFO
TRAP_PORTINF : LOG_INFO
COMMAND_LOG : LOG_INFO
SNMP_LOG : LOG_INFO

*Switch#

Output items For the output items, refer to "Mapping" of "syslog Functions" of "Method of Operating
Maintenance and Management Functions" in the "Instruction Manual".

Related
commands
set syslog map Setting of syslog message level remapping
clear syslog map Clearing of syslog message level remapping


Network Management
18-22

General Privilege Save
clear syslog map
Clearing of syslog message level remapping
Sets syslog message level remapping.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Group
For the group parameter, refer to "Mapping" of syslog Functions of "Method of
Operating Maintenance and Management Functions" in the "Instruction Manual".

Default value For the default value, refer to "Mapping" of syslog Functions of "Method of Operating
Maintenance and Management Functions" in the "Instruction Manual".

Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear syslog map TRAP_PORTINF
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set syslog map Setting of syslog message level remapping
show syslog map Display of syslog message level mapping status


Network Management
18-23

General Privilege Save
show syslog local
Display of local log
Shows a local log.

Input format [P1] [P2] [P3]
Parameters P1: Log group { all | system | command | route | port | snmp }
all: Shows all local logs
system: Shows local logs related to system status notification
command: Shows local logs related to commands
route: Shows local logs related to route status notification
port: Shows local logs related to port status notification
snmp: Show local logs related to the SNMPSET command
* When P1 is omitted, all is assumed.
P2: Order in which to show local logs { oldest | newest }
oldest: Shows saved local logs, starting at the oldest local log
newest: Shows saved local logs, starting at the newest local log
* When P2 is omitted, oldest is assumed.
P3: Terminal type { terminal | free }
terminal: Forcibly begins a new line at column 80 and shows local logs
free: Shows local logs without forcibly beginning a new line
* When P3 is omitted, free is assumed.

Default value None
Usage condition You can save local logs up to about 2MB.
Note None
Network Management
18-24
Input example
*Switch# show syslog local
Syslog Local Table
==================
Index Date Time Log Text
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 01/01/2000 00:26:21 local_console:0 clear syslog local
2 01/01/2000 00:36:28 local_console:0 set ip route default 172.16.100.100
3 01/01/2000 00:37:26 local_console:0 set vlan tagbase 17 10-11
4 01/01/2000 00:37:32 local_console:0 set vlan tagbase 18 10-11
5 01/01/2000 00:37:35 local_console:0 set vlan tagbase 19 10-11
6 01/01/2000 00:37:39 local_console:0 set vlan tagbase 20 10-11
7 01/01/2000 00:37:43 local_console:0 set vlan tagbase 21 10-11
8 01/01/2000 00:37:45 local_console:0 set vlan tagbase 22 10-11
9 01/01/2000 00:37:48 local_console:0 set vlan tagbase 23 10-11
10 01/01/2000 00:37:50 local_console:0 set vlan tagbase 24 10-11
11 01/01/2000 00:37:53 local_console:0 set vlan tagbase 25 10-11
12 01/01/2000 00:37:59 local_console:0 set vlan tagbase 26 10
13 01/01/2000 00:38:28 local_console:0 set vlan ethertype 17 0x0600
14 01/01/2000 00:38:31 local_console:0 set vlan ethertype 18 0x0600
15 01/01/2000 00:38:34 local_console:0 set vlan ethertype 19 0x0600
16 01/01/2000 00:38:36 local_console:0 set vlan ethertype 20 0x0600
17 01/01/2000 00:38:39 local_console:0 set vlan ethertype 21 0x0600
18 01/01/2000 00:38:41 local_console:0 set vlan ethertype 22 0x0600

*Switch#

Output items Index: syslog number
Date: Date
Time: Time
Log Text: Log information

Related
commands
set syslog map Setting of syslog message level remapping
clear syslog local Clearing of local log
upload local-syslog Uploading of system log to FTP server


Network Management
18-25

General Privilege Save
clear syslog local
Clearing of local log
Clears a local log.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear syslog local
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show syslog local Display of local log
upload local-syslog Uploading of system log to FTP server


Network Management
18-26

General Privilege Save
set ntp access-time
Setting of NTP access time
Sets NTP server access cycle time.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Access time 0 to 168 (hours)
0: Disables NTP server access

Default value P1: 0 (hour)
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set ntp access-time 168
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
set ntp server Setting of IP address of NTP server
clear ntp server Clearing of IP address of NTP server
show ntp Display of NTP server setting information


Network Management
18-27

General Privilege Save
set ntp server
Setting of IP address of NTP server
Sets the IP address of an NTP server.

Input format [P1] P2
Parameters P1: Server priority { primary | secondary }
primary: Priority server
secondary: Alternate server
* When P1 is omitted, primary is assumed.
P2: IP address

Default value None
Usage
conditions
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the server IP address. ("xxx" is any number.)
If an NTP server exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24,
you can set the server. This setting, however, does not provide correct
communication.

Note None
Input example
*Switch# set ntp server 10.20.30.40
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
set ntp access-time Setting of NTP access time
clear ntp server Clearing of IP address of NTP server
show ntp Display of NTP server setting information


Network Management
18-28

General Privilege Save
show ntp
Display of NTP server setting information
Shows NTP server setting information.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show ntp
NTP Server Configuration
========================
Primary IP Address : 10.20.30.40
Secondary IP Address : 10.20.30.41
Retrieval time (hour): 168

*Switch#

Output items Primary IP Address: IP address of priority server
Secondary IP Address: IP address of alternative server
Retrieval Time (hour): Access time

Related
commands
set ntp access-time Setting of NTP access time
set ntp server Setting of IP address of NTP server
clear ntp server Clearing of IP address of NTP server


Network Management
18-29

General Privilege Save
clear ntp server
Clearing of IP address of NTP server
Clears the IP address of an NTP server.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Server priority { primary | secondary }
primary: Priority server
secondary: Alternate server

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# clear ntp server
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set ntp access-time Setting of NTP access time
set ntp server Setting of IP address of NTP server
show ntp Display of NTP server setting information




















(blank page)

Network Test
19-1













19
Network Test


Network Test
19-2

General Privilege Save
loopback atm
Starting of ATM loopback test
Starts the ATM transmission path loopback test.

Input formats - Specifying F4 level
P1 (f4) P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] [P6] [P7] [P8]

- Specifying F5 level
P1 (f5) P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] [P6] [P7] [P8]
Parameters P1: Level { f4 | f5 }
f4: F4 (VP) level
f5: F5 (VC) level
When f4 is specified in P1
P2: PVC identifier { port number VPI value | PVC name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
When f5 is specified in P1
P2: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | PVC name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
P3: Test section { segment | end-end }
segment: Between nodes
end-end: End
* When P3 is omitted, end-end is assumed.
P4: Location ID: 1-32 digits (hexadecimal)
0x1 to 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
* When P4 is omitted, 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff is assumed.
P5: Indication check { enable | disable }
enable: Enables indication check
disable: Disables indication check
* When P5 is omitted, enable is assumed.
P6: Test count count (1 to 1000) (times)
* When P6 is omitted, 1 is assumed.
P7: Response wait time wait (5 to 10) (seconds)
* When P7 is omitted, 5 is assumed.
P8: Test direction { outside | inside }
outside: Port (line) side (Output direction from CPUSW card to ATM line card)
inside: SW side (Output direction from ATM line card to CPUSW card)
* When P8 is omitted, outside is assumed.

Network Test
19-3
Default values P3: end-end
P4: 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
P5: enable
P6: 1
P7: 5
P8: outside

Usage
conditions
When f4 is specified in P1, this function cannot be executed if the VP connection or the
PVC that includes the targeted VPI has not been registered.
When f5 is specified in P1, this function cannot be executed if the targeted PVC has not
been registered.
You cannot execute two or more of this function simultaneously.
This function cannot be executed if ATM-OAM flow point is set to none (no setting).
To execute a test specifying inside in P8, you need to set the ATMoP format.
When inside is specified in P8, this function cannot be executed if ATM-OAM flow point
of the targeted VPI or PVC is set to end-point.
When the PVC is blocked, loopback cells can be output neither to the outside direction
nor to the inside direction.
PVCs during a loopback test cannot be deleted.
You cannot execute multiple loopback test (specifying 0x0 for the location ID).
* Refer to the "set atm-oam flow" command for ATM-OAM flow point setting.
* Refer to the "set atmop format" command for ATMoP format setting.

Note To cancel this test halfway, press Ctrl + C.
Network Test
19-4

Input examples
*Switch# loopback atm f4 1 0 end-end enable count 3 wait 5 inside
result 1 seq=1 time=470ms
result 1 seq=2 time=460ms
result 1 seq=3 timeout

loopback statistics for 1 0
level f4
section end
indication-check enabled
wait 5s
location-ID 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
direction inside
count = 3, ok = 2, fail = 1 (33% failure)
minimum = 460ms, maximum = 470ms, average = 465ms

*Switch#
*Switch# loopback atm f5 1 0/32 segment enable count 5 wait 5 outside
result 1 seq=1 timeout
result 1 seq=2 timeout
result 1 seq=3 timeout
result 1 seq=4 timeout
result 1 seq=5 timeout

loopback statistics for 1 0/32
level f5
section segment
indication-check enabled
wait 5s
location-ID 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
direction outside
count = 5, ok = 0, fail = 5 (100% failure)
minimum = 0ms, maximum = 0ms, average = 0ms

*Switch#

Network Test
19-5

Output items Result display per loopback test
result a: a is test port number
seq=: Test count
time=: Time required for test (msec)
This item is displayed only when the test result is ok.
timeout: Test timeout
This item is displayed only when the test result is ng.

Statistics display
loopback statistics for a b:
a: Port number that displays statistics.
b: VPI if the test level is f4
VPI/VCI if the test level is f5
level: Test level
section: Test section
indication-check: Indication check setting
wait: Response wait time
location-ID: Location ID
direction: Test direction
count: Number of times loopback test was performed
ok: Number of times loopback test succeeded (normal termination)
fail: Number of times loopback test failed (other than normal termination)
(X% failure): Rate of unsuccessful loopback test
x = { fail } / { test count } x 100
minimum: Minimum test time (*1)
maximum: Maximum test time (*1)
average: Average test time (*1)

(*1) This item is collected only when the test result is ok.

Related
commands
set loopback atm source-id Setting of ATM loopback source ID
show loopback atm source-id Display of ATM loopback source ID
set atm-oam flow Setting of ATM-OAM flow point
show atm-oam config Display of ATM-OAM setting information
set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format
show atmop format Display of ATMoP format information


Network Test
19-6

General Privilege Save
set loopback atm source-id
Setting of ATM loopback source ID
Sets an ATM loopback source ID.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Source ID (1 to 32 digits) (hexadecimal)
0x1 to 0xfffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffe

Default value P1: 0x00000000000000000000000000000001
Usage condition Bits set in P1 must not be entirely zero or 1 (0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff).
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set loopback atm source-id 0x1234
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
loopback atm Starting of ATM loopback test
show loopback atm source-id Display of ATM loopback source ID


Network Test
19-7

General Privilege Save
show loopback atm source-id
Display of ATM loopback source ID
Shows an ATM loopback source ID.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show loopback atm source-id
ATM Loopback Source-ID Table
============================
Source-ID : 0x00000000000000000000000000FFAA33

*Switch#

Output item ATM Loopback Source-ID Table
source-ID: Source ID

Related
commands
loopback atm Starting of ATM loopback test
set loopback atm source-id Setting of ATM loopback source ID


Network Test
19-8

General Privilege Save
set loopback atm keepalive-mode
Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode
Sets whether to enable or disable ATM loopback monitoring for registered connections.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Loopback monitoring mode { enable | disable }
enable: Enables loopback monitoring
disable: Disables loopback monitoring

Default value P1: disable
Usage condition None
Notes Timeout for each PVC is 5 seconds and the monitoring period for all PVCs is 5 minutes.
When loopback monitoring is enabled, monitoring statistical information is cleared.

Input example
*Switch# set loopback atm keepalive-mode enable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set loopback atm keepalive Setting of ATM loopback monitoring
function
show loopback atm keepalive config Display of ATM loopback monitoring
configuration
show loopback atm keepalive information Display of ATM loopback monitoring
information
clear loopback atm keepalive Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring
function


Network Test
19-9

General Privilege Save
show loopback atm keepalive config
Display of ATM loopback monitoring configuration
Shows an ATM loopback monitoring configuration.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number [VPI value] | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
* When the VCI value is omitted, the loopback monitoring configurations set for the
specified VPI value are shown.
* When the VPI value is omitted, the loopback monitoring configurations set for the
specified port number are shown.
* When P1 is omitted, the loopback monitoring configurations of all ports are shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Network Test
19-10

Input example
*Switch# show loopback atm keepalive config
ATM Loopback Configuration Table
================================
Keepalive-Mode : enabled

ATM Loopback Cell F4 Configuration Table
========================================
Port VPI Section Direction Success Threshold Fail Threshold
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 segment outside 10 10
16 1 end inside 10 10

ATM Loopback Cell F4 Location-ID
================================
Port VPI Location-ID
---------------------------------------------
1 0 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
16 1 0x00000000000000000000000000000001

ATM Loopback Cell F5 Configuration Table
========================================
Port VPI/VCI Section Direction Success Threshold Fail Threshold
--------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1/32 segment outside 10 10
16 2/33 end inside 10 10

ATM Loopback Cell F5 Location-ID
================================
Port VPI/VCI Location-ID
-------------------------------------------------
1 1/32 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
16 2/33 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff

*Switch#

Network Test
19-11

Output items ATM Loopback Configuration Table
keepalive-mode: Loopback monitoring mode
ATM Loopback Cell F4 Configuration Table
Port: Port number
VPI: VPI value
Section: Test section
Direction: Test direction
Success Threshold: Threshold for monitoring result change
Fail Threshold: Threshold for monitoring result change
ATM Loopback Cell F4 Location-ID
Port: Port number
VPI: VPI value
Location-ID: Location ID
ATM Loopback Cell F5 Configuration Table
Port: Port number
VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value
Section: Test section
Direction: Test direction
Success Threshold: Threshold for monitoring result change
Fail Threshold: Threshold for monitoring result change
ATM Loopback Cell F5 Location-ID
Port: Port number
VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value
Location-ID: Location ID

Related
commands
set loopback atm keepalive-mode Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode
set loopback atm keepalive Setting of ATM loopback monitoring
function
show loopback atm keepalive information Display of ATM loopback monitoring
information
clear loopback atm keepalive Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring
function


Network Test
19-12

General Privilege Save
set loopback atm keepalive
Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function
Sets a PVC for which ATM loopback monitoring is performed.
Also sets a level, location ID, test section, and thresholds for changing the loopback monitoring result.

Input formats - Specifying F4 level
P1 (f4) P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] [P6] [P7]
- Specifying F5 level
P1 (f5) P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] [P6] [P7]
Parameters P1: Level { f4 | f5 }
f4: F4 (VP) level
f5: F5 (VC) level
When f4 is specified in P1
P2: PVC identifier { port number VPI value | PVC name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
When f5 is specified in P1
P2: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | PVC name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (Multiple specification is allowed for VCI value only.)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
P3: Test section { segment | end-end }
segment: Between nodes
end-end: End
* WhenP3 is omitted, end-end is assumed.
P4: Location ID: 1-32 digits (hexadecimal)
0x1 to 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
* When P4 is omitted, 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff is assumed.
P5: Threshold for changing loopback monitoring result (success) success (1 to 10)
* When P5 is omitted, 1 is set.
P6: Threshold for changing loopback monitoring result (fail) fail (1 to 10)
* When P6 is omitted, 1 is assumed.
P7: Monitoring direction { outside | inside }
outside: Port (line) side (Output direction from CPUSW card to ATM line card)
inside: SW side (Output direction from ATM line card to CPUSW card)
* When P7 is omitted, outside is assumed.

Network Test
19-13
Default values P3: end-end
P4: 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
P5: 1
P6: 1
P7: outside

Usage
conditions
When f4 is specified in P1, this function cannot be executed if the VP connection or the
PVC that includes the targeted VPI has not been registered.
When f5 is specified in P1, this function cannot be executed if the targeted PVC has not
been registered.
You cannot simultaneously set F4 monitoring and F5 monitoring specifying an identical
VPI.
You cannot simultaneously set monitoring to both outside and inside directions for an
identical VPI and VCI.
If the loopback monitoring configuration is changed, monitoring statistical information
for the PVC for which loopback monitoring is performed is cleared.
This function cannot be executed if ATM-OAM flow point is set to none (no setting).
To execute a test specifying inside in P7, you need to set the ATMoP format.
When inside is specified in P7, this function cannot be executed if ATM-OAM flow point
of the targeted VPI or PVC is set to end-point.
When the PVC is blocked, loopback cells can be output neither to the outside direction
nor to the inside direction.
You cannot execute multiple loopback test (specifying 0x0 for the location ID).
* Refer to the "set atm-oam flow" command for ATM-OAM flow point setting.
* Refer to the "set atmop format" command for ATMoP format setting.

Notes If the PVC is cleared, the monitoring settings of this function for the PVC are also
cleared.
If all the PVCs that include a certain VPI are cleared, the monitoring settings of this
function for the VP are also cleared.
The monitoring settings changed during loopback monitoring are reflected in the next
period.

Input examples
*Switch# set loopback atm keepalive f4 3 10 segment 0x1234 success 10
fail 5
*Switch# set loopback atm keepalive f5 4 10/33
*Switch#

Output item

Related
commands
set loopback atm keepalive-mode Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode
show loopback atm keepalive config Display of ATM loopback monitoring
configuration
show loopback atm keepalive information Display of ATM loopback monitoring
information
clear loopback atm keepalive Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring
function
set atm-oam flow Setting of ATM-OAM flow point
show atm-oam config Display of ATM-OAM setting information
set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format
show atmop format Display of ATMoP format information
Network Test
19-14

General Privilege Save
show loopback atm keepalive information
Display of ATM loopback monitoring information
Shows ATM loopback monitoring information.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number [VPI value] | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
* When the VCI value is omitted, the loopback monitoring information set for the
specified VPI value is shown.
* When the VPI value is omitted, the loopback monitoring information set for the
specified port number is shown.
* When P1 is omitted, the loopback monitoring information of all ports is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show loopback atm keepalive information
ATM Loopback Configuration Table
================================
Keepalive-Mode : enabled

ATM Loopback F4 Status Table
============================
Port VPI Section Direction Test Status Last Result Count(ok/test)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 segment outside success ok 1/10
16 1 end inside --- --- 0/0

ATM Loopback F5 Status Table
============================
Port VPI/VCI Section Direction Test Status Last Result Count(ok/test)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1/32 segment outside fail timeout 0/100
16 2/33 end inside success ok 10/10

*Switch#

Network Test
19-15

Output items ATM Loopback Configuration Table
keepalive-mode: Loopback monitoring mode
ATM Loopback F4 Status Table
Port: Port number
VPI: VPI value
Section: Test section
Direction : Test direction
Test Status: Monitoring status (success/fail)
Last Result: Last loopback test result (ok/timeout)
Count: Number of times loopback test succeeded/total number of loopback
transmissions
ATM Loopback F5 Status Table
Port: Port number
VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value
Section: Test section
Direction : Test direction
Test Status: Monitoring status (success/fail)
Last Result: Last loopback test result (ok/timeout)
Count: Number of times loopback test succeeded/total number of loopback
transmissions

Related
commands
set loopback atm keepalive-mode Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode
set loopback atm keepalive Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function
show loopback atm keepalive config Display of ATM loopback monitoring
configuration
clear loopback atm keepalive Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring function


Network Test
19-16

General Privilege Save
clear loopback atm keepalive
Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring function
Clears a PVC for which ATM loopback monitoring is performed.

Input formats - Specifying F4 level
P1 (f4) P2
- Specifying F5 level
P1 (f5) P2
- Specifying port number
P1 (port number)
Parameters P1: Level { f4 | f5 } or port number
f4: F4 (VP) level
f5: F5 (VC) level
Port number: 1 to 16, 33 to 48 (single specification)
* When the port number is specified, all F4- and F5-level loopback monitoring
configurations of the specified port are cleared.
When f4 is specified in P1
P2: PVC identifier { port number [VPI value] | PVC name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
* When VPI value is omitted, all monitoring settings for the specified port at
the P1-specified level are cleared.
When f5 is specified in P1
P2: PVC identifier { port number [VPI value/VCI value] | PVC name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all monitoring settings for the
specified port at the P1-specified level are cleared.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes The monitoring settings cleared during loopback monitoring are not reflected right after
execution of the command. Reflection requires up to 5 minutes because loopback
monitoring is executed in 5 minute periods.
If the PVC whose monitoring settings are to be cleared has been registered, a
loopback cell may be sent to the PVC once within 5 minutes after the monitoring
settings are cleared.

Network Test
19-17
Input examples
*Switch# clear loopback atm keepalive f4 1 10
*Switch# clear loopback atm keepalive f5 1 0/32
*Switch# clear loopback atm keepalive 1
*Switch#
Output item



Related
commands
set loopback atm keepalive-mode Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode
set loopback atm keepalive Setting of ATM loopback monitoring
function
show loopback atm keepalive config Display of ATM loopback monitoring
configuration
show loopback atm keepalive information Display of ATM loopback monitoring
information



















(blank page)

Monitors
20-1













20
Monitors


Monitors
20-2

General Privilege Save
show counter port
Display of port counter
Shows various counter information for transmission and reception per port.

Input formats - Realtime showing
P1 (real) P2
- Detailed showing
P1 (detail) P2
Parameters P1: Showing type { real | detail }
real: Realtime showing
detail: Detailed showing
P2: Port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
* When detail is specified in P1, you can specify only one port.
* When real is specified in P1, you can specify multiple ports.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes Pressing [Ctrl]+[C] in real-time showing enables you to end port counter showing.
If the counter value exceeds 32 bits, it is returned to 0 and then incremented from 0.
If discarding is caused in the device, even the output port may increment the discard
counter value.
When it receives a frame of large size (FE: frames of 8 kilobytes or more, GbE: frames
of 16 kilobytes or more), the line module may shorten the frame size and increment the
error counter value (e.g., RxJabbers).

Monitors
20-3

Input examples
*Switch# show counter port real 17,25
Port Counter Table
==================
Last All Time Clearing of Port Counter unknown hour
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Port Link Pkts(Rx) Pkts(Tx) | Port Link Pkts(Rx) Pkts(Tx)
=====================================+======================================
17 down 0 0 | 25 down 0 0

Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c]

*Switch#
*Switch# show counter port detail 18
Port Counter Table
==================
Port : 18
Link Status : up

Last Clearing Time of Port Counter 0:00:01
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Item Counts | Item Counts
===================================+===========================================
RxOctets : 0 | TxOctets : 0
RxPkts : 0 | TxPkts : 0
RxDropEvents : 0 |
RxErrors : 0 | TxErrors : 0
RxUndersizePkts : 0 |
RxFragments : 0 |
Rx64octs : 0 |
Rx65to127octs : 0 |
Rx128to255octs : 0 |
Rx256to511octs : 0 |
Rx512to1023octs : 0 |
Rx1024to1518octs : 0 |
RxCRCErrors : 0 |
RxOversizePkts : 0 |
RxJabbers : 0 |
| TxCollisions : 0
RxUcastPkts : 0 | TxUcastPkts : 0
RxMcastPkts : 0 | TxMcastPkts : 0
RxBcastPkts : 0 | TxBcastPkts : 0
RxUnsupp : 0 | TxUnsupp : 0
RxDiscards : 0 | TxDiscards : 0

*Switch#

Output items Last clearing time of port counter: Elapsed time of counter collection
(Realtime showing)
The elapsed time of counter collection for the entire device is shown in the
hour:minute:second format.
When the elapsed time exceeds 24 hours, "over 24 hour" is shown.
If the port counter is cleared per port, "unknown hour" is shown.
Clearing all the port counters also clears the elapsed time of counter collection for
the device at the same time.
(Detailed showing)
The elapsed time of counter collection for the specified port is shown in the
hour:minute:second format.
When the elapsed time exceeds 24 hours, "over 24 hour" is shown.
Monitors
20-4
Clearing the port counter also clears the elapsed time of counter collection for the
port at the same time.

RxOctets: Number of receiving octets
RxPkts: Number of receiving frames
RxDropEvents: Number of times discard event occurred (Fixed to 0)
RxErrors: Number of frames where receiving error occurred
RxUndersizePkts: Number of received frames/received error frames where the data
length is less than 64 octets
RxFragments: Number of received error frames where the data length is less than
64 octets
Rx64octs: Number of received frames where the data length is 64 octets
Rx65to127octs: Number of received frames where the data length is 65 to 127
octets

Rx128to255octs: Number of received frames where the data length is 128 to 255
octets

Rx256to511octs: Number of received frames where the data length is 256 to 511
octets
Rx512to1023octs: Number of received frames where the data length is 512 to 1023
octets
Rx1024to1518octs: Number of received frames where the data length is 1024 to 1518
octets
RxCRCErrors: Number of received alignment/FCS error frames
RxOversizePkts: Number of received frames/received error frames where the data
length is greater than or equal to the set frame size
RxJabbers: Number of received error frames where the data length is greater
than or equal to the set frame size
RxUcastPkts: Number of received unicast frames
RxMcastPkts: Number of receiving multicast frames
RxBcastPkts: Number of receiving broadcast frames
RxUnsupp: Number of received and discarded unsupported packages
RxDiscards: Number of frames discarded for reasons other than receiving
errors

TxOctets: Number of sent octets
TxPkts: Number of sent frames
TxErrors: Number of frames where sending error occurred
TxCollisions: Number of collision frames (Fixed to 0)
TxUcastPkts: Number of sent unicast frames
TxMcastPkts: Number of sent multicast frames
TxBcastPkts: Number of sent broadcast frames
TxUnsupp: Number of sent and discarded unsupported frames
TxDiscards: Number of frames discarded for reasons other than sending errors

Related
commands
clear counter port Clearing of port counter
show counter discard Display of discard counter


Monitors
20-5

General Privilege Save
clear counter port
Clearing of port counter
Clears various counter information for transmission and reception per port.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number (17 to 26) (single specification)
* When P1 is omitted, counter information of all the ports is cleared.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note When port specification is omitted in P1, execution is confirmed after this command is
entered.

Input example
*Switch# clear counter port 17
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show counter port Display of port counter
show counter discard Display of discard counter


Monitors
20-6

General Privilege Save
show counter discard
Display of discard counter
Shows discard counter information per port.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Port number (17 to 26) (single specification)

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note If discarding is caused in the device, even the output port may increment the discard
counter value.
When a frame is not delivered owing to transfer blocking of port isolate function, the
discard counter value may increment at the input port.
Monitors
20-7

Input example
*Switch# show counter discard 17
Discard Counter Table
=====================
Port : 17
Link Status : down

Line Discard Counter Table
==========================
Item Pkts | Item Pkts
----------------------------+--------------------------------
RxUnknownTPID : 0 | TxUnknownTPID : 0
RxUnknownVID : 0 |

QoS Discard Counter Table
=========================
Item Pkts | Item Pkts
----------------------------+--------------------------------
RxDisInQoSPkts : 0 | TxDisOutQoSPkts : 0
RxFilterPkts : 0 |

L2SW Discard Counter Table
==========================
Item Pkts | Item Pkts
----------------------------+--------------------------------
RxDropPkts : 0 | TxDropPkts : 0
| TxQueue0DisPkts : 0
| TxQueue1DisPkts : 0
| TxQueue2DisPkts : 0
| TxQueue3DisPkts : 0
| TxQueue4DisPkts : 0
| TxQueue5DisPkts : 0
*Switch#

Output items Port: Port number
Link Status: Physical link status of port
up: Link up status
down: Link down status
RxUnknownTPID: Number of unsupported TPID receiving frames or number of
discarded receiving frames whose Ethernet types are 0x8100 on
portbase Untag set port
RxUnknownVID: Number of received and discarded unsupported VID frames
TxUnknownTPID: Number of unsupported TPID sending frames or number of
discarded sending frames whose Ethernet types are 0x8100 on
portbase Untag set port
RxDisInQoSPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the maximum
bandwidth limit function of the input port
TxDisOutQoSPkts: Number of sending frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth
limit function of the output port
RxFilterPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the input filtering
function
RxDropPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded as invalid frames by L2SW
TxDropPkts: Number of frames discarded by L2SW before being enqueued for
sending
Monitors
20-8
TxQueue0DisPkts: Number of sending frames discarded by L2SW (without class)
(Fixed to 0)
TxQueue1DisPkts: Number of ClassD sending frames discarded by L2SW
TxQueue2DisPkts: Number of ClassC sending frames discarded by L2SW
TxQueue3DisPkts: Number of ClassB sending frames discarded by L2SW
TxQueue4DisPkts: Number of ClassA sending frames discarded by L2SW
TxQueue5DisPkts: Number of control frame sending frames from CPU discarded by
L2SW (Fixed to 0)

Related
commands
show counter port Display of port counter
clear counter port Clearing of port counter


Monitors
20-9

General Privilege Save
set counter vlan entry
Registration of VLAN counter
Registers counter information collection conditions per VLAN.

Input format P1 P2 P3
Parameters P1: Counter collection cycle { short | long }
short: Short cycle
long: Long cycle
P2: Port number (17 to 26) (single specification)
P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note The maximum number of VLAN counter registrations is given below.
- Maximum number of short cycle collection VLAN counter registrations per device: 16
- Maximum number of long cycle collection VLAN counter registrations per device: 256
- Maximum number of VLAN counter registrations per port: 64
Input example
*Switch# set counter vlan entry long 17 4094
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show counter vlan value Display of VLAN counter
show counter vlan entry Display of VLAN counter registration information
clear counter vlan entry Clearing of VLAN counter registration


Monitors
20-10

General Privilege Save
show counter vlan entry
Display of VLAN counter registration information
Shows registered counter collection condition information per VLAN.

Input format P1 [P2 [P3]]
Parameters P1: Counter collection cycle { short | long }
short: Short cycle
long: Long cycle
P2: Port number (17 to 26) (single specification)
* When P2 is omitted, registered counter collection condition information of all the
ports is shown.
P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
* When P3 is omitted, registered counter collection condition information of all the
VLANs is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show counter vlan entry long
VLAN Counter Entry (Long Cycle)
===============================
Entry Count : 3

Port VID Name
--------------------------------------------
17 100 VID-100
24 4094 VID-4094
25 4094 VID-4094

*Switch#
Output items Entry Count: Number of counter collection condition information registered in the
specified collection cycle
Port: Port number
VID: VLAN ID
Name: VLAN name

Related
commands
show counter vlan value Display of VLAN counter
set counter vlan entry Registration of VLAN counter
clear counter vlan entry Clearing of VLAN counter registration
Monitors
20-11

General Privilege Save
clear counter vlan entry
Clearing of VLAN counter registration
Clears registered counter information collection conditions per VLAN.

Input format P1 P2 [P3]
Parameters P1: Counter collection cycle { short | long }
short: Short cycle
long: Long cycle
P2: Port number (17 to 26) (single specification)
P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
* When P3 is omitted, the registered counter information collection conditions of all
the VLANs are cleared.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note When P3 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command is entered.
Input example
*Switch# clear counter vlan entry long 17 100
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set counter vlan entry Registration of VLAN counter
show counter vlan entry Display of VLAN counter registration information


Monitors
20-12

General Privilege Save
show counter vlan value
Display of VLAN counter
Shows various counter information for transmission and reception per VLAN.

Input formats - Short-cycle realtime showing
P1 (short) P2 (real) P3 [P4]
- Short-cycle showing (detailed/realtime detailed)
P1 (short) P2 (detail | real-detail) P3 P4 [P5]
- Specifying long-cycle showing items
P1 (long) P3 P4 [P5]
Parameters P1: Counter collection cycle { short | long }
short: Short cycle
long: Long cycle
When short is specified in P1
P2: Showing type { real | detail | real-detail }
real: Realtime showing (Multiple indexes can be specified.)
detail: Detailed showing (single index specification)
real-detail: Detailed realtime showing (single index specification)
P3: Port number (17 to 26) (single specification)
P4: VLAN identifier { VLAN-ID | VLAN-name }
VLAN-ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.)
VLAN-name: 1 to 32 characters
* Only when real is specified in P2, multiple indexes can be specified.
* Only when real is specified in P2, P4 can be omitted.
When P4 is omitted, only the number of lines that can be displayed is shown in
ascending order of registered VLAN IDs.
When detail or real-detail is specified in P2, or when long is specified in P1
P5: Display item specification { priority | class }
priority (0 to 7)
class { class-a | class-b | class-c | class-d }
* When P5 is omitted, the integrated value of all the priorities is shown.



Default value None
Usage condition None
Monitors
20-13
Notes Using VLAN counter display requires that counter information collection conditions per
VLAN be registered in advance.
For realtime showing or detailed realtime showing, pressing [Ctrl]+[C] enables you to
end counter information showing.
If the counter value exceeds either of 64 bits, the value will be returned to zero and then
incremented from zero again.
The CoS priority mapping setup port shows post-mapping priority values.
The portbase VLAN setup port increments the VLAN counter when the priority value is
0. (However, the CoS priority mapping setup port shows post-mapping priority values.)
If no priority is mapped to the specified class, class information and target counter items
are shown by hyphens "---".
There may be a case that some of counters cannot be displayed when the specification
exceeds the maximum display number of VIDs. If there is any counter not displayed, a
sentence will be displayed to indicate it.

Input example
*Switch# show counter vlan value short real 17 4094
VLAN Counter Table (Short Cycle)
================================
Port : 17
------------------------------------------------
VID Pkts(Rx) Pkts(Tx)
================================================
4094 0 0

Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c]

*Switch#
*Switch# show counter vlan value short real-detail 17 4094 0
VLAN Counter Table (Short Cycle)
================================
Port : 17
VID : 4094
Name : VID-4094
Kind : Priority.0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Item Counts | Item Counts
===================================+===================================
RxOcts : 0 | TxOcts : 0
RxUcastOcts : 0 | TxUcastOcts : 0
RxMcastOcts : 0 | TxMcastOcts : 0
RxBcastOcts : 0 | TxBcastOcts : 0
RxDisInQoSOcts : 0 |
RxPkts : 0 | TxPkts : 0
RxUcastPkts : 0 | TxUcastPkts : 0
RxMcastPkts : 0 | TxMcastPkts : 0
RxBcastPkts : 0 | TxBcastPkts : 0
RxDisInQoSPkts : 0 |

*Switch#
*Switch# show counter vlan value long 17 4094 class-a
VLAN Counter Table (Long Cycle)
===============================
Port : 17
VID : 4094
Name : VID-4094
Kind : Class-A
Monitors
20-14

Class Information
=================
In-Priority : 6,7
Out-Priority : 6,7
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Item Counts | Item Counts
===================================+===================================
RxOcts : 0 | TxOcts : 0
RxUcastOcts : 0 | TxUcastOcts : 0
RxMcastOcts : 0 | TxMcastOcts : 0
RxBcastOcts : 0 | TxBcastOcts : 0
RxDisInQoSOcts : 0 |
RxPkts : 0 | TxPkts : 0
RxUcastPkts : 0 | TxUcastPkts : 0
RxMcastPkts : 0 | TxMcastPkts : 0
RxBcastPkts : 0 | TxBcastPkts : 0
RxDisInQoSPkts : 0 |

*Switch#

Output items Port: Port number
VID: VLAN ID
Name: VLAN name
Kind: Priority value to be shown

[Realtime sowing]
Pkts(Rx): Number of receiving frames
Pkts(Tx): Number of sending frames

[Detailed showing]
RxOcts: Number of receiving octets
RxUcastOcts: Number of receiving unicast octets
RxMcastOcts: Number of receiving multicast octets
RxBcastOcts: Number of receiving broadcast octets
RxDisInQoSOcts: Number of receiving octets discarded by the maximum bandwidth
limit function of the input port
RxPkts: Number of receiving frames
RxUcastPkts: Number of receiving unicast frames
RxMcastPkts: Number of receiving multicast frames
RxBcastPkts: Number of receiving broadcast frames
RxDisInQoSPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth
limit function of the input port
TxOcts : Number of sending octets
TxUcastOcts: Number of sending unicast octets
TxMcastOcts: Number of sending multicast octets
TxBcastOcts: Number of sending broadcast octets
TxPkts: Number of sending frames
TxUcastPkts: Number of sending unicast frames
TxMcastPkts: Number of sending multicast frames
TxBcastPkts: Number of sending broadcast frames


Monitors
20-15
[Class showing]
In-Priority: Priority value for class of input port to be shown
Out-Priority: Priority value for class of output port to be shown

Related
commands
clear counter vlan value Clearing of VLAN counter
set counter vlan entry Registration of VLAN counter
show counter vlan entry Display of VLAN counter registration information


Monitors
20-16

General Privilege Save
clear counter vlan value
Clearing of VLAN counter
Clears various counter information for transmission and reception per VLAN.

Input format P1 [P2 [P3]]
Parameters P1: Counter collection cycle { short | long }
short: Short cycle
long: Long cycle
P2: Port number (17 to 26) (single specification)
* When P2 is omitted, counter information of all the ports is cleared.
P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)
VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters
* When P3 is omitted, counter information of all the VLANs is cleared.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note After this command has been entered, execution is confirmed.
Input example
*Switch# clear counter vlan value long 17
Would you like to clear the counter? :(Y/N): y
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show counter vlan value Display of VLAN counter
show counter vlan entry Display of VLAN counter registration information


Monitors
20-17

General Privilege Save
set counter pvc entry
Registration of PVC for OAM counter
Registers a PVC for the OAM counter.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number VPI value | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (Multiple values can be specified only for VCI.)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)

Default value None
Usage condition If no PVC is registered, you cannot execute this command.
Note When a PVC is cleared, the corresponding PVC for the OAM counter is also cleared.
Input example
*Switch# set counter pvc entry 1 0/16383
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
set pvc static Registration of PVC
clear pvc static Clearing of PVC
show counter pvc entry Display of PVC for OAM counter
clear counter pvc entry Clearing of PVC for OAM counter


Monitors
20-18

General Privilege Save
show counter pvc entry
Display of PVC for OAM counter
Shows the PVC for the OAM counter.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number [VPI value] | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (Multiple values can be specified only for VCI.)
- VPI value (Multiple values can be specified.)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
* When P1 is omitted, the PVCs for all OAM counters are shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show counter pvc entry
PVC Counter Entry
=================
Entry Count : 3

Port VPI/VCI Name
-----------------------------------------------
1 0/16383
10 63/---
16 255/255 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz012345

*Switch#

Output items Entry Count: Number of PVCs for OAM counter
Port: Port number
VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value
Name: PVC name

Related
commands
set counter pvc entry Registration of PVC for OAM counter
clear counter pvc entry Clearing of PVC for OAM counter


Monitors
20-19

General Privilege Save
clear counter pvc entry
Clearing of PVC for OAM counter
Clears a PVC for the OAM counter.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number [VPI value] | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)
* When specification of the VPI value or VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all the OAM
counter PVC registrations for the specified port number are deleted.

Default value None
Usage condition If no PVC is registered, you cannot execute this command (except when the port
number is specified).
Notes When only the port number is specified and when the VPI value is specified (when VC
connection is registered), execution is confirmed after this command is entered.
Also, the PVCs for all OAM counters included are deleted.

Input example
*Switch# clear counter pvc entry 1
Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
clear pvc static Clearing of PVC
show counter pvc entry Display of PVC for OAM counter
clear counter pvc entry Clearing of PVC for OAM counter


Monitors
20-20

General Privilege Save
show counter cell
Display of cell counter information
Shows various cell counter information per port.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Showing type { real | detail }
real: Realtime showing
detail: Detailed showing
P2: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
* You can specify multiple port numbers when real is specified in P1.

Default value None
Usage condition Specify the root port number for the port for which an IMA group is set. (Otherwise, no
information is shown.)

Notes The OAM cell counter shows the counter value of the PVC for OAM counter already
registered.
When the root port of an IMA group is specified, the counter information is shown per
IMA group.
To display the counter information per port under IMA group, use the "show counter cell
ima-port" command.
If the counter value exceeds the counter bit width, it is cleared to zero and then
incremented.

Monitors
20-21

Input examples
*Switch# show counter cell real 1
Cell Counter Table
==================
Port Cells(Rx) Cells(Tx)
--------------------------------------------------
1 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615

Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c]

*Switch#
*Switch# show counter cell detail 1
Cell Counter Table
==================
Port : 1-2

Item Counts | Item Counts
----------------------------------------+---------------------------------------
RxCells : 18446744073709551615 | TxCells : 18446744073709551615
RxErrors : 18446744073709551615 | TxErrors : 0
RxQoSDiscards : 0 | TxQoSDiscards : 18446744073709551615
RxF4SegAIS : 18446744073709551615 | TxF4SegAIS : 18446744073709551615
RxF4SegRDI : 18446744073709551615 | TxF4SegRDI : 18446744073709551615
RxF4SegLoopback: 18446744073709551615 | TxF4SegLoopback: 18446744073709551615
RxF4SegOthers : 18446744073709551615 | TxF4SegOthers : 18446744073709551615
RxF4EndAIS : 18446744073709551615 | TxF4EndAIS : 18446744073709551615
RxF4EndRDI : 18446744073709551615 | TxF4EndRDI : 18446744073709551615
RxF4EndLoopback: 18446744073709551615 | TxF4EndLoopback:18446744073709551615
RxF4EndOthers : 18446744073709551615 | TxF4EndOthers : 18446744073709551615
RxF5SegAIS : 18446744073709551615 | TxF5SegAIS : 18446744073709551615
RxF5SegRDI : 18446744073709551615 | TxF5SegRDI : 18446744073709551615
RxF5SegLoopback: 18446744073709551615 | TxF5SegLoopback:18446744073709551615
RxF5SegOthers : 18446744073709551615 | TxF5SegOthers : 18446744073709551615
RxF5EndAIS : 18446744073709551615 | TxF5EndAIS : 18446744073709551615
RxF5EndRDI : 18446744073709551615 | TxF5EndRDI : 18446744073709551615
RxF5EndLoopback: 18446744073709551615 | TxF5EndLoopback:18446744073709551615
RxF5EndOthers : 18446744073709551615 | TxF5EndOthers : 18446744073709551615

*Switch#

Output items [Realtime showing]
Port: Port number
Cells(Rx): Number of receiving cells
Cells(Tx): Number of sending cells

[Detailed showing]
Port: Port number (when an IMA group is set, all port numbers under the IMA group)
RxCells: Number of receiving cells
RxErrors: Number of discarded receiving error cells
RxQoSDiscards: Number of discarded receiving shaper cells (fixed to 0)
RxF4SegAIS: VP-AIS cell of receiving segment
RxF4SegRDI: VP-RDI cell of receiving segment
RxF4SegLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F4-level segment
RxF4SegOthers: Other receiving cells of F4-level segment
RxF4EndAIS: VP-AIS cell of receiving end
RxF4EndRDI: VP-RDI cell of receiving end
RxF4EndLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F4-level end
Monitors
20-22
RxF4EndOthers: Other receiving cells of F4-level end
RxF5SegAIS: VC-AIS cell of receiving segment
RxF5SegRDI: VC-RDI cell of receiving segment
RxF5SegLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F5-level segment
RxF5SegOthers: Other receiving cells of F5-level segment
RxF5EndAIS: VC-AIS cell of receiving end
RxF5EndRDI: VC-RDI cell of receiving end
RxF5EndLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F5-level end
RxF5EndOthers: Other receiving cells of F5-level end
TxCells: Number of sending cells
TxErrors: Number of discarded sending error cells (fixed to 0)
TxQoSDiscards: Number of discarded sending shaper cells
TxF4SegAIS: VP-AIS cell of sending segment
TxF4SegRDI: VP-RDI cell of sending segment
TxF4SegLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F4-level segment
TxF4SegOthers: Other sending cells of F4-level segment
TxF4EndAIS: VP-AIS cell of sending end
TxF4EndRDI: VP-RDI cell of sending end
TxF4EndLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F4-level end
TxF4EndOthers: Other sending cells of F4-level end
TxF5SegAIS: VC-AIS cell of sending segment
TxF5SegRDI: VC-RDI cell of sending segment
TxF5SegLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F5-level segment
TxF5SegOthers: Other sending cells of F5-level segment
TxF5EndAIS: VC-AIS cell of sending end
TxF5EndRDI: VC-RDI cell of sending end
TxF5EndLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F5-level end
TxF5EndOthers: Other sending cells of F5-level end

Related
commands
clear counter cell Clearing of cell counter information
set counter pvc entry Registration of PVC for OAM counter
clear counter pvc entry Clearing of PVC for OAM counter
set ima group Setting of IMA group
clear ima group Clearing of IMA group


Monitors
20-23

General Privilege Save
show counter cell f4
Display of cell counter information per F4
Shows various cell counter information per F4.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Showing type { real | detail }
real: Realtime showing
detail: Detailed showing
P2: PVC identifier { port number VPI value | PVC name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters) (only VP connection)
* You can specify multiple VPI values when real is specified in P1.

Default value None
Usage
conditions
Specify the root port number for the port for which an IMA group is set. (Otherwise, no
information is shown.)
Using cell counter display requires that a PVC be registered in advance.

Notes The OAM cell counter shows the counter value of the PVC for OAM counter already
registered.
The value of the F5 OAM cell counter corresponding to a VP connection is fixed to 0.
If the counter value exceeds the counter bit width, it is cleared to zero and then
incremented.
Up to 14 indexes can be shown when real is specified.

Monitors
20-24

Input examples
*Switch# show counter cell f4 real 1 0
F4-Cell Counter Table
=====================
Port : 1

VPI Cells(Rx) Cells(Tx)
-------------------------------------------------
0 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615

Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c]

*Switch#
*Switch# show counter cell f4 detail 1 0
F4-Cell Counter Table
=====================
Port : 1-2
VPI : 0

Item Counts | Item Counts
--------------------------------------+-----------------------------------
RxCells : 18446744073709551615 | TxCells : 18446744073709551615
RxErrors : 0 | TxErrors : 0
RxQoSDiscards : 0 | TxQoSDiscards : 0
RxF4SegAIS : 18446744073709551615 | TxF4SegAIS : 18446744073709551615
RxF4SegRDI : 18446744073709551615 | TxF4SegRDI : 18446744073709551615
RxF4SegLoopback: 18446744073709551615 | TxF4SegLoopback: 18446744073709551615
RxF4SegOthers : 18446744073709551615 | TxF4SegOthers : 18446744073709551615
RxF4EndAIS : 18446744073709551615 | TxF4EndAIS : 18446744073709551615
RxF4EndRDI : 18446744073709551615 | TxF4EndRDI : 18446744073709551615
RxF4EndLoopback: 18446744073709551615 | TxF4EndLoopback: 18446744073709551615
RxF4EndOthers : 18446744073709551615 | TxF4EndOthers : 18446744073709551615
RxF5SegAIS : 18446744073709551615 | TxF5SegAIS : 18446744073709551615
RxF5SegRDI : 18446744073709551615 | TxF5SegRDI : 18446744073709551615
RxF5SegLoopback: 18446744073709551615 | TxF5SegLoopback: 18446744073709551615
RxF5SegOthers : 18446744073709551615 | TxF5SegOthers : 18446744073709551615
RxF5EndAI : 18446744073709551615 | TxF5EndAIS : 18446744073709551615
RxF5EndRDI : 18446744073709551615 | TxF5EndRDI : 18446744073709551615
RxF5EndLoopback: 18446744073709551615 | TxF5EndLoopback: 18446744073709551615
RxF5EndOthers : 18446744073709551615 | TxF5EndOthers : 18446744073709551615

*Switch

Output items [Realtime showing]
Port: Port number
VPI: VPI value
Cells(Rx): Number of receiving cells
Cells(Tx): Number of sending cells

[Detailed showing]
Port: Port number (when an IMA group is set, all port numbers under the IMA group)
VPI: VPI value
RxCells: Number of receiving cells
RxErrors: Number of discarded receiving cells (fixed to 0)
RxQoSDiscards: Number of discarded receiving shaper cells (fixed to 0)
RxF4SegAIS: VP-AIS cell of receiving segment
RxF4SegRDI: VP-RDI cell of receiving segment
RxF4SegLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F4-level segment
Monitors
20-25
RxF4SegOthers: Other receiving cells of F4-level segment
RxF4EndAIS: VP-AIS cell of receiving end
RxF4EndRDI: VP-RDI cell of receiving end
RxF4EndLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F4-level end
RxF4EndOthers: Other receiving cells of F4-level end
RxF5SegAIS: VC-AIS cell of receiving segment
RxF5SegRDI: VC-RDI cell of receiving segment
RxF5SegLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F5-level segment
RxF5SegOthers: Other receiving cells of F5-level segment
RxF5EndAIS: VC-AIS cell of receiving end
RxF5EndRDI: VC-RDI cell of receiving end
RxF5EndLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F5-level end
RxF5EndOthers: Other receiving cells of F5-level end
TxCells: Number of sending cells
TxErrors: Number of discarded sending cells (fixed to 0)
TxQoSDiscards: Number of discarded sending shaper cells (fixed to 0)
TxF4SegAIS: VP-AIS cell of sending segment
TxF4SegRDI: VP-RDI cell of sending segment
TxF4SegLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F4-level segment
TxF4SegOthers: Other sending cells of F4-level segment
TxF4EndAIS: VP-AIS cell of sending end
TxF4EndRDI: VP-RDI cell of sending end
TxF4EndLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F4-level end
TxF4EndOthers: Other sending cells of F4-level end
TxF5SegAIS: VC-AIS cell of sending segment
TxF5SegRDI: VC-RDI cell of sending segment
TxF5SegLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F5-level segment
TxF5SegOthers: Other sending cells of F5-level segment
TxF5EndAIS: VC-AIS cell of sending end
TxF5EndRDI: VC-RDI cell of sending end
TxF5EndLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F5-level end
TxF5EndOthers: Other sending cells of F5-level end

Related
commands
clear counter cell Clearing of cell counter information
set counter pvc entry Registration of PVC for OAM counter
clear counter pvc entry Clearing of PVC for OAM counter
set pvc static Registration of PVC
clear pvc static Clearing of PVC
set ima group Setting of IMA group
clear ima group Clearing of IMA group


Monitors
20-26

General Privilege Save
show counter cell f5
Display of cell counter information per F5
Shows various cell counter information per F5.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Showing type { real | detail }
real: Realtime showing
detail: Detailed showing
P2: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | PVC name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters) (only VC connection)
* You can specify multiple VPI values/VCI values when real is specified in P1.

Default value None
Usage condition Specify the root port number for the port for which an IMA group is set. (Otherwise, no
information is shown.)
Using cell counter display requires that a PVC be registered in advance.
Notes The OAM cell counter shows the counter value of the PVC for OAM counter already
registered.
If the counter value exceeds the counter bit width, it is cleared to zero and then
incremented.
Up to 14 indexes can be shown when real is specified.

Monitors
20-27

Input examples
*Switch# show counter cell f5 real 1 0/16383
F5-Cell Counter Table
=====================
Port : 1

VPI/VCI Cells(Rx) Cells(Tx)
-----------------------------------------------------
0/16383 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615

Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c]

*Switch#
*Switch# show counter cell f5 detail 1 0/16383
F5-Cell Counter Table
=====================
Port : 1-2
VPI/VCI : 0/16383

Item Counts | Item Counts
--------------------------------------+------------------------------------
RxCells : 18446744073709551615 | TxCells : 18446744073709551615
RxErrors : 0 | TxErrors : 0
RxQoSDiscards : 0 | TxQoSDiscards : 0
RxF4SegAIS : 0 | TxF4SegAIS : 0
RxF4SegRDI : 0 | TxF4SegRDI : 0
RxF4SegLoopback: 0 | TxF4SegLoopback : 0
RxF4SegOthers : 0 | TxF4SegOthers : 0
RxF4EndAIS : 0 | TxF4EndAIS : 0
RxF4EndRDI : 0 | TxF4EndRDI : 0
RxF4EndLoopback: 0 | TxF4EndLoopback : 0
RxF4EndOthers : 0 | TxF4EndOthers : 0
RxF5SegAIS : 18446744073709551615 | TxF5SegAIS : 18446744073709551615
RxF5SegRDI : 18446744073709551615 | TxF5SegRDI : 18446744073709551615
RxF5SegLoopback: 18446744073709551615 | TxF5SegLoopback : 18446744073709551615
RxF5SegOthers : 18446744073709551615 | TxF5SegOthers : 18446744073709551615
RxF5EndAIS : 18446744073709551615 | TxF5EndAIS : 18446744073709551615
RxF5EndRDI : 18446744073709551615 | TxF5EndRDI : 18446744073709551615
RxF5EndLoopback: 18446744073709551615 | TxF5EndLoopback : 18446744073709551615
RxF5EndOthers : 18446744073709551615 | TxF5EndOthers : 18446744073709551615

*Switch#

Output items [Realtime showing]
Port: Port number
VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI values
Cells(Rx): Number of receiving cells
Cells(Tx): Number of sending cells

[Detailed showing]
Port: Port number (when an IMA group is set, all port numbers under the IMA group)
VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI values
RxCells: Number of receiving cells
RxErrors: Number of discarded receiving cells (fixed to 0)
RxQoSDiscards: Number of discarded receiving shaper cells (fixed to 0)
RxF4SegAIS: VP-AIS cell of receiving segment (fixed to 0)
RxF4SegRDI: VP-RDI cell of receiving segment (fixed to 0)
RxF4SegLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F4-level segment (fixed to 0)
Monitors
20-28
RxF4SegOthers: Other receiving cells of F4-level segment (fixed to 0)
RxF4EndAIS: VP-AIS cell of receiving end (fixed to 0)
RxF4EndRDI: VP-RDI cell of receiving end (fixed to 0)
RxF4EndLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F4-level end (fixed to 0)
RxF4EndOthers: Other receiving cells of F4-level end (fixed to 0)
RxF5SegAIS: VC-AIS cell of receiving segment
RxF5SegRDI: VC-RDI cell of receiving segment
RxF5SegLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F5-level segment
RxF5SegOthers: Other receiving cells of F5-level segment
RxF5EndAIS: VC-AIS cell of receiving end
RxF5EndRDI: VC-RDI cell of receiving end
RxF5EndLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F5-level end
RxF5EndOthers: Other receiving cells of F5-level end
TxCells: Number of sending cells
TxErrors: Number of sending discard cells (fixed to 0)
TxQoSDiscards: Number of discarded sending shaper cells (fixed to 0)
TxF4SegAIS: VP-AIS cell of sending segment (fixed to 0)
TxF4SegRDI: VP-RDI cell of sending segment (fixed to 0)
TxF4SegLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F4-level segment (fixed to 0)
TxF4SegOthers: Other sending cells of F4-level segment (fixed to 0)
TxF4EndAIS: VP-AIS cell of sending end (fixed to 0)
TxF4EndRDI: VP-RDI cell of sending end (fixed to 0)
TxF4EndLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F4-level end (fixed to 0)
TxF4EndOthers: Other sending cells of F4-level end (fixed to 0)
TxF5SegAIS: VC-AIS cell of sending segment
TxF5SegRDI: VC-RDI cell of sending segment
TxF5SegLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F5-level segment
TxF5SegOthers: Other sending cells of F5-level segment
TxF5EndAIS: VC-AIS cell of sending end
TxF5EndRDI: VC-RDI cell of sending end
TxF5EndLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F5-level end
TxF5EndOthers: Other sending cells of F5-level end

Related
command
clear counter cell Clearing of cell counter information
set counter pvc entry Registration of PVC for OAM counter
clear counter pvc entry Clearing of PVC for OAM counter
set pvc static Registration of PVC
clear pvc static Clearing of PVC
set ima group Setting of IMA group
clear ima group Clearing of IMA group


Monitors
20-29

General Privilege Save
show counter cell ima-port
Display of cell counter information per IMA group port
Shows various cell counter information per port in an IMA group.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: Showing type { real | detail }
real: Realtime showing
detail: Detailed showing
P2: Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
* You can specify multiple port numbers only when real is specified in P1.

Default value None
Usage condition Only ports set for an IMA group can be shown.
Note If the counter value exceeds the counter bit width, it is cleared to zero and then
incremented.
Input example
*Switch# show counter cell ima-port real 1
Cell Counter Table
==================
Port Cells(Rx) Cells(Tx)
--------------------------------------------------
1 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615

Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c]

*Switch#
*Switch# show counter cell ima-port detail 1
Cell Counter Table
==================
Port : 1

Item Counts | Item Counts
-----------------------------------+-----------------------------------
RxCells : 18446744073709551615 | TxCells : 18446744073709551615
RxErrors : 18446744073709551615 | TxErrors 0

*Switch#

Monitors
20-30

Output items [Realtime showing]
Port: Port number
Cells(Rx): Number of receiving cells
Cells(Tx): Number of sending cells

[Detailed showing]
Port: Port number
RxCells: Number of receiving cells
RxErrors: Number of discarded receiving cells
TxCells: Number of sending cells
TxErrors: Number of discarded sending cells (fixed to 0)

Related
commands
clear counter cell Clearing of cell counter information
set ima group Setting of IMA group
clear ima group Clearing of IMA group


Monitors
20-31

General Privilege Save
clear counter cell
Clearing of cell counter information
Clears various cell counter information.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: PVC identifier { port number VPI value/VCI value | port number [VPI value] | PVC
name }
- Port number (1 to 16, 33 to 48) (single specification)
- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)
- VPI value (single specification)
- PVC name (1 to 32 characters)

Default value None
Usage condition If no PVC is registered, you cannot execute this command. (except when the port
number is specified.)
Specify the root port number for the port for which an IMA group is set. (Otherwise, an
error occurs.)

Notes When only the port number is specified and when the VPI value is specified (when VC
connection is registered), execution is confirmed after this command is entered.

Input example
*Switch# clear counter cell 1
Would you like to clear the counters? :(Y/N): y
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
show counter cell Display of cell counter information
show counter cell f4 Display of cell counter information per F4
show counter cell f5 Display of cell counter information per F5
show counter cell ima-port Display of cell counter information per IMA group
port


Monitors
20-32

General Privilege Save
show counter port pmon
Display of port (line) quality counter
Shows the port (line) quality counter information.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Port number (single specification)
When 1ATM155A line card is installed: 1
When 32T1E1H line card is installed: 1 to 16, 33 to 48
When 32T1E1T line card is installed: 1 to 16, 33 to 48

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes Entering this command clears the port (line) quality counter.
When the 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card is installed and the frame format is Unframed,
only LCV Errors are counted. Other counter values are fixed to 0.

Monitors
20-33

Input examples When the 1ATM155A line card is installed

*Switch# show counter port pmon 1
Performance Monitor Counter
===========================
Port : 1: 1

Item Counts | Item Counts
-----------------------------+--------------------------
Section BIP-8 : 65535 |
Line BIP-24 : 1089 | Line FEBE : 2438
Path BIP-8 : 246 | Path FEBE : 11

*Switch#

When the 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card is installed

*Switch# show counter port pmon 1
Performance Monitor Counter
===========================
Port : 1: 1

Item Counts | Item Counts
-----------------------------+---------------------------
FER : 34 | OOF/FEBE : 15
Bit/CRC Error : 34 | LCV Error : 0

*Switch#
Output items port: Port number

When the 1ATM155A line card is installed
Section BIP-8: Number of relay section errors BIP-8 detected in the section overhead
Line BIP-24: Number of section errors BIP-24 detected in the section overhead
Line FEBE: Number of port (line) level far end block errors detected
Path BIP-8: Number of path errors BIP-8 detected in the path overhead
Path FEBE: Number of path level far end block errors detected

When the 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card is installed
FER: Number of framing bit errors detected
OOF/FEBE:
OOF: Number of loss-of-frame-synchronization errors detected (T1 mode)
FEBE: Number of far end block errors detected (E1 mode)
Bit/CRC Error:
Bit Error: Number of bit errors detected (T1 mode)
CRC Error: Number of redundant cyclic check errors detected (E1 mode)
LCV Error: Number of Line Code violation errors detected

Related
command
None

Monitors
20-34

General Privilege Save
set counter ether-oam entry
Registration of EtherOAM counter
Registers collection conditions for an EtherOAM counter.

Input formats - Specifying specific EtherOAM frame
P1 P2 (VLAN ID | untag) P3 P4
- Specifying all EtherOAM frames
P1 P2 (all)
Parameters P1: Port number (25 to 26) (single specification)
P2: Specifying VLAN ID, Untag { untag }, or all EtherOAM frames { all }
VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)
untag: Specifying Untag
all: Specifying all EtherOAM frames
When VLAN ID or untag is specified in P2
P3: MEG level (0 to 7)
P4: EtherOAM type (0 to 255)

Default value None
Usage condition Only one counter can be registered for one port (line).

Note None
Input examples
*Switch@1# set counter ether-oam entry 1/1 1 0 1
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# set counter ether-oam entry 12/1 all
*Switch@1#

Output item



Related
commands
show counter ether-oam entry Display of EtherOAM counter registration information
clear counter ether-oam entry Clearing of EtherOAM counter registration
show counter ether-oam value Display of EtherOAM counter


Monitors
20-35

General Privilege Save
show counter ether-oam entry
Display of EtherOAM counter registration information
Shows registered information of EtherOAM counter collection conditions.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number (25 to 26) (single specification)
* When P1 is omitted, the frame counter settings of all ports (lines) to which counter
is set are shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input examples
*Switch@1# show counter ether-oam entry
Ether OAM Counter Entry
=======================
Port VLAN-ID MEG Level OP-Code
---------------------------------
1/1 1 0 1
12/1 all all all
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show counter ether-oam entry 1/1
Ether OAM Counter Entry
=======================
Port VLAN-ID MEG Level OP-Code
---------------------------------
1/1 1 0 1
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show counter ether-oam entry 12/1
Ether OAM Counter Entry
=======================
Port VLAN-ID MEG Level OP-Code
---------------------------------
12/1 all all all
*Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port number
VLAN-ID: VLAN ID
untag is displayed for untagMEP
* "all" is displayed when the parameter is omitted.
MEG Level: MEG level
* "all" is displayed when the parameter is omitted.
OP-Code: EtherOAM frame type value
* "all" is displayed when the parameter is omitted.
Monitors
20-36

Related
commands
set counter ether-oam entry Registration of EtherOAM counter
clear counter ether-oam entry Clearing of EtherOAM counter registration
show counter ether-oam value Display of EtherOAM counter



Monitors
20-37

General Privilege Save
clear counter ether-oam entry
Clearing of EtherOAM counter registration
Clears registered information of EtherOAM counter collection conditions.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number (25 to 26) (single specification)
* When P1 is omitted, the frame counter settings of all ports (lines) to which counter
is set are cleared.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input examples
*Switch@1# clear counter ether-oam entry 1/1
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# clear counter ether-oam entry
*Switch@1#

Output item



Related
commands
set counter ether-oam entry Registration of EtherOAM counter
show counter ether-oam entry Display of EtherOAM counter registration information
show counter ether-oam value Display of EtherOAM counter


Monitors
20-38

General Privilege Save
show counter ether-oam value
Display of EtherOAM counter
Shows the collection information of EtherOAM counter.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Port number (25 to 26) (single specification)
* When P1 is omitted, the frame counter values of all ports (lines) to which counter
is set are shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input examples
*Switch@1# show counter ether-oam value
Ether OAM Frame Count
=====================
Port RxPkts TxPkts
----------------------------
1/1 1121 1021
12/1 1021 1121

*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show counter ether-oam value 1/1
Ether OAM Frame Count
=====================
Port RxPkts TxPkts
----------------------------
1/1 121 102
*Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port number
RxPkts: Number of received frames
TxPkts: Number of transmitted frames

Related
commands
set counter ether-oam entry Registration of EtherOAM counter
show counter ether-oam entry Display of EtherOAM counter registration information
clear counter ether-oam entry Clearing of EtherOAM counter registration


Monitors
20-39

General Privilege Save
mirror port
Setting of mirroring start or stop
Sets mirroring start or stop.

Input formats -- Stopping mirroring
P1(stop)
- Starting mirroring (with only input-side ports specified for mirroring target)
P1(start) P2 P3
- Starting mirroring (with only output-side ports specified for mirroring target)
P1(start) P2 P4
- Starting mirroring (with input- and output-side ports specified for mirroring
target)
P1(start) P2 P3 P4
P1(start) P2 P4 P3
Parameters P1: Mirroring start or stop { start | stop }
start: Mirroring start
stop: Mirroring stop
*When start is specified in P1
P2: Mirroring output destination port number (17 to 26) (single specification)
P3: Mirroring target port (input-side)
in-port port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)
P4: Mirroring target port (output-side)
out-port port number (17 to 26) (Multiple values can be specified.)

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note In the following cases, you cannot set mirroring start:
- The mirroring output destination port is duplicated with the mirroring target port.
- VLAN is set in the port to be specified as the mirroring output destination.
- Link aggregation is set in the port to be specified as the mirroring output destination.

Input example
*Switch# mirror port start 17 in-port 24 out-port 26
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show mirror port Display of mirroring settings
Monitors
20-40

General Privilege Save
show mirror port
Display of mirroring settings
Shows mirroring settings.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show mirror port
Mirror Information
==================
Mirror To
---------
Port: 17

Mirror From
------------------------------
In Port : 24
Out Port: 26

*Switch#

Output items Mirror To: Mirroring output destination port
Port: Port number
Mirror From: Mirroring target port
In Port: Port number specified on input side
Out Port: Port number specified on output side

Related
command
mirror port Setting of mirroring start or stop

Maintenance and Operation
21-1













21
Maintenance and
Operation


Maintenance and Operation
21-2

General Privilege Save
upload running-config
Uploading of running configuration to FTP server
Uploads running configuration to the FTP server.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: IP address
P2: File name or path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None
Usage
conditions
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the IP address. ("xxx" is any number.) Also, you can set the network addresses
192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correct
communication.

Notes Set an FTP user name and FTP password interactively.
Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphabets, numeric characters, and
symbols and signs "% & , / : = [ ] \ ^ _ { } ~ . -".
You can use "/ : \" only when specifying a path name.
You can use "." only when specifying a file name.
Configuration information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by
the "show running-config" command.

Input example
*Switch# upload running-config 192.168.2.212 test.txt
FTP Login Name : cx2200
FTP Login Password :
Data Transferring.....................................
*Switch#

Output items FTP Login Name: User name used to log in to FTP server
FTP Login Password: User password used to log in to FTP server
FTP Information: FTP server error message (Only when a command error occurs)

Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
download running-config Downloading of running configuration from FTP server
show running-config Display of running configuration
write memory Saving of setting information


Maintenance and Operation
21-3

General Privilege Save
upload startup-config
Uploading of startup configuration to FTP server
Uploads startup configuration to the FTP server.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: IP address
P2: File name or path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None
Usage
conditions
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the IP address. ("xxx" is any number.) Also, you can set the network addresses
192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correct
communication.

Notes Set an FTP user name and FTP password interactively.
Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphabets, numeric characters, and
symbols and signs "% & , / : = [ ] \ ^ _ { } ~ . -".
You can use "/ : \" only when specifying a path name.
You can use "." only when specifying a file name.
Configuration information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by
the "show startup-config" command.

Input example
*Switch# upload startup-config 192.168.2.211 test2.txt
FTP Login Name : cx2200
FTP Login Password :
Data Transferring.....................................
*Switch#

Output items FTP Login Name: User name used to log in to FTP server
FTP Login Password: User password used to log in to FTP server
FTP Information: FTP server error message (Only when a command error occurs)

Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
download startup-config Downloading of startup configuration from FTP
server
show startup-config Display of startup configuration
write memory Saving of setting information
clear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration


Maintenance and Operation
21-4

General Privilege Save
upload local-syslog
Uploading of system log to FTP server
Uploads the system log to the FTP server.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: IP address
P2: File name or path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None
Usage
conditions
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the IP address. ("xxx" is any number.) Also, you can set the network addresses
192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correct
communication.

Notes Set an FTP user name and FTP password interactively.
Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphabets, numeric characters, and
symbols and signs "% & , / : = [ ] \ ^ _ { } ~ . -".
You can use "/ : \" only when specifying a path name.
You can use "." only when specifying a file name.
Local syslog information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by
the "show local syslog" command.

Input example
*Switch# upload local-syslog 192.168.2.211 syslog.txt
FTP Login Name : cx2200
FTP Login Password :
Information is under collection.
Data Transferring........................
*Switch#

Output items FTP Login Name: User name used to log in to FTP server
FTP Login Password: User password used to log in to FTP server
FTP Information: FTP server error message(Only when a command error occurs)

Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
show syslog local Display of local log
clear syslog local Clearing of local log


Maintenance and Operation
21-5

General Privilege Save
upload all-information
Uploading of setting information to FTP server
Uploads setting information to the FTP server.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: IP address
P2: File name or path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None
Usage
conditions
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the IP address. ("xxx" is any number.) Also, you can set the network addresses
192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correct
communication.

Notes Set an FTP user name and FTP password interactively.
Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphabets, numeric characters, and
symbols and signs "% & , / : = [ ] \ ^ _ { } ~ . -".
You can use "/ : \" only when specifying a path name.
You can use "." only when specifying a file name.
Setting information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by the
"show all" command.

Input example
*Switch# upload all-information 192.168.2.211 allinfo.txt
FTP Login Name : cx2200
FTP Login Password :
Information is under collection.
Data Transferring........................
*Switch#

Output items FTP Login Name: User name used to log in to FTP server
FTP Login Password: User password used to log in to FTP server
FTP Information: FTP server error message(Only when a command error occurs)

Related
command
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
show all Display of setting information


Maintenance and Operation
21-6

General Privilege Save
upload fault
Uploading of fault information to FTP server
Uploads fault information to the FTP server.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: IP address
P2: File name or path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None
Usage
conditions
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the IP address. ("xxx" is any number.) Also, you can set the network addresses
192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correct
communication.

Notes Set an FTP user name and FTP password interactively.
Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphabets, numeric characters, and
symbols and signs "% & , / : = [ ] \ ^ _ { } ~ . -".
You can use "/ : \" only when specifying a path name.
You can use "." only when specifying a file name.
Fault information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by the
"show fault present" and "show fault past" commands.

Input example
*Switch# upload fault 192.168.2.211 fault.txt
FTP Login Name : cx2200
FTP Login Password :
Information is under collection.
Data Transferring...........................
*Switch#

Output items FTP Login Name: User name used to log in to FTP server
FTP Login Password: User password used to log in to FTP server
FTP Information: FTP server error message(Only when a command error occurs)

Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
show fault present Display of current fault and alarm information
show fault past Display of past fault information


Maintenance and Operation
21-7

General Privilege Save
download fpga
Downloading of FPGA
Downloads FPGA.

Input format P1 P2 P3
Parameters P1: Card type { cpusw | line1 | line2 }
cpusw: CPUSW card
line1: LINE1 card
line2: LINE2 card
P2: IP address
P3: File name or path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None
Usage
conditions
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the IP address. ("xxx" is any number.) Also, you can set the network addresses
192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correct
communication.

Notes Set an FTP user name and FTP password interactively.
To reflect downloaded data, you must enter the "reset system" command specifying
fpga-version-up parameter or perform Power ON in order to perform a device restart.
Set a file name or a path name + file name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and
[control character]. (However, you can use only the characters that can be recognized
by the FTP server.)
When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.
To stop the communication with FTP server during the download, you can forcibly stop
it with Ctrl+C keys.

Input example
*Switch# download fpga cpusw 192.168.1.30
/data/cx2200_fpga_CPUSW_010001.dlm
FTP Login Name : cx2200
FTP Login Password :
Data
Transferring.......................................................
Writing Flash Memory........................
Writing Flash Memory........................
Writing Flash Memory........................
Writing Flash Memory........................
Writing Flash Memory........................
Writing Flash Memory........................
Writing Flash Memory........................
Writing Flash Memory........................
*Switch#

Maintenance and Operation
21-8
Output items FTP Login Name: User name used to log in to FTP server
FTP Login Password: User password used to log in to FTP server
FTP Information: FTP server error message(Only when a command error occurs)

Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
reset system Resetting of entire device


Maintenance and Operation
21-9

General Privilege Save
download software
Downloading of software
Downloads software.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: IP address
P2: File name or path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None
Usage
conditions
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the IP address. ("xxx" is any number.) Also, you can set the network addresses
192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correct
communication.

Notes Set an FTP user name and FTP password interactively.
Set a file name or a path name + file name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and
[control character]. (However, you can use only the characters that can be recognized
by the FTP server.)
When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.
To stop the communication with FTP server during the download, you can forcibly stop
it with Ctrl+C keys.

Input example
*Switch# download software 10.40.73.200 data/cx2200_soft_010003.dlm
FTP Login Name : cx2200
FTP Login Password :
Data Transferring.................
Writing Flash Memory............
*Switch#

Output items FTP Login Name: User name used to log in to FTP server
FTP Login Password: User password used to log in to FTP server
FTP Information: FTP server error message (Only when a command error occurs)

Related
command
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address


Maintenance and Operation
21-10

General Privilege Save
download running-config
Downloading of running configuration from FTP server
Downloads running configuration from the FTP server.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: IP address
P2: File name or path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None
Usage
conditions
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the IP address. ("xxx" is any number.) Also, you can set the network addresses
192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correct
communication.

Notes FTP transfer may be performed several times according to the configuration size to be
downloaded.
Set an FTP user name and FTP password interactively.
Set a file name or a path name + file name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and
[control character]. (However, you can use only the characters that can be recognized
by the FTP server.)
When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.

Input example
*Switch# download running-config 192.168.2.212 soft_LM/test.txt
FTP Login Name : cx2200
FTP Login Password :
Data Transferring....
Data setting........
*Switch#

Output items FTP Login Name: User name used to log in to FTP server
FTP Login Password: User password used to log in to FTP server
FTP Information: FTP server error message (Only when a command error occurs)

Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
upload running-config Uploading of running configuration to FTP server
show running-config Display of running configuration
write memory Saving of setting information


Maintenance and Operation
21-11

General Privilege Save
download startup-config
Downloading of startup configuration from FTP server
Downloads startup configuration from the FTP server.

Input format P1 P2
Parameters P1: IP address
P2: File name or path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None
Usage
conditions
You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx
as the IP address. ("xxx" is any number.) Also, you can set the network addresses
192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correct
communication.

Notes FTP transfer may be performed several times according to the configuration size to be
downloaded.
Set an FTP user name and FTP password interactively.
Set a file name or a path name + file name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and
[control character]. (However, you can use only the characters that can be recognized
by the FTP server.)
When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.

Input example
*Switch# download startup-config 192.168.2.212 soft_LM/test.txt
FTP Login Name : cx2200
FTP Login Password :
Data Transferring....
Data setting........
Writing Flash Memory........
*Switch#

Output items FTP Login Name: User name used to log in to FTP server
FTP Login Password: User password used to log in to FTP server
FTP Information: FTP server error message(Only when a command error occurs)

Related
commands
set ip address out-band Setting of outband IP address
upload startup-config Uploading of startup configuration to FTP server
show startup-config Display of startup configuration
write memory Saving of setting information
clear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration

Maintenance and Operation
21-12

General Privilege Save
show running-config
Display of running configuration
Shows the current running configuration.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Scroll control { step | non-step }
step: Enables scroll control
non-step: Disables scroll control (display to the end)
* When P1 is omitted, scroll follows scroll control settings.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show running-config non-step
!System : NEC CX2200
!Cpusw : cpusw
!Line1 : 32t1e1h
!Line2 : 2gbe
!Current Software Ver.02.05.01
!Present Time : 01/01/2010 00:47:17

set terminal logout 0
!
!
set port mode atmop 1-16
set vlan portbase 18 100
set vlan portbase 19 300
set pvc static 1 0/32
set pvc static 8 0/32
set atmop format 1 0/32 00:00:00:01:02:03 outer 100 inner 200
set atmop format 8 0/32 00:00:00:04:05:06 outer 300 inner 400
!
set ip address out-band 172.29.88.100 255.255.255.0
set snmp enable
set snmp trap-manager 1 public 100.29.10.5 v1
set snmp trap-manager 2 public 100.29.10.5 v2c
set syslog remote enable
set syslog server 1 100.29.10.5 local0
!
*Switch#

Output item


Maintenance and Operation
21-13

Related
commands
upload running-config Uploading of running configuration to FTP server
download running-config Downloading of running configuration from FTP server
write memory Saving of setting information


Maintenance and Operation
21-14

General Privilege Save
show startup-config
Display of startup configuration
Shows the saved startup configuration.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Scroll control { step | non-step }
step: Enables scroll control
non-step: Disables scroll control (display to the end)
* When P1 is omitted, scroll follows scroll control settings.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Maintenance and Operation
21-15

Input example
*Switch# show startup-config non-step
!System : NEC CX2200
!Cpusw : cpusw
!Line1 : 32t1e1h
!Line2 : 2gbe
!Written Software Ver.02.05.01
!Written Time : 09/10/2010 17:44:43

!
set vlan name 1 abc
set vlan name 2 def
set vlan ethertype 17-24,25,26 0x0600
set vlan portbase 17 1
set vlan portbase 18 1
set vlan portbase 19 1
set vlan portbase 20 1
set vlan portbase 21 1
set vlan portbase 22 1
set vlan portbase 23 1
!
set ip address out-band 100.10.200.100 255.255.255.0
set ip route default 100.10.200.100
set ip route 2 100.16.2.0 255.255.255.0 100.10.202.20
set out-band flowcontrol enable
set snmp enable
set snmp manager 1 public 100.10.200.33 read-write
set snmp trap-manager 1 public 100.10.200.33 v2c
set ntp server secondary 100.10.200.33
set ntp access-time 2
set syslog server 1 100.10.200.33 local0
!
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
upload startup-config Uploading of startup configuration to FTP server
download startup-config Downloading of startup configuration from FTP server
write memory Saving of setting information
clear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration


Maintenance and Operation
21-16

General Privilege Save
set message transmit
Setting of trap transmission selection
Sets trap transmission selection.

Input formats - Specifying private trap
[P1] [P2 (private-trap) [P3]] P4
- Specifying trap-ID
[P1] [P2 (trap-id) [P3]] P4
- Specifying port message or link change
[P1] [P2 (port | link) [P3]] P4
- Specifying fault message
[P1] [P2 (fault) [P3]] P4
- Specifying telnet message
[P1] [P2 (telnet) [P3]] P4
- Specifying maintenance network message
[P1] [P2 (maintenance-network) [P3]] P4
- Specifying ATM OAM alarm
[P1] [P2 (atm-oam) [P3] ] P4
- Specifying EtherOAM alarm
[P1] [P2 (ether-oam) [P3]] P4
- Specifying group below
SFP change information
NTP access error
Spanning tree
MAC learning
Link aggregation
T1E1OAM information
TDMoP information
IMA group
ATM loopback event
EtherRing event
Command
SNMP
[P1] [P2] P4
Parameters P1: Message type { monitor | trap | remote-log | local-log }
monitor: Autonomous message
trap: Trap message
remote-log: Remote log message
local-log: Local log message
* When P1 is omitted, trap transmission selection is set for all the message types.
P2: Message group { private-trap | trap-id | port | link | fault | sfp | ntp | telnet |
maintenance-network | spantree | fdb | aggregation | atm-oam | ether-oam | t1e1 |
tdmop | ima | loopback-atm | ether-ring | command | snmp }
private-trap: Private trap
trap-id: Trap-ID
Maintenance and Operation
21-17
port: Port message
link: Link change
fault: Fault message
sfp: SFP change information
ntp: NTP access error
telnet: telnet message
maintenance-network: Maintenance network message
spantree: Spanning tree
fdb: MAC learning
aggregation: Link aggregation
atm-oam: ATM OAM alarm
ether-oam: EtherOAM alarm
t1e1: T1E1OAM information
tdmop: TDMoP information
ima: IMA group
loopback-atm: ATM loopback event
ether-ring: EtherRing event
command: Command
snmp: SNMP
* When P2 is omitted, all the message groups are assumed to be set.
When private-trap is specified in P2
P3: Private trap number (1 to 999)
When trap-id is specified in P2
P3: Trap-ID (1 to 999)
When port is specified in P2
P3: Port number (1 to 26, 33 to 48) (single specification)
When link is specified in P2
P3: Port number (1 to 26, 33 to 48) (single specification)
When fault is specified in P2
P3: Fault type { critical | major | minor | warning }
critical: Critical error
major: Major error
minor: Minor error
warning: Warning error
When telnet is specified in P2
P3: telnet connection state { connect | fail }
connect: telnet login, logout
fail: telnet error
When maintenance-network is specified in P2
P3: Maintenance network load { out-band | in-band }
out-band: Maintenance network load (OUTBAND)
in-band: Maintenance network load (INBAND)
When atm-oam is specified in P2
P3: ATM OAM alarm { detect-f1f3 | detect-f4f5 | detect-minor }
detect-f1f3: F1/F2/F3 alarm detection
detect-f4f5: F4/F5 alarm detection
detect-minor: MN alarm detection


Maintenance and Operation
21-18
When ether-oam is specified in P2
P3: EtherOAM alarm { unexpect-level | mismerge | unexpect-mep | unexpect-
period | loc | rdi }
unexpect-level: Unexpect MEG Level
mismerge: Mismerge
unexpect-mep: Unexpect MEP
unexpect-period: Unexpect Period
loc: LOC
rdi: RDI
* When P3 is omitted, all the members belonging to the group specified in P2 are
assumed to be set.
P4: Trap transmission selection enable/disable setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables trap transmission selection
disable: Disables trap transmission selection

Default value P4: enable
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set message transmit trap telnet disable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show message transmit config Display of trap transmission selection setting status


Maintenance and Operation
21-19

General Privilege Save
show message transmit config
Display of trap transmission selection setting status
Shows the trap transmission selection setting status.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Message group { private-trap | trap-id | port | link | fault | sfp | ntp | telnet |
maintenance-network | spantree | fdb | aggregation | atm-oam | ether-oam | t1e1 |
tdmop | ima | loopback-atm | ether-ring | command | snmp }
private-trap: Private trap
trap-id: Trap-ID
port: Port message
link: Link change
fault: Fault message
sfp: SFP change information
ntp: NTP access error
telnet: telnet message
maintenance-network: Maintenance network message
spantree: Spanning tree
fdb: MAC learning
aggregation: Link aggregation
atm-oam: ATM OAM alarm
ether-oam: EtherOAM alarm
t1e1: T1E1OAM information
tdmop: TDMoP information
ima: IMA group
loopback-atm: ATM loopback event
ether-ring: EtherRing event
command: Command message
snmp: SNMP message
* When P1 is omitted, the trap transmission selection setting status on all the
message groups is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Maintenance and Operation
21-20
Input example
*Switch# show message transmit config
Message Transmit Configuration (Member)
=======================================
Group Member Monitor Trap Remote-log Local-log
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
fault : critical enabled enabled enabled enabled
major enabled enabled enabled enabled
minor enabled enabled enabled enabled
warning enabled enabled enabled enabled
sfp : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled
ntp : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled
telnet : connect enabled enabled enabled enabled
fail enabled enabled enabled enabled
maintenance-network: out-band enabled enabled enabled enabled
in-band enabled enabled enabled enabled
spantree : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled
fdb : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled
aggregation : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled
atm-oam :detect-f1f3 enabled enabled enabled enabled
detect-f4f5 enabled enabled enabled enabled
detect-minor enabled enabled enabled enabled
ether-oam :unexpect-level enabled enabled enabled enabled
mismerge enabled enabled enabled enabled
unexpect-mep enabled enabled enabled enabled
unexpect-period enabled enabled enabled enabled
loc enabled enabled enabled enabled
rdi enabled enabled enabled enabled
t1e1 : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled
tdmop : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled
command : --- --- --- enabled enabled
snmp : --- --- --- enabled enabled

Message Transmit Configuration (Element)
========================================
Group Element Monitor Trap Remote-log Local-log
-----------------------------------------------------------------
trap-id : 9 disabled disabled disabled disabled
12 --- disabled --- ---

*Switch#
Output items Message Transmit Configuration (Member)
Group: Group name
Member: Member name
Monitor: Autonomous message
enabled: Autonomous message enabled
disabled: Autonomous message disabled
Trap: Trap message
enabled: Trap message enabled
disabled: Trap message disabled
Remote-log: Remote log message
enabled: Remote log message enabled
disabled: Remote log message disabled
Local-log: Local log message
enabled: Local log message enabled
disabled: Local log message disabled
Maintenance and Operation
21-21
Message Transmit Configuration (Element)
Group: Group name
Element: Element number
Monitor: Autonomous message
enabled: Autonomous message enabled
disabled: Autonomous message disabled
Trap: Trap message
enabled: Trap message enabled
disabled: Trap message disabled
Remote-log: Remote log message
enabled: Remote log message enabled
disabled: Remote log message disabled
Local-log: Local log message
enabled: Local log message enabled
disabled: Local log message disabled

Related
command
set message transmit Setting of trap transmission selection


Maintenance and Operation
21-22

General Privilege Save
show all
Display of all setting information
Shows all setting information.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Scroll control { step | non-step }
step: Enables scroll control
non-step: Disables scroll control (display to the end)
* When P1 is omitted, scroll follows scroll control settings.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note For target commands, see "Appendix".
Maintenance and Operation
21-23

Input example
*Switch# show all non-step
License Information
===================
No entry in the table.

User Information
================
No entry in the table.

System Date
===========
Current Date : 01/01/2010
Current Time : 16:40:36
Time Zone : GMT +09:00
Daylight Time Start : --/--/---- --:--
Daylight Time End : --/--/---- --:--
Daylight Time Offset: --:--

System Information
==================
SysDescr : NEC CX2200 Ver.02.05.01
System Location:
System Name :
System Contact :
System Up Time : 0 days, 01:21:15.29

IP Table
========
Management Port MAC Address IP Address Netmask
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
out-band 00:0b:6d:02:31:4b 100.10.200.100 255.255.255.0
in-band 00:0b:6d:02:31:4c 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

<Omission>

Output item



Related
commands
All show commands
upload all-information Uploading of all setting information to the ftp server


Maintenance and Operation
21-24

General Privilege Save
write memory
Saving of setting information
Saves the setting information.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# write memory
Writing Flash Memory....
Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
upload running-config Uploading of running configuration to FTP server
upload startup-config Uploading of startup configuration to FTP server
download running-config Downloading of running configuration from FTP server
download startup-config Downloading of startup configuration from FTP server
show running-config Display of running configuration
show startup-config Display of startup configuration
clear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration


Maintenance and Operation
21-25

General Privilege Save
clear startup-config
Clearing of startup configuration
Clears startup configuration.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Initialization mode { all | exip }
all: Clears all configurations
exip: Clears all configurations other than IP configuration

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note After this command is entered, execution is confirmed.
Input examples
*Switch# clear startup-config all
Would you like to delete config data? :(Y/N): y
Clearing Flash Memory...
*Switch# clear startup-config exip
Would you like to delete config data? :(Y/N): y
Clearing Flash Memory...
*Switch#

Output item



Related
commands
upload startup-config Uploading of startup configuration from FTP server
download startup-config Downloading of startup configuration from FTP server
show startup-config Display of startup configuration
write memory Saving of setting information


Maintenance and Operation
21-26

General Privilege Save
show fault present
Display of current fault and alarm information
Shows the device fault and alarm information that has occurred so far.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: Detailed showing { detail }
detail: Detailed showing specification
* When P1 is omitted, the outline of the device fault and alarm information that has
occurred so far is shown.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note External Memory is displayed for the CPUSW card only.
Input example
*Switch# show fault present
Fault Information
=================
Module Type Kind Status
---------------------------------------------------------------
System --- software normal
temperature normal
processor normal
Cpusw cpusw device normal
Line1 32t1e1h device fault(mj:2280,02000006)
Line2 2gbe device normal
Power --- power#1 normal
power#2 fault(mj:2202,01000000)
Fanu --- fan#1 normal
fan#2 normal
fan#3 normal
External Memory --- device ---
*Switch#

Maintenance and Operation
21-27
Output items Module: Module
System: device
Fanu: FAN unit
Cpusw: CPUSW card
Line1: LINE1 card
Line2: LINE2 card
Power: Power
External Memory: External memory
Type: Line type
cpusw: CPUSW
cpuswe: CPUSWE
32t1e1h: 32T1E1H
32t1e1t: 32T1E1T
2gbe: 2GBE
1atm155a: 1ATM155A

Kind: Fault type
software: Software failure
temperature: Temperature failure
processor: CPU failure
power: Power failure
fan: FAN failure
device: Device failure
Status: Fault occurrence status
normal: Normal status
fault: Fault status

For description of fault information, refer to "Fault List" of "Appendix" in the "Instruction
Manual".

Related
commands
show fault past Display of past fault information
show system status Display of device installation status and other various statuses


Maintenance and Operation
21-28

General Privilege Save
clear fault warning
Clearing of WR fault
Clears a WR fault.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes This command clears the following faults:
- Software fault WR (System)
WR SOFT FAULT
- Device fault WR (System)
WR DEVICE FAULT

Input example
*Switch# clear fault warning
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show fault present Display of current fault and alarm information


Maintenance and Operation
21-29

General Privilege Save
show fault past
Display of past fault information
Shows fault information collected when an exception and WDTOVF occurred.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note When a self exception or WDTOVF occurs, fault information can be saved every five
faces (to 10 faces).

Maintenance and Operation
21-30

Input example
*Switch# show fault past
Exception Information
=====================
System [1]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Software : 02.05.01
Hardware(CPUSW) : 00.b9.77
Date : 01/01/2010 00:00:01

<Exception Information>
task name = tShell
vector offset = 0x00000200
error number = 0x00000000
data exception address register = 0x00000000
bus error address register = 0x02014280
bus error syndrome register = 0x00000000
general purpose register
00a17418 016515c8 00000000 00000001
00001210 00000001 00000000 ef600800
<Omission>


condition register = 0x48400080
fixed-point exception register = 0x00000000

<Task Trace Information>
a280b0 vxTaskEntry +5c : shell ()
a14118 shell +180: a14144 ()
a14354 shell +3bc: execute ()
a144d4 execute +d4 : yyparse ()
a40ac8 yyparse +790: a3ea84 ()
a3ebf4 yystart +878: d ()
a17418 d +234: printf (0, 0, 2014280, 0, a17418, 16515c8, 0, 1)
200 : 218 ()
218 : Hsup_except (1651508)
1d7c9c Hsup_except +200: taskSuspend ()

<Task dispatch history information>

No. Name Tick Time
-----------------------------
1 tSup_main 00008ed3
2 tShell 00008ecc
3 tmmi_idle 00008ecc
4 tSup_wdt 00008ecc
5 tCes_PollPw 00008ecc
6 tEom_trap 00008ecc
<Omission>


Error Information
=================
System [1]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Software : 02.05.01
Hardware(CPUSW) : 90.02.00
Date : 01/01/2010 15:00:00

<Task Information> (after 0sec since WDT-OVF detected)

Maintenance and Operation
21-31

NAME ENTRY TID PRI STATUS PC SP ERRNO DELAY
-------- ----------- -------- --- ---------- -------- -------- ------- ------
tExcTask excTask 1664f50 0 PEND a579a8 1664e70 0 0
tLogTask logTask 16664f8 0 PEND a579a8 1666420 0 0
<Omission>


<Task Trace Information> (after 0sec since WDT-OVF detected)

Task Name : tExcTask
a3ddec vxTaskEntry +5c : excTask ()
a13f28 excTask +38 : msgQReceive ()
a33988 msgQReceive +280: qJobGet ()
<Omission>


<Task Information> (after 0sec since WDT-OVF detected)

NAME ENTRY TID PRI STATUS PC SP ERRNO DELAY
-------- ----------- -------- --- ---------- -------- -------- ------- --------
tExcTask excTask 163ff50 0 PEND a3ea94 163fe70 3d0001 0
tLogTask logTask 16414f8 0 PEND a3ea94 1641420 0 0
<Omission>


<Task Trace Information> (after 0sec since WDT-OVF detected)

Task Name : tExcTask
a24ed8 vxTaskEntry +5c : excTask ()
9fb014 excTask +38 : msgQReceive ()
a1aa74 msgQReceive +280: qJobGet ()
<Omission>


<Task dispatch history information>

No. Name Tick Time
-----------------------------
1 tSup_main 000238cb
2 IRQ0 000238cb
<Omission>


*Switch#

Output items Exception Information: Fault information collected when the exception occurred
Error Information: Fault information collected when the WDTOVF occurred

Related
commands
show fault present Display of current fault and alarm information
clear fault past Clearing of past fault information


Maintenance and Operation
21-32

General Privilege Save
clear fault past
Clearing of past fault information
Clears all the fault information that was collected when a self exception or WDTOVF occurred and is
shown by the show fault past command.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note After this command is entered, execution is confirmed.
Input example
*Switch# clear fault past
Would you like to clear past fault information? :(Y/N): y
Clearing Flash Memory.....
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show fault past Display of past fault information


Maintenance and Operation
21-33

General Privilege Save
show system status
Display of device installation status and other various statuses
Shows the device installation status and other various statuses.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note CPUSW is fixed to mount (high) when Fanu is mounted since FAN rotation frequency
control is not supported.

Input example
*Switch# show system status
System Equipment Information
============================
Module Status Install
---------------------------------
Cpusw : active cpusw
Line1 : mount 32t1e1h
Line2 : mount 2gbe
Fanu : mount (high)

*Switch#

Maintenance and Operation
21-34

Output items Module: Module
Cpusw: CPUSW card
Line1: LINE1 card
Line2: LINE2 card
Fanu: FAN unit
Status: Module status
active: ACT status
active-fault: ACT-FLT status
mount: Installed status
unmount: Uninstalled status
mount(high): FAN high-speed rotation state
mount(low): FAN low-speed rotation state
Install: Module type
cpusw: CPUSW
cpuswe: CPUSWE
32t1e1h: 32T1E1H
32t1e1t: 32T1E1T
2gbe: 2GBE
1atm155a: 1ATM155A

Related
command
show system revision Display of various version information

Maintenance and Operation
21-35

General Privilege Save
show system bridge
Display of bridge information for device
Shows the MAC address for the device, total number of ports, and L2SW type.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show system bridge
System Bridge
=============
Base Bridge Address : 00:30:13:71:44:80
Base Number Ports : 26ports
Base Type : Transparent Only

*Switch#

Output items Base Bridge Address: MAC address for device
Base Number Ports: Number of installed ports
Base Type: L2SW type

Related
command
show system revision Display of various version information


Maintenance and Operation
21-36

General Privilege Save
show system module-id
Display of module ID information
Shows module ID information of device.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show system module-id
System Module ID
================
Module Install Module ID Product Number
---------------------------------------------------------------
Cpusw : cpuswe P-4X9C(005)(430) NEC945P50054
Line1 : 32t1e1t P-4Y0B(007)(430) NEC9X5P50075
Line2 : 2gbe P-4X7W(002)(030) NEC7Z5M00262

MAC Address Table
=================
Module Install Address Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Cpusw : cpuswe 00:30:13:3e:bf:90 in-band
00:30:13:3e:bf:50 out-band
00:30:13:3e:bf:d0 bridge
Line1 : 32t1e1t 00:16:97:30:75:a1 tdmop
Line2 : 2gbe 00:30:13:71:84:7d ether-oam (port 25)
00:30:13:71:84:fd ether-oam (port 26)
*Switch#

Maintenance and Operation
21-37

Output items Module: Module
Cpusw: CPUSW card
Line1: LINE1 card
Line2: LINE2 card
Install: Module type
cpusw: CPUSW
cpuswe: CPUSWE
32t1e1h: 32T1E1H
32t1e1t: 32T1E1T
2gbe: 2GBE
1atm155a: 1ATM155A
Module ID: Module ID
Product Number: Product number
Address: MAC address
Description: MAC address type
in-band: Inband
out-band: Outband
bridge: Bridge
atmop: ATMoP
tdmop: TDMoP
atmop/adaptive-clock: Adaptive clock
ether-oam: Ether OAM

Related
command
show system status Display of device installation status and various statuses


Maintenance and Operation
21-38

General Privilege Save
show system revision
Display of various version information
Shows the version information of firmware and hardware installed on the various mounted modules.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes Current versions are shown in the Current field.
Latest downloaded versions are shown in the Latest field.
Last-but-one downloaded versions are shown in the Backup field.

Input example
*Switch# show system revision
System Revision
===============
Current Latest Backup Current Latest
Module Install Software Software Software Hardware Hardware
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Cpusw : cpusw 02.05.01 02.05.01 02.05.01 07.02.00 07.02.00
Line1 : 32t1e1t --- --- --- 07.02.00 07.02.00
Line2 : 2gbe --- --- --- 07.02.00 07.02.00

*Switch#

Output items Module: Module
Cpusw: CPUSW card
Line1: LINE1 card
Line2: LINE2 card
Install: Module type
cpusw: CPUSW
cpuswe: CPUSWE
32t1e1h: 32T1E1H
32t1e1t: 32T1E1T
2gbe: 2GBE
1atm155a: 1ATM155A
CurrentSoftware: Current software version information
LatestSoftware: Latest downloaded software version information
BackupSoftware: Last-but-one downloaded software version information
CurrentHardware: Current hardware version information
LatestHardware: Latest downloaded hardware version information

Maintenance and Operation
21-39
Related
command
show system status Display of device installation status and various statuses


Maintenance and Operation
21-40

General Privilege Save
show system temperature
Display of device temperature
Shows a device temperature.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show system temperature
System Temperature
==================
Module Temperature
----------------------
System : 36.0

*Switch#

Output items Module: Module
System: Device
Temperature: Module temperature

Related
command
show system status Display of device installation status and various statuses


Maintenance and Operation
21-41

General Privilege Save
set fault auto-reboot
Setting of autonomous rebooting enable/disable
Sets whether to enable or disable autonomous rebooting when a WDTOVF or EXCEPTION fault that
involves rebooting is detected.

Input format P1
Parameter P1: Autonomous rebooting enable/disable setting { enable | disable }
enable: Enables autonomous rebooting
disable: Disables autonomous rebooting

Default value P1: enable
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# set fault auto-reboot enable
*Switch#

Output item



Related
command
show fault auto-reboot Display of autonomous rebooting settings


Maintenance and Operation
21-42

General Privilege Save
show fault auto-reboot
Display of autonomous rebooting settings
Shows autonomous rebooting settings when a WDTOVF or EXCEPTION fault that involves rebooting is
detected.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show fault auto-reboot
Fault AutoReboot Configuration
==============================
AutoReboot: enabled

*Switch#

Output item AutoReboot: Autonomous rebooting setting
enabled: Enabled
disabled: Disabled

Related
command
set fault auto-reboot Setting of autonomous rebooting enable/disable


Maintenance and Operation
21-43

General Privilege Save
show resource cpu
Display of CPU usage
Shows the average CPU usages of 5 seconds, 1 minute, and 5 minutes and the peak values of the
average CPU usages.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show resource cpu
CPU Activity Information
========================
Last Read Time : 01/04/2010 13:30:06
Current Time : 01/04/2010 13:31:10

The Rate of CPU Use
===================
Measure Time Current(%) Peak(%) (Last Read ->Current)
---------------------------------------------------------------
5 (sec) 48 53 (01/04/2010 13:31:04)
1 (min) 47 47 (01/04/2010 13:30:09)
5 (min) 47 47 (01/04/2010 13:30:09)

*Switch#

Output items Last Read Time: Last read time
Current Time: Current time
Measure Time: Time required to measure average CPU time
Current(%): Current CPU usage
Peak(%): Peak value of CPU usage
(Last Read ->Current): Peak time at which the peak value was recorded

Related
command
None


Maintenance and Operation
21-44

General Privilege Save
show resource memory
Display of memory usage
Shows memory usage.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None
Input example
*Switch# show resource memory
The Rate of Memory Use
======================
Rate(%) Used Size(byte) / Actual Size(byte)
---------------------------------------------
24 23079568 / 95931024

*Switch

Output items Rate(%): Memory usage
Used Size(byte): Currently used memory size
Actual Size(byte): Memory size that can be actually used

Related
command
set fault auto-reboot Setting of autonomous rebooting enable/disable


Device Control
22-1













22
Device Control


Device Control
22-2

General Privilege Save
reset system
Resetting of entire device
Resets the entire device.

Input format [P1]
Parameter P1: FPGA version upgrade specification { fpga-version-up } or restart load module
specification { latest | backup }
fpga-version-up: FPGA version upgrade specification
latest: latest side
backup: backup side
* When FPGA version upgrade is specified, downloaded FPGA is reflected to the
device.
* When omitted, latest is assumed.

Default value None
Usage condition None
Notes After this command is entered, execution is confirmed.

Device Control
22-3

Input example
*Switch# reset system
Would you like to reboot System? :(Y/N): y
System is under closing....
System Reset Process is running. Please wait....








System Boot

Copyright 2001-2002 NEC



CPU: PPC 405GP
Version: 5.4
BSP version: 1.2/5
Boot version: K01.00
Creation date: Mar 31 2004, 14:38:54


Press [Ctrl]+[c] key to enter recover mode...
... coming up latest image

auto-booting...

<Omission>

Output item



Related
command
show reset Display of reset factor


Device Control
22-4

General Privilege Save
show reset
Display of reset factor
Shows a device reset factor.

Input format None
Parameter None

Default value None
Usage condition None
Note None

Input example
*Switch# show reset
Reset Information
=================
Reset Factor
-----------------------------
Power On Reset

*Switch#

Output items Reset Factor: Reset factor
Power On Reset: Power-on reset
Command Reset(reset system): Command reset by reset system
The status of WDT is abnormal: Reset based on hardware judgment
The fatal error has occurred: Reset based on software judgment

Related
commands
reset system Resetting of entire device


Appendix
23-1













23
Appendix



Appendix
23-2
Appendix 1 Commands shown by configuration display and show all
The table below lists the commands shown by configuration display (show running-config and
show startup-config) and show all.

Command
Shown by show running-config
or show startup-config
(write memory)
Shown by show all
date -
dm ether-oam -
linktrace ether-oam -
lm ether-oam -
loopback atm -
loopback ether-oam -
mirror port -
reset cesop-device -
reset reference-clock -
reset system -
set adaptive-clock -
set adaptive-clock-format -
set adaptive-clock-mode -
set aggregation group -
set aggregation port priority -
set aggregation protection-time -
set aggregation system priority -
set atm-oam -
set atm-oam flow -
set atmop format -
set atmop format concatenation -
set atmop format concatenation
member
-
set atmop in-port priority -
set atm-oam flow -
set atmop out-port clp mode -
set atmop out-port clp priority -
set atmop out-port strict-priority -
set atm-shaper rate -
set counter ether-oam entry -
set counter pvc entry -
set counter vlan entry -
set enable password -
set ether-oam cc -
set ether-oam frame -
set ether-oam lm -
Appendix
23-3
Command
Shown by show running-config
or show startup-config
(write memory)
Shown by show all
set ether-oam meg -
set ether-oam mep -
set ether-oam peer-mep -
set ether-oam rdi
-
set ether-oam reply-period
-
set ether-ring -
set ether-ring control-vlan -
set ether-ring rpl-owner -
set ether-ring time -
set fault auto-reboot -
set fdb agingtime -
set filter in-port -
set frame-size -
set ima clock -
set ima group -
set in-band admin -
set in-band vid -
set ip address in-band -
set ip address out-band -
set ip route -
set ip route default -
set isolate port
-
set login password -
set loopback atm keepalive -
set loopback atm keepalive-mode -
set loopback atm source-id -
set message transmit -
set ntp access-time -
set ntp server -
set out-band flowcontrol -
set out-band speed -
set port admin -
set port cable-length -
set port clock -
set port flowcontrol -
set port frame -
set port impedance -
set port link-trap -
set port mode -
set port protection-time -
Appendix
23-4
Command
Shown by show running-config
or show startup-config
(write memory)
Shown by show all
set port speed -
set port type -
set pvc admin -
set pvc connection -
set pvc name -
set pvc port admin -
set pvc static -
set qos in-class-map maximum -
set qos in-port cos-map -
set qos in-port cos-map mode -
set qos in-priority maximum -
set qos in-rate maximum -
set qos out-bandwidth -
set qos out-wred -
set qos switch-class-map -
set reference-clock group -
set reference-clock mode -
set reference-clock multiple-source -
set reference-clock priority -
set [reserve] qos initial-buffer -
set session ip-permit -
set snmp -
set snmp authen-trap -
set snmp manager -
set snmp trap-manager -
set spantree -
set spantree mode -
set spantree port -
set spantree port cost -
set spantree port edge -
set spantree port point-to-point -
set spantree port priority -
set spantree priority -
set spantree time -
set spantree txholdcount -
set syslog map -
set syslog remote -
set syslog server -
set system contact -
set system daylight-time -
set system location -
Appendix
23-5
Command
Shown by show running-config
or show startup-config
(write memory)
Shown by show all
set system name -
set system timezone -
set tdm group -
set tdm path -
set tdmop admin -
set tdmop connection -
set tdmop format -
set tdmop group -
set tdmop jitter -
set tdmop mode -
set terminal logout -
set terminal monitor -
set terminal prompt -
set terminal scroll local -
set terminal scroll system -
set user account -
set vlan ethertype -
set vlan member -
set vlan name -
set vlan portbase -
set vlan swap -
set vlan tagbase -
show adaptive-clock -
show aggregation group -
show aggregation port priority -
show aggregation protection-time -
show aggregation system priority -
show atm-oam config -
show atm-oam status -
show atmop format -
show atmop format concatenation -
show atmop in-port priority -
show atmop out-port clp -
show atmop out-port strict-priority -
show atm-shaper rate -
show cesop-device status -
show counter cell -
show counter cell f4 -
show counter cell f5 -
show counter cell ima-port -
show counter discard -
Appendix
23-6
Command
Shown by show running-config
or show startup-config
(write memory)
Shown by show all
show counter ether-oam entry -
show counter ether-oam value -
show counter port -
show counter port pmon -
show counter pvc entry -
show counter vlan entry -
show counter vlan value -
show ether-oam fault last-change -
show ether-oam fault reason -
show ether-oam frame -
show ether-oam lm -
show ether-oam mac-address -
show ether-oam meg -
show ether-oam mep -
show ether-oam reply-period -
show ether-ring config -
show ether-ring status -
show fault auto-reboot -
show fault past -
show fault present - (Detailed showing)
show fdb agingtime -
show fdb count all -
show fdb count port -
show fdb count vid -
show fdb table port -
show fdb table vid -
show filter in-port -
show frame-size -
show ima clock -
show ima group config -
show ima group status -
show in-band information -
show ip config -
show isolate port -
show loopback atm keepalive
config
-
show loopback atm keepalive
information
-
show loopback atm source-id -
show message transmit config -
show mirror port -
Appendix
23-7
Command
Shown by show running-config
or show startup-config
(write memory)
Shown by show all
show ntp -
show out-band information -
show port cable-length -
show port impedance -
show port information -
show pvc connection -
show pvc information -
show qos initial-buffer -
show qos in-port cos-map -
show qos in-port cos-map mode -
show qos in-rate maximum -
show qos out-bandwidth -
show qos out-wred -
show qos switch-class-map -
show reference-clock information -
show reset - (Outline showing)
show resource cpu -
show resource memory -
show session -
show session ip-permit -
show snmp -
show spantree info -
show spantree mode -
show spantree port -
show spantree port edge -
show spantree port point-to-point -
show syslog local -
show syslog map -
show syslog server -
show system bridge -
show system date -
show system information -
show system module-id -
show system revision -
show system status -
show system temperature -
show tdm group -
show tdm path -
show tdmop connection -
show tdmop format -
show tdmop information -
Appendix
23-8
Command
Shown by show running-config
or show startup-config
(write memory)
Shown by show all
show tdmop jitter -
show tdmop status -
show terminal config -
show user account -
show vlan ethertype -
show vlan summary -
show vlan swap -
show vlan table port -
show vlan table vid -

: Shown
: Not shown
- : Not applicable

Appendix
23-9
Appendix 2 Port (line) interface type conditions
The table below lists operation restrictions on commands per port (line) interface.

Operation restrictions
Command
TDM TDMoP ATMoP 1ATM
155A
FE GbE
date - - - - - -
dm ether-oam
linktrace ether-oam
lm ether-oam
loopback atm
loopback ether-oam
mirror port
reset cesop-device
reset reference-clock - - - - - -
reset system - - - - - -
set adaptive-clock
set adaptive-clock-format
set adaptive-clock-mode
set aggregation group
set aggregation port priority
set aggregation protection-time
set aggregation system priority
set atm-oam
set atm-oam flow
set atmop format
set atmop format concatenation
set atmop format concatenation
member

set atmop in-port priority
set atmop mode
set atmop out-port clp mode
set atmop out-port clp priority
set atmop out-port strict-priority
set atm-shaper rate
set counter ether-oam entry
set counter pvc entry
set counter vlan entry
set enable password - - - - - -
set ether-oam cc
set ether-oam frame
set ether-oam lm
Appendix
23-10
Operation restrictions
Command
TDM TDMoP ATMoP 1ATM
155A
FE GbE
set ether-oam meg
set ether-oam mep
set ether-oam peer-mep
set ether-oam rdi
set ether-oam reply-period
set ether-ring
set ether-ring control-vlan
set ether-ring rpl-owner
set ether-ring time
set fault auto-reboot - - - - - -
set fdb agingtime - - - - - -
set filter in-port
set frame-size - - - - - -
set ima clock
set ima group
set in-band admin - - - - - -
set in-band vid - - - - - -
set ip address in-band - - - - - -
set ip address out-band - - - - - -
set ip route - - - - - -
set ip route default - - - - - -
set isolate port
set login password - - - - - -
set loopback atm keepalive
set loopback atm keepalive-mode
set loopback atm source-id
set message transmit - - - - - -
set ntp access-time - - - - - -
set ntp server - - - - - -
set out-band flowcontrol - - - - - -
set out-band speed - - - - - -
set port admin
set port cable-length
set port clock
set port flowcontrol
set port frame
set port impedance
set port link-trap
set port mode
set port protection-time
Appendix
23-11
Operation restrictions
Command
TDM TDMoP ATMoP 1ATM
155A
FE GbE
set port speed
set port type
set pvc admin
set pvc connection
set pvc name
set pvc port admin
set pvc static
set qos in-class-map maximum
set qos in-port cos-map
set qos in-port cos-map mode
set qos in-priority maximum
set qos in-rate maximum
set qos out-bandwidth
set qos out-wred
set qos switch-class-map - - - - - -
set reference-clock group
set reference-clock mode - - - - - -
set reference-clock multiple-source
set reference-clock priority
set [reserve] qos initial-buffer
set session ip-permit - - - - - -
set snmp - - - - - -
set snmp authen-trap - - - - - -
set snmp manager - - - - - -
set snmp trap-manager - - - - - -
set spantree - - - - - -
set spantree mode - - - - - -
set spantree port
set spantree port cost
set spantree port edge
set spantree port point-to-point
set spantree port priority
set spantree priority - - - - - -
set spantree time - - - - - -
set spantree txholdcount - - - - - -
set syslog map - - - - - -
set syslog remote - - - - - -
set syslog server - - - - - -
set system contact - - - - - -
set system daylight-time - - - - - -
Appendix
23-12
Operation restrictions
Command
TDM TDMoP ATMoP 1ATM
155A
FE GbE
set system location - - - - - -
set system name - - - - - -
set system timezone - - - - - -
set tdm group
set tdm path
set tdmop admin
set tdmop connection
set tdmop format
set tdmop group
set tdmop jitter
set tdmop mode
set terminal logout - - - - - -
set terminal monitor - - - - - -
set terminal prompt - - - - - -
set terminal scroll local - - - - - -
set terminal scroll system - - - - - -
set user account - - - - - -
set vlan ethertype
set vlan member
set vlan name - - - - - -
set vlan portbase
set vlan swap
set vlan tagbase

: Operable
: Inoperable (commands cannot be entered)
: Not dependend on port mode
- : Not dependent on line




Index
Index-1
Index
C
clear adaptive-clock ................................................................................................................... 17-19
clear adaptive-clock-format ........................................................................................................ 17-25
clear aggregation group............................................................................................................... 8-23
clear atmop format ..................................................................................................................... 11-16
clear atmop format concatenation.............................................................................................. 11-26
clear atmop format concatenation member ............................................................................... 11-29
clear atm-shaper rate................................................................................................................... 12-5
clear counter cell ........................................................................................................................ 20-30
clear counter ether-oam entry.................................................................................................... 20-36
clear counter port ......................................................................................................................... 20-5
clear counter pvc entry............................................................................................................... 20-18
clear counter vlan entry.............................................................................................................. 20-10
clear counter vlan value............................................................................................................. 20-15
clear enable password................................................................................................................... 1-6
clear ether-oam fault reason...................................................................................................... 10-28
clear ether-oam lm..................................................................................................................... 10-15
clear ether-oam meg.................................................................................................................... 10-5
clear ether-oam mep.................................................................................................................. 10-12
clear ether-oam peer-mep ......................................................................................................... 10-17
clear ether-ring loop-detection ................................................................................................... 10-42
clear fault past............................................................................................................................ 21-32
clear fault warning...................................................................................................................... 21-28
clear fdb table port ....................................................................................................................... 7-12
clear fdb table vid......................................................................................................................... 7-15
clear filter in-port ............................................................................................................................ 9-9
clear ima group ............................................................................................................................ 14-8
clear in-band vid........................................................................................................................... 3-19
clear ip address in-band................................................................................................................. 3-6
clear ip address out-band .............................................................................................................. 3-3
clear ip route ................................................................................................................................ 3-12
clear ip route default ...................................................................................................................... 3-8
clear login password ...................................................................................................................... 1-8
Index
Index-2
clear loopback atm keepalive..................................................................................................... 19-16
clear ntp server .......................................................................................................................... 18-29
clear pvc connection .................................................................................................................. 11-21
clear pvc name............................................................................................................................. 11-5
clear pvc static ............................................................................................................................. 11-3
clear qos in-rate maximum........................................................................................................... 6-14
clear session.............................................................................................................................. 18-15
clear session ip-permit ............................................................................................................... 18-13
clear snmp manager .................................................................................................................... 18-5
clear snmp trap-manager............................................................................................................. 18-6
clear startup-config .................................................................................................................... 21-25
clear syslog local........................................................................................................................ 18-25
clear syslog map........................................................................................................................ 18-22
clear syslog server ..................................................................................................................... 18-19
clear system daylight-time ........................................................................................................... 2-12
clear tdm group............................................................................................................................ 15-4
clear tdm path .............................................................................................................................. 15-7
clear tdmop connection.............................................................................................................. 16-14
clear tdmop format ..................................................................................................................... 16-24
clear tdmop group........................................................................................................................ 16-8
clear user account........................................................................................................................ 1-17
clear vlan name............................................................................................................................ 5-16
clear vlan swap ............................................................................................................................ 5-10
clear vlan tagbase.......................................................................................................................... 5-3
D
date................................................................................................................................................ 2-6
disable............................................................................................................................................ 1-4
dm ether-oam............................................................................................................................. 10-33
download fpga.............................................................................................................................. 21-7
download running-config............................................................................................................ 21-10
download software....................................................................................................................... 21-9
download startup-config............................................................................................................. 21-11
Index
Index-3
E
enable ............................................................................................................................................ 1-3
exit ................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
L
linktrace ether-oam.................................................................................................................... 10-31
lm ether-oam.............................................................................................................................. 10-35
loopback atm................................................................................................................................ 19-2
loopback ether-oam................................................................................................................... 10-29
M
mirror port .................................................................................................................................. 20-38
P
ping .............................................................................................................................................. 3-20
R
reset cesop-device..................................................................................................................... 16-26
reset reference-clock ................................................................................................................... 17-6
reset system................................................................................................................................. 22-2
S
set [reserve] qos initial-buffer....................................................................................................... 6-20
set adaptive-clock ...................................................................................................................... 17-12
set adaptive-clock-format ........................................................................................................... 17-23
set adaptive-clock-mode............................................................................................................ 17-21
set aggregation group.................................................................................................................. 8-19
set aggregation port priority ......................................................................................................... 8-26
set aggregation protection-time ................................................................................................... 8-28
set aggregation system priority.................................................................................................... 8-24
set atm-oam................................................................................................................................. 13-2
set atm-oam flow.......................................................................................................................... 13-4
Index
Index-4
set atmop format ........................................................................................................................ 11-12
set atmop format concatenation................................................................................................. 11-22
set atmop format concatenation member .................................................................................. 11-27
set atmop in-port priority ............................................................................................................ 12-13
set atmop mode ......................................................................................................................... 11-10
set atmop out-port clp mode ........................................................................................................ 12-9
set atmop out-port clp priority .................................................................................................... 12-10
set atmop out-port strict-priority ................................................................................................... 12-6
set atm-shaper rate...................................................................................................................... 12-2
set counter ether-oam entry....................................................................................................... 20-33
set counter pvc entry.................................................................................................................. 20-16
set counter vlan entry................................................................................................................... 20-8
set enable password...................................................................................................................... 1-5
set ether-oam cc ........................................................................................................................ 10-23
set ether-oam frame................................................................................................................... 10-18
set ether-oam lm........................................................................................................................ 10-13
set ether-oam meg....................................................................................................................... 10-2
set ether-oam mep....................................................................................................................... 10-6
set ether-oam peer-mep ............................................................................................................ 10-16
set ether-oam rdi ........................................................................................................................ 10-24
set ether-oam reply-period......................................................................................................... 10-20
set ether-ring.............................................................................................................................. 10-38
set ether-ring control-vlan .......................................................................................................... 10-39
set ether-ring rpl-owner.............................................................................................................. 10-40
set ether-ring time...................................................................................................................... 10-41
set fault auto-reboot ................................................................................................................... 21-41
set fdb agingtime............................................................................................................................ 7-4
set filter in-port ............................................................................................................................... 9-6
set frame-size ................................................................................................................................ 7-2
set ima clock ................................................................................................................................ 14-9
set ima group ............................................................................................................................... 14-2
set in-band admin ........................................................................................................................ 3-17
set in-band vid.............................................................................................................................. 3-18
set ip address in-band.................................................................................................................... 3-4
set ip address out-band ................................................................................................................. 3-2
set ip route ..................................................................................................................................... 3-9
set ip route default ......................................................................................................................... 3-7
Index
Index-5
set isolate port................................................................................................................................ 9-2
set login password ......................................................................................................................... 1-7
set loopback atm keepalive........................................................................................................ 19-12
set loopback atm keepalive-mode ............................................................................................... 19-8
set loopback atm source-id.......................................................................................................... 19-6
set message transmit ................................................................................................................. 21-16
set ntp access-time.................................................................................................................... 18-26
set ntp server ............................................................................................................................. 18-27
set out-band flowcontrol ............................................................................................................... 3-14
set out-band speed ...................................................................................................................... 3-13
set port admin ................................................................................................................................ 4-2
set port cable-length .................................................................................................................... 4-20
set port clock................................................................................................................................ 4-13
set port flowcontrol ......................................................................................................................... 4-6
set port frame................................................................................................................................. 4-9
set port impedance ...................................................................................................................... 4-23
set port link-trap ............................................................................................................................. 4-8
set port mode............................................................................................................................... 4-11
set port protection-time .................................................................................................................. 4-7
set port speed ................................................................................................................................ 4-3
set port type ................................................................................................................................... 4-5
set pvc admin............................................................................................................................... 11-6
set pvc connection ..................................................................................................................... 11-17
set pvc name................................................................................................................................ 11-4
set pvc port admin........................................................................................................................ 11-7
set pvc static ................................................................................................................................ 11-2
set qos in-class-map maximum ..................................................................................................... 6-4
set qos in-port cos-map ............................................................................................................... 6-16
set qos in-port cos-map mode ..................................................................................................... 6-18
set qos in-priority maximum........................................................................................................... 6-7
set qos in-rate maximum................................................................................................................ 6-2
set qos out-bandwidth.................................................................................................................. 6-27
set qos out-wred .......................................................................................................................... 6-34
set qos switch-class-map............................................................................................................. 6-24
set reference-clock group ............................................................................................................ 17-7
set reference-clock mode............................................................................................................. 17-5
set reference-clock multiple-source ............................................................................................. 17-2
Index
Index-6
set reference-clock priority........................................................................................................... 17-3
set session ip-permit .................................................................................................................. 18-11
set snmp ...................................................................................................................................... 18-2
set snmp authen-trap................................................................................................................... 18-7
set snmp manager ....................................................................................................................... 18-3
set snmp trap-manager................................................................................................................ 18-4
set spantree ................................................................................................................................... 8-2
set spantree mode ......................................................................................................................... 8-3
set spantree port .......................................................................................................................... 8-10
set spantree port cost .................................................................................................................. 8-12
set spantree port edge................................................................................................................. 8-15
set spantree port point-to-point .................................................................................................... 8-17
set spantree port priority .............................................................................................................. 8-11
set spantree priority ....................................................................................................................... 8-5
set spantree time ........................................................................................................................... 8-6
set spantree txholdcount................................................................................................................ 8-7
set syslog map........................................................................................................................... 18-20
set syslog remote....................................................................................................................... 18-16
set syslog server ........................................................................................................................ 18-17
set system contact ......................................................................................................................... 2-2
set system daylight-time ................................................................................................................ 2-8
set system location ........................................................................................................................ 2-4
set system name............................................................................................................................ 2-3
set system timezone ...................................................................................................................... 2-7
set tdm group............................................................................................................................... 15-2
set tdm path ................................................................................................................................. 15-5
set tdmop admin ........................................................................................................................ 16-25
set tdmop connection................................................................................................................... 16-9
set tdmop format ........................................................................................................................ 16-19
set tdmop group........................................................................................................................... 16-4
set tdmop jitter ........................................................................................................................... 16-15
set tdmop mode ........................................................................................................................... 16-2
set terminal logout........................................................................................................................ 1-13
set terminal monitor ..................................................................................................................... 1-12
set terminal prompt ........................................................................................................................ 1-9
set terminal scroll local................................................................................................................. 1-11
set terminal scroll system............................................................................................................. 1-10
Index
Index-7
set user account........................................................................................................................... 1-15
set vlan ethertype......................................................................................................................... 5-13
set vlan member ............................................................................................................................ 5-7
set vlan name............................................................................................................................... 5-15
set vlan portbase............................................................................................................................ 5-4
set vlan swap ................................................................................................................................. 5-8
set vlan tagbase............................................................................................................................. 5-2
show adaptive-clock................................................................................................................... 17-14
show aggregation group .............................................................................................................. 8-21
show aggregation port priority...................................................................................................... 8-27
show aggregation protection-time................................................................................................ 8-29
show aggregation system priority ................................................................................................ 8-25
show all ...................................................................................................................................... 21-22
show atm-oam config................................................................................................................... 13-6
show atm-oam status................................................................................................................... 13-9
show atmop format .................................................................................................................... 11-14
show atmop format concatenation............................................................................................. 11-24
show atmop in-port priority......................................................................................................... 12-15
show atmop out-port clp............................................................................................................. 12-11
show atmop out-port strict-priority................................................................................................ 12-8
show atm-shaper rate .................................................................................................................. 12-3
show cesop-device status.......................................................................................................... 16-27
show counter cell ....................................................................................................................... 20-19
show counter cell f4 ................................................................................................................... 20-22
show counter cell f5 ................................................................................................................... 20-25
show counter cell ima-port ......................................................................................................... 20-28
show counter discard................................................................................................................... 20-6
show counter ether-oam entry ................................................................................................... 20-34
show counter ether-oam value................................................................................................... 20-37
show counter port ........................................................................................................................ 20-2
show counter port pmon ............................................................................................................ 20-31
show counter pvc entry.............................................................................................................. 20-17
show counter vlan entry............................................................................................................... 20-9
show counter vlan value ............................................................................................................ 20-11
show ether-oam fault last-change.............................................................................................. 10-25
show ether-oam fault reason ..................................................................................................... 10-26
show ether-oam frame............................................................................................................... 10-19
Index
Index-8
show ether-oam lm .................................................................................................................... 10-14
show ether-oam mac-address ................................................................................................... 10-22
show ether-oam meg ................................................................................................................... 10-3
show ether-oam mep ................................................................................................................... 10-8
show ether-oam reply-period ..................................................................................................... 10-21
show ether-ring config................................................................................................................ 10-43
show ether-ring status................................................................................................................ 10-45
show fault auto-reboot ............................................................................................................... 21-42
show fault past ........................................................................................................................... 21-29
show fault present...................................................................................................................... 21-26
show fdb agingtime........................................................................................................................ 7-5
show fdb count all .......................................................................................................................... 7-9
show fdb count port........................................................................................................................ 7-6
show fdb count vid ......................................................................................................................... 7-8
show fdb table port....................................................................................................................... 7-10
show fdb table vid ........................................................................................................................ 7-13
show filter in-port............................................................................................................................ 9-8
show frame-size............................................................................................................................. 7-3
show ima clock........................................................................................................................... 14-10
show ima group config................................................................................................................. 14-4
show ima group status................................................................................................................. 14-5
show in-band information............................................................................................................... 3-5
show ip config .............................................................................................................................. 3-10
show isolate port ............................................................................................................................ 9-4
show loopback atm keepalive config ........................................................................................... 19-9
show loopback atm keepalive information ................................................................................. 19-14
show loopback atm source-id ...................................................................................................... 19-7
show message transmit config................................................................................................... 21-19
show mirror port ......................................................................................................................... 20-39
show ntp..................................................................................................................................... 18-28
show out-band information........................................................................................................... 3-15
show port cable-length................................................................................................................. 4-21
show port impedance................................................................................................................... 4-24
show port information................................................................................................................... 4-14
show pvc connection.................................................................................................................. 11-20
show pvc information ................................................................................................................... 11-8
show qos initial-buffer .................................................................................................................. 6-22
Index
Index-9
show qos in-port cos-map............................................................................................................ 6-17
show qos in-port cos-map mode.................................................................................................. 6-19
show qos in-rate maximum.......................................................................................................... 6-11
show qos out-bandwidth .............................................................................................................. 6-31
show qos out-wred....................................................................................................................... 6-36
show qos switch-class-map ......................................................................................................... 6-26
show reference-clock information ................................................................................................ 17-9
show reset.................................................................................................................................... 22-4
show resource cpu..................................................................................................................... 21-43
show resource memory.............................................................................................................. 21-44
show running-config................................................................................................................... 21-12
show session ............................................................................................................................. 18-14
show session ip-permit .............................................................................................................. 18-12
show snmp................................................................................................................................... 18-8
show spantree info......................................................................................................................... 8-8
show spantree mode...................................................................................................................... 8-4
show spantree port ...................................................................................................................... 8-13
show spantree port edge ............................................................................................................. 8-16
show spantree port point-to-point ................................................................................................ 8-18
show startup-config.................................................................................................................... 21-14
show syslog local ....................................................................................................................... 18-23
show syslog map ....................................................................................................................... 18-21
show syslog server .................................................................................................................... 18-18
show system bridge ................................................................................................................... 21-35
show system date ........................................................................................................................ 2-11
show system information ............................................................................................................... 2-5
show system module-id ............................................................................................................. 21-36
show system revision................................................................................................................. 21-38
show system status.................................................................................................................... 21-33
show system temperature.......................................................................................................... 21-40
show tdm group ........................................................................................................................... 15-3
show tdm path.............................................................................................................................. 15-6
show tdmop connection ............................................................................................................. 16-11
show tdmop format .................................................................................................................... 16-21
show tdmop information............................................................................................................... 16-6
show tdmop jitter........................................................................................................................ 16-17
show tdmop status..................................................................................................................... 16-18
Index
Index-10
show terminal config .................................................................................................................... 1-14
show user account ....................................................................................................................... 1-16
show vlan ethertype..................................................................................................................... 5-14
show vlan summary ..................................................................................................................... 5-11
show vlan swap.............................................................................................................................. 5-9
show vlan table port ....................................................................................................................... 5-5
show vlan table vid......................................................................................................................... 5-6
U
upload all-information................................................................................................................... 21-5
upload fault .................................................................................................................................. 21-6
upload local-syslog ...................................................................................................................... 21-4
upload running-config .................................................................................................................. 21-2
upload startup-config ................................................................................................................... 21-3
W
write memory ............................................................................................................................. 21-24




PASOLINK NEO TE CX2200
Multi-service Transport Gateway
Command Reference
NWD-064953-005

2007 NEC Corporation
Version 2.5 Rev. B
January, 2010
NEC Corporation
(All rights reserved)

NEC Corporation